Home

3C63308 User Guide

1. R DSO Drop and Insert a Via Structured DS1 CBR PBX 2 PathBuilder S330 S310 2 CSU 1 connected to CSU 4 via unstructured DS1 CBR CSU 2 connected to CSU 4 via structured DS1 CBR END2 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 VPIVCIL 0 150 0 200 0 200 0 450 0 250 0 200 0 250 P2 P3 P3 P3 P3 Conn To PVC LAN2 1 LAN3 2 CSU4 B VPI VCl2 PVC 0 100 1 0 100 2 0 150 3 0 200 4 0 250 Forward and Reverse VCCs Match in This Example VCCs are Undirectional Only Forward Vccs are Shown for Easier Viewing END1 LAN2 LAN2 PBX2 END1 LAN3 LAN3 PBX3 CSU4 ATM Port P2 MX Switched Network PBX 3 Port P3 nxT1 PathBuilder S330 S310 3 END2 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 END2 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 T1 nxT1 or E1 nxE1 VPI VCI 0 100 0 200 0 250 VPI VCI 0 100 0 150 0 200 0 250 Circuits Set Up on the PathBuilder S330 S310 2 Conn To LAN1 LAN3 PBX3 Circuits Set Up on the PathBuilder S330 S310 3 Conn To LAN1 LAN2 PBX2 CSU1 Figure 184 shows three PathBuilder S330 switches connected through a carrier ATM network ora private switch The ATM switch or network should be configured with Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs connecting on
2. DTE SDU DXI Data Link DXI Physical DTE DCE DXI mode 1A is designed to allow legacy routers to use frame based transmission to transmit an ATM network to the DXI mode 1A device PathBuilder S330 S310 serial interface which then will perform SAR and AAL5 mapping to an ATM PVC It provides simple and efficient encapsulation of your service data unit and supports AAL5 transit encapsulation See Figure 174 Figure 174 DXI Format Mode 1A DTE SDU DTE Service Data Unit Error Check PN DTE to DSU DXI Frame Octet DSU to ATM Translation AAL 5 SAR PDU Address Maps to from VPI VCI SAR SAR PDU PAA SAR PDU Vv ATM Cell DXI Protocol Mode 1A DXI protocol frame is an HDLC LLC1 frame similar to PPP protocol Mode 1A supports an AAL5 transit encapsulation In terms of the brouter it is easier to implement DXI protocol since it only requires the brouter to encapsulate the SDU DXI protocol supports up to 1023 connections and up to 9232 octets of payload See Figure 174 on the previous page Figure 175 shows the applications for DXI Figure 175 DXI Applications V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 RS 366 PathBuilder S330 S310 PathBuilder S330 S310 A pvo D evel ATM g DXI DXI Mode ATM 1A Mode Native 1A Host When the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch receives a DXI frame from the DXI DTE or an ATM CPCS protocol data unit PDU from the ATM network it translates
3. The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface UAS The number of unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface CSS The number of controlled slip seconds CSSs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface PCV The number of path coding violations PCVs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface LES The number of line errored seconds LESs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface BES The number of bursty errored seconds BESs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface DM The number of degraded minutes DMs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface LCV The number of line coding violations LCVs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface CBR ATM Statistics CBR ATM cell statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset On the CBR ATM Statistics screen you can reset the counter by entering ce ATM statistics are displayed as a list rather than a table The CBR T1 DSX and CBR E1 ATM Statistics screens display the following statistics CBR virtual circuits must be present in the database in order to view these statistics Total Cells Received The total number of cells received over the virtual circuit Total Cells Transmitted The total number of cells transmitted over the virtual circuit Total Cell Pointer Errors The number of cells dropped due to structure pointer mismatches Total Cells Lost Th
4. Destination Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci Speed Status 1111 0 2 0 1 384k active 3333 0 2 0 3 384k idle Table 39 Point to point Video Conferencing Routing Table Remote Unit 3333 Destination Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci Speed Status 1111 0 3 0 1 384k idle 2222 0 3 0 2 384k idle Multi point Video Conferencing In multi point video conferencing an MCU Multi Conference Unit device is connected to one T1 DSX E1 CBR port of a PathBuilder S600 or PathBuilder 330 S310 at the central site The remote PathBuilder S330 S310 switches communicate with each other via their serial V 35 RS 366 ports as they do in point to point video conferencing In addition the remote units can communicate with the MCU at the central site over a vpi vci associated with a fractional T1 E1 bundle of the CBR port connected to the MCU When a remote unit dials the number associated with that vpi vci the central unit sees activity on that line and automatically starts transmitting over the vpi vci thus completing the circuit Figure 195 illustrates multi point video conferencing between three remote PathBuilder S330 switches 1111 2222 and 3333 and one central PathBuilder S600 switch 4444 connected to an MCU Figure 195 Multi point Video Conferencing Video Audio Video Audio Video Audio Codec Codec Codec po P e Pi com Ft com V 35 V 35 V 35 RS 449 RS 366 RS 449 RS 366 RS 449 RS 366 RS 530 RS 530 RS 530 X 21 X
5. The number of header check sequence HCS errored cells encountered on the ATM interface You can view HDLC Frame Relay ATM VC and LMI statistics for the serial port To view serial port statistics From the Card Statistics menu shown earlier in Figure 161 select 5 SIM to open the SIM Statistics menu 2 Select 1 Port 1 3 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view SIM HDLC Statistics SIM HDLC statistics include Received Frames The total number of received frames with good FCS at this port Transmitted Frames The total number of successfully transmitted frames at this port Discarded Invalid Frames The total number of frames discarded at this port because they were invalid received with good FCS but could not be processed due to wrong content Discarded Congested Frames The total number of frames discarded at this port because they were congested not transmitted due to link congestion Received Bytes The total number of bytes received at this port Transmitted Bytes The total number of bytes transmitted at this port FCS Errors The total number of received frames with bad FCS at this port SIM Frame Relay Statistics per DLCI When you select Frame Relay Statistics from the SIM Statistics menu a Frame Relay Statistics table appears listing configured virtual circuits Enter a number corresponding to one of the listed virtual circuits to display a list of Fram
6. a MCPU and CTX Module System Alarms a Alarms Common to Several Interfaces a T1 E1l UNI with IMA Module Alarms a DSX 1 E1 CBR Module Alarms a SIM Alarms a Voice Compression Module Alarms MCPU and CTX Module System Alarms Table 9 describes the Critical and Major Alarms associated with the CPU Module Table 9 MCPU and CTX Module System Alarms Alarm Meaning Managing System Alarms 167 Troubleshooting Steps Alarms Cleared Card Config Failed Card initialized Card Reconfig Failed Card Reconfigured Communication Failed DS3 E3 0C3 CBR IMANVCM Ref Clk Failed Fan 1 failed Fan 2 failed History Overflowed Id Prom Checksum Error Invalid DB Cardtype Login Failure Loss 8KHz Ref Clock New Card Configured PWR Supply Failed Queue 0 Over Threshold continued Current alarms have been cleared by user Cannot upload configuration data to a card Card initialized Reconfiguration of the card failed Card is reconfigured Error during communication between MCPU and a slot Interface clock has been designated as the system clock and the interface clock has failed Fan 1 failed Fan 2 failed Alarm history table has overflowed Alarms will continue to be recorded but will displace oldest alarms The internal checksum on the idprom of the indicated card is incorrect An unknown card type is found in the database Failed log in Someone failed to log in
7. Configuring In band Management 57 To erase the system database CAUTION Before you erase the system database make a record of all configuration settings these settings will be lost when you erase the database Also keep in mind that erasing the database is an action that cannot be undone Perform the following procedure only if you are sure that erasing the database is your best course of action From the Super User Privilege menu shown earlier in Figure 52 select 3 Erase System Database to open the Erase System Database menu This menu displays the following warning and prompt This action will cause a SOFT RESET of the system Do you want to erase the system database Y N N Enter y to erase the system database Configuring In band Management gt In addition to managing the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch out of band you can also manage the unit in band via either the Ethernet LOBASE T port or if you have installed the Ethernet 10 100 module the Ethernet 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet port For detailed instructions on configuring PVCs see Configuring Virtual Circuits in Chapter 4 To configure in band management Open the Add Virtual Circuit menu and set preliminary circuit configuration parameters a From the main menu select 2 Configuration Management to open up the Configuration Management M enu Select 2 Manage Circuit to open the Virtual Circuit M enu Select 2 Add Virtua
8. FC FC Noted Noted Noted FC FC NC FC FC FC Not FC NC FC FC O 21 CR 8 10 NC Reported in the Test Procedure as a failure Reported as an RDI alarm for the link Currently there is no defined FE behavior that causes this alarm within 3Com s implementation Table 44 ATM Forum IMA Specification Compliance Table continued Requirement 3Com Section Description Option Compliance Comments 14 IMA Interaction with Plane R 139 FC Management 15 Management Information O 22 CR 11 NC 3Com Base Enterprise M IBs will be supported 15 1 The Network Management None Noted Framework 15 2 Overview None Noted 15 3 IMA Terminology None Noted 15 3 1 Error Events None Noted 15 3 2 Defects None Noted 15 3 3 Performance Monitoring None Noted Parameters 15 3 4 Failure Alarm States 15 4 MIB Il and RFC 1573 Support None Noted 15 4 1 The ifStack Table None Noted 15 4 2 Interpretations of Interface None Noted Tables for IMA Groups 15 4 3 Interaction with None Noted ifAdminStatus None Noted 15 5 MIB Definition None Noted e e Peace TECHNICAL SUPPORT 3Com provides easy access to technical support information through a variety of services This appendix describes these services Information contained in this appendix is correct at time of publication For the most recent information 3Com recommends that you access the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web site Online Technical Services
9. Port state The state of the Ethernet port connected or not connected Total frames received The total number of frames received at this port Broadcast Frames The number of broadcast frames received on the port Spanning Tree Frames The number of Spanning Tree frames received on the port Discarded Frames The number of valid frames received that were discarded filtered by the forwarding process Flooded Frames The total number of incoming frames that were flooded on this port Forwarded Frames The number of incoming frames at this port that were forwarded Total frames transmitted The total number of frames transmitted at this port Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 199 Filtering Statistics MAC MTU Exceeded The number of frames discarded because of a size greater than the maximum MTU size for the port No ATM VCs present The number of frames discarded because there was no ATM VC associated with the physical port Bridge discards The number of frames discarded due to the bridging operation Output port disabled The number of frames discarded because the output port was disabled Source address filtered The number of frames discarded due to source address filtering Destination address filtered The number of frames discarded due to destination address filtering SAP Filtered The number of frames discarded due to the protocol filtering operation Ethernet Statistics
10. World Wide Web Site 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 3Com FTP Site 3Com offers worldwide product support 24 hours a day 7 days a week through the following online systems a World Wide Web site 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services a 3Com FIP site a 3Com Bulletin Board Service 3Com BBS 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service To access the latest networking information on the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web site enter this URL into your Internet browser http www 3com com This service provides access to online support information such as technical documentation and software library as well as support options that range from technical education to maintenance and professional services This interactive tool contains technical product information compiled by 3Com expert technical engineers around the globe Located on the World Wide Web at http knowledgebase 3com com this service gives all 3Com customers and partners complementary round the clock access to technical information on most 3Com products Download drivers patches software and M IBs across the Internet from the 3Com public FTP site This service is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week To connect to the 3Com FTP site enter the following information into your FTP client a Hostname tp 3com com a Username anonymous a Password lt your Internet e mail address gt 278 APPENDIX D TECHNICAL SUPPORT gt 3Com Bulletin Board You do not
11. 1 Trap Client 1 Cenddguration Trap Client 7 Configuration Irap Client J Gent igquration Irap lint Ceitiquratlon 3 Previous Weri Pleast enter a selection 1 te 5 Sp E Select the number corresponding to the trap client you want to configure Figure 49 shows the menu for configuring trap client 1 Figure 49 Trap Client 1 Configuration Menu Fathiei leer 530 flares PRR Trap Cliewt 1 CosPigerstisn IF bpeti 0 0 0 0 0 Tabat Masi 0 0 0 0 Pert Heber 14E 1 Tet IF ress Sat fabart Hiii F t Fet Hemer b Freri Haa Flac ater a selection 1 te amp t E Performing Initial System Configuration 53 3 Enter the following information by selecting the appropriate options and responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen to configure the trap client IP Address The IP address of the network management station to which you want the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to send traps Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the network management station to which you want the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to send traps Port Number The system defined port number You should not modify this number SNM P UDP 4 Select 4 Previous Menu to return to the Trap Client Configuration menu 5 Select 5 Previous Menu to return to the Manage IP Network Configuration menu Configuring the Default Gateway The default gateway routes IP data to non local networks Telnet sessions from different sub
12. 1022 or 16 991 for one FR DLCI to one ATM VPI VCI The FR SSCS DLCI s for the two end systems should be configured to be the same Providing many to one mapping network interworking only maps multiple DLCIs to one ATM virtual circuit a Managing traffic a Handling congestion Ethernet Interface 1LOBASE T or 10 100BASE T The Ethernet 10BASE T port and optional 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet port on the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch provide multiple connections to Ethernet segments over ATM WAN When the Ethernet interface receives data from the LAN any packets appearing on the 10BASE T or 10 100BASE T port are checked for packet integrity and stored in the shared memory area The system then performs a bridge operation to determine if the packet will be sent on to any other interface See Bridge Operation below for details m If the packet is to go on the HDLC port it is bridged directly after being encapsulated properly for Frame Relay m If the packet is to go on an ATM interface the bridge determines the VCI connection for the packet destination The packet is then encapsulated according to RFC 1483 and the descriptor is handed off to the SAR together with the associated ATM header descriptor The SAR appends the AAL5 convergence sublayer to the packets and queues them according to the shaper you specify for that connection The packet is then segmented according to the rate of the traffic descriptor and the cel
13. 28 2 In SD 27 9 In RD 11 4 Out RD 12 11 Out SCTE In SCTE In SCR 24 6 Out SCR 23 13 Out SCT Out SCT Out Shorting GR 1 48 49 Table 29 lists the connector pinouts for the CBR module s T1 DSX E1 port s CBR T1 DSX E1 Pinouts Table 29 PIN 1 RX ring PIN 2 RX tip PIN 3 NC PIN 4 TX ring PIN 5 TX tip PIN 6 NC PIN 7 NC PIN 8 NC Table 30 lists the connector pinouts for the CBR V 35 RS 366 Y cable Table 30 CBR V 35 RS 366 Connector Pinouts Connector type at end of DB 25 subminiature V 35 RS 366 cable female for DCE From To Connector pinouts Frame Ground J1 46 J2 A Circuit Ground J1 45 J2 B RTS J1 35 J2 C CTS J1 42 J2 D DSR J1 43 J2 E DCD j1 44 J2 F DTR J1 34 J2 H LL J1 33 J2 K SD J1 28 J2 P SD J1 27 J2 S RD J1 18 J2 R RD J1 17 J2 T SCTE J1 26 J2 U SCTE J1 25 J2 W SCR J1 22 J2 V SCR J1 21 J2 X SCT J1 20 J2 Y SCT J1 19 J2 AA 366_RI J1 50 J2 J 366_PWI J1 29 J3 6 366_ACR J1 31 J3 3 366 PND J1 32 J3 5 366 DSC J1 36 J3 13 366 DLO J1 37 J3 22 366 _NB1 J1 38 J3 14 366 _NB2 J1 39 J3 15 366 _NB4 J1 40 J3 16 366_NB8 J1 41 J3 17 366_CRQ J1 47 J3 4 366_DPR J1 59 J3 2 Signal Ground J1 56 J3 7 SHT GRP 1 J1 49 J1 48 2 SHT GRP 2 J1 50 J1 51 2 SHT GRP 3 J1 53 J1 54 J1 55 J1 56 2 232 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Voice Compression Module Connector Pinouts Table 31 lists the connector pinouts for the
14. If a STAP bridge timer expires before receiving a Hello C BPDU it assumes that the root bridge or a link between itself and the root bridge has gone down It then initiates a reconfiguration of the Spanning Tree When a port goes down for instance when an ATM VC is deleted the port card notifies the STAP module of such a change The STAP module then reinitiates the process of electing a root bridge and the Spanning Tree calculation process begins all over again Spanning Tree Operation The Spanning Tree operates as follows For more detailed information about Spanning Tree see IEEE802 1d a An STAP module runs as a task on the management card This task is responsible for maintaining all data structures for Spanning Tree operation for all ports and for sending receiving Spanning Tree configuration packets Spanning Tree Bridge configuration Protocol Data Units BPDUs are received at Ethernet port cards on Ethernet and ATM ports and are sent to the STAP module on the management card m The management card STAP module examines the packet reads the MAC address of the sender and analyzes the costs reported by the sender a When the port s state changes the STAP notifies the port card of the change a When a port card receives change information for a port it updates the operational state of the port so as to change the bridging operation on the port For instance if a port in a forwarding state normal operation mo
15. If you are configuring a VCM VCC circuit you simply set the common Shaper Number Priority and Early Packet Discard parameters If you are configuring a VCM Subchannel circuit you must also set the DLCI DSO Channel and Subchannel ID SCID For descriptions of the VCM Subchannel circuit parameters see Adding VCM Subchannel Circuits earlier in this chapter The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch supports VC and VP address translation on the receive VPI VCI end of a circuit a To configure VP address translation set the receive VCI to when you enter the circuit address in the Add Virtual Circuit menu This rule applies for all valid values of VPI 0 to 255 a To configure VC address translation set the VPI in the range 0 to 3 and set the VCI to a value other than x The PathBuilder 330 S310 software automatically sets the VCI to 0 whenever you select a VPI greater than 3 for the receive VPI indicating that for values greater than 3 for the receive VPI the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch can build only VP address translated circuits This is relevant only for the receive VPI VCI end of the circuit 152 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Viewing Existing Virtual Circuits You can view summaries of existing virtual circuits for the entire chassis or by port or group Viewing Virtual Circuits for the Entire Chassis To view a summary of existing virtual circuits for the entire chassis
16. In structured voice DBA the CBR software reads the stored signaling bits and releases bandwidth when it detects an on hook idle condition Use structured voice circuits with DBA for CAS channel associated signaling applications To configure a CBR virtual circuit for structured voice DBA follow these basic steps Configure the CBR port as follows m Set the Port Mode to Structured Voice m Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application Configure the CBR virtual circuit as follows a Set the Payload Size Type to Voice m Set Onhook Detection to Enabled a Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application Configuring CBR Circuits for Clear Channel Signaling Due to the rob bit signaling employed in CAS each T1 DSO channel can have only up to 56 Kbps of bandwidth To create a full 64 Kbps DSO clear channel in structured voice mode follow these basic steps Configure the CBR port as follows m Set the Port Mode to Structured Voice m Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application Configure the T1 CBR virtual circuit as follows a Set the Payload Size Type to Data m Set Onhook Detection to Disabled a Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application Configuring CBR Circuits for Structured Data DBA CCS In structured data DBA the CBR software reads the DSO payload bytes and releases bandwidth when it detects an on hook idle condition Use st
17. TC1 signaling bits CBR parameter 121 voice compression parameter 130 TC2 signaling bits CBR parameter 121 voice compression parameter 130 technical support 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 277 3Com URL 277 bulletin board service 278 fax service 278 network suppliers 278 product repair 280 terminal timing source serial port parameter 98 test link IMA group parameter 84 test pattern IMA group parameter 84 test procedure IMA group parameter 84 IMA link parameter 89 Time and Date Configuration menu 54 time and date setting 54 timing CBR parameter 121 CBRT1 DSX options 122 external 240 internal 240 T1 El parameter 79 timing options CBRT1 DSX 122 timing source OC3 STM 1 parameter 94 title screen 42 tone injection 185 total bridgeup time spanning tree statistic 200 total cell pointer errors CBR ATM statistic 202 total cells lost CBR ATM statistic 202 total cells received CBR ATM statistic 202 total cells transmitted CBR ATM statistic 202 total CRC errors CBR ATM statistic 203 total forward transitions spanning tree statistic 200 total frames received Ethernet bridge statistic 198 total frames transmitted Ethernet bridge statistic 198 total number of buffer overflows CBR ATM statistic 202 total number of buffer underflows CBR ATM statistic 202 total OAM cells received CBR ATM statistic 203 total OAM cells transmitted CBR ATM statistic 203 total out of sequence errors CBR ATM statistic 202 traffic cont
18. The following prompt appears This action will erase the flash memory Do you want to download firmware Y N N 4 Enter y and wait for the ready to download message 5 From a workstation or PC typically the same one doing the Telnet invoke TFTP using the PathBuilder S330 S310 IP address From TFTP do binary put image abs where image abs is the filename of the image file to download The download will complete in about two minutes over lightly loaded Ethernet The TFTP should indicate that the file is transferred and the Telnet screen should display download complete Downloading Firmware Using FTP via an Ethernet port To download new firmware using FTP via an Ethernet port 1 Obtain the following from 3Com Customer Service a FTP login information a Image file location and name 2 Download a new image file to your workstation or PC a From the DOS prompt change to the directory into which you want to download the file b Invoke FTP using the information you obtained in step 1 c Change to the directory in which the image file is located d Get the image file get lt image filename gt where lt image filename gt is the correct image filename 3 Download the new firmware to the PathBuilder S330 S310 unit using FTP a FTP to the node FTP lt node IP address gt a FTP login will be the node name upper left hand corner of user interface a FTP password will be the node password the password used to access
19. Threshold Queue 2 Over Threshold Queue 3 Over Threshold SAR Initialize Failure System Clock Reverted System power up Write Session Taken by Super User The congestion threshold for Queue 1was exceeded The congestion threshold for Queue 2was exceeded The congestion threshold for Queue 3 was exceeded Problem with the SAR chip on the MCPU MCPU SAR failed initialization The system clock has reverted to a higher priority clock System is powered up A super user has changed a read only session to read write Alarms Common to Several Interfaces Table 10 describes major alarms common to several PathBuilder 330 S310 interfaces Table 10 Alarms Common to Several Modules Alarm Meaning Check and correct VC connections Check and adjust VI shaper values Check and adjust incoming traffic volume Check for faulty IMA links which may reduce traffic handling fora group Check and correct VC connections Check and adjust VI shaper values Check and adjust incoming traffic volume Check for faulty IMA links which may reduce traffic handling fora group Check and correct VC connections Check and adjust VI shaper values Check and adjust incoming traffic volume Check for faulty IMA links which may reduce traffic handling fora group Replace the unit Information only This alarm occurs only if the Clock Mode is set to Revertive on the System Clock Configuration menu Information only
20. Transmitted Frames The total number of frames transmitted at this port Transmitted bytes The total number of bytes transmitted at this port Received Frames The total number of frames received at this port Received bytes The total number of bytes received at this port CRC errored frames The number of frames with CRC errors detected at this port Deferred transmits The number of frames for which the first transmission attempt at this port was delayed because the port was busy not including frames involved in collisions Single collisions The number of successfully transmitted frames at this port for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple collisions The number of successfully transmitted frames at this port for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Late collisions The number of times that a collision has been detected on this port later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet Excessive collisions The number of frames for which transmission at this port failed due to excessive collisions Carrier sense errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame at this port Internal transmit errors The number of frames for which reception at this port failed due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error Oversized frames The number of frames received at this port tha
21. Transparent or 2 Translation Transparent This mode is used for point to point frame relay interconnection See Figure 138 Frame Relay Forum 8 FRF 8 Service Interworking for this is being implemented There are two modes at which FRF 8 specifies a mode which is transparent and is in fact 1490 over ATM Translation This mode is used in cases when you have ATM devices that do not support 1490 as a protocol across their ATM trunks for example when you have a PathBuilder S330 S310 switch terminating the ATM network at one end and an ATM ready device such as a router with an OC 3 UNI at the other end Typically these ATM ready devices do not support 1490 as a protocol across their ATM trunks so you have to do LLC_SNAP 1483 per FRF8 Mode 1F does 1490 to 1483 translation See Figure 139 148 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 138 FRF 8 Transparent Encapsulation Mode DLCI VCC DLCI FRR FRR lt lt gt RFC 1490 RFC 1433 Encapsulated RFC 1490 Figure 139 Translation Encapsulation Mode DLCI VCC ATM Router with FRR IWF FRR lt Translation RFC 1490 RFC 1483 DE CLP CLP DE DE to CLP CLP to DE mapping DE to CLP defines the value to which CLP will be set in outgoing ATM cells CLP to DE mapping defines the value to which DE will be set from incoming ATM cells in outgoing Frame Relay frames Direct Mode 1 mapping m
22. VCM is similar in function to the CBR module but it employs compression algorithms that allow more voice calls to be placed through the same bandwidth The VCM s T1 DSX E1 interface connects to a PBX trunk which may use CAS or CCS signaling Its 24 30 DSO channels can carry individual voice fax modem or data connections You can also bundle multiple DSOs to provide connections for high rate applications such as video conference or multiple link PPP For CCS a DSO is used as an ISDN D channel for carrying signal messages The Ethernet 10 100 module provides a one port PCI Ethernet interface that you can set for 10 Mbps or 100M bps full or half duplex or configure for autosensing ure 2 shows the PathBuilder S310 switch with the optional CBR module installed in expansion slot 7 and the Voice Compression module in slot 8 Figure 2 PathBuilder S310 WAN Access Switch Video Audio Codec PBX PBX jie Hi an iq V 35 ae a5 eT T1 DSX E1 T1 DSX E1 RS 530 X 21 10BASE T TE NMS Console Router LAN lad Application Support 330 Only 330 Only The PathBuilder S330 S310 switches support the following applications a 4xXT1 E1 8 x T1 E1 with four port expansion card IMA function on the trunk up to four trunk groups individual T1s E1s a Single T1 E1 for PathBuilder S310 switch a OC3 STM 1 UNI port interface
23. a Multiple connections to Ethernet segments over ATM WAN and support of bridging including learning aging filtering spanning tree and classical IP over ATM RFC 1577 2225 through the standard Ethernet 1OBASE T port and the optional Ethernet 10 100BASE T Ethernet PCI module The standard Ethernet 10BASE T port supports half duplex only while the optional Ethernet 10 100BASE T port supports both half and full duplex Support of Frame Relay service and network interworking ATM DXI and SDLC HDLC pass through through the high performance serial frame data interface Three expansion slots allowing you to add other advanced features such as T1 DSX or El CBR for voice and video voice compression or Ethernet 10 100 support The following optional modules are available for use with the PathBuilder S310 switch Fig The two port CBR module services traffic generated by your existing PBXs channels T1 E1 multiplexers CSU DSUs and video conferencing devices The CBR module consists of one V 35 RS 449 and one T1 DSX or E1 interface which support both structured and unstructured services in accordance with the ATM Forum s Circuit Emulation Service CES specifications The CBR module provides a smooth migration from legacy CBR service PBX voice video to ATM service It also supports all relevant ATM and T1 E1 standards ensuring easy integration of existing equipment into new ATM networks The one port Voice Compression module
24. a Status In Service or Out of Service Typically ATM network users purchase service at certain data rates and agree not to transmit cells above certain thresholds into the ATM network ATM network providers on the other hand are responsible for ensuring that users do not exceed these subscribed bandwidth levels Network providers can use shapers to ensure conformance to the traffic contract The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch supports three M CPU shaper parameters a Peak Cell Rate PCR The number of cells per second a given port will accept from the port subscriber Since it is not intuitive to think about cell streams over a given period however you can think of the PCR as the minimum amount of time acceptable between successive cells Sustained Cell Rate SCR The average value of bandwidth utilization over some predetermined time the average rate at which cells may be sent to the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch The SCR is used in conjunction with maximum burst size M BS a Maximum Burst Size MBS The maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate You can also use the MBS to determine the actual length of a PCR burst MBS is used in conjunction with sustained cell rate SCR Using the MCPU Shapers screen shown later in this section in Figure 62 you can configure up to 15 shapers The values that you set for the shapers on this screen are the values that are then available for the Shaper Number parameter
25. defined in the System Clock Configuration menu as its timing source For details about designating the system clock see Configuring the System Clock in Chapter 3 Loop Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the timing source timing is received from the service loop Select this option if the E3 UNI module is used for the network carrier service termination in which case the carrier the service loop typically provides the timing source Configuring the Serial Interface 95 PLCP Timing Source DS3 only The PLCP timing source for the DS3 port System Clock PLCP is timed from the internal 8kHz backplane clock DS3 Timing PLCP is timed from the 8kHz reference clock derived from the received PLCP CTX Timing Source The CTX timing source for the DS3 E3 port DS3 E3 Rx Clock Selects the DS3 or E3 Rx clock as the CTX timing source Configuring the Serial Configuring the serial interface involves the following tasks Interface a Configuring the serial port Configuring the serial card Configuring the Serial To configure the serial port Port 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 2 From the List Card menu select 5 SIM to open the SIM Configuration Port Card Selection menu shown in Figure 85 Figure 85 SIM Configuration Port Card Selection Menu EREDE Correct Eri arina
26. differential delay Noted Noted Noted Noted Noted Noted Noted FC FC NC Noted Noted FC FC FC FC FC FC Partial Smooth Compliance addition is not supported Smooth deletion is supported 274 APPENDIX C ATM Forum IMA COMPLIANCE Table 44 Section 11 11 1 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 1 3 12 1 3 1 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 2 2 1 12 2 2 2 12 2 3 13 ATM Forum IMA Specification Compliance Table continued Description IMA Frame Synchronization Mechanism Alpha Beta Gamma Values IMA Frame Synchronization with Stuff Events Maintaining synchronization IMA Interface OAM Implementation IMA OAM Functions IMA Group Maintenance Signals IMA Link M aintenance Signals IMA Link Error Handling IMA Link Recovery Mechanisms IM A Performance and Failure Alarm M onitoring Performance Monitoring Objectives Performance Monitoring Parameters IMA Performance Primitives IM A Performance Parameters Link and Group IMA Failure Alarms Clearing of Fault Failure Alarm Test Pattern Procedure continued Requirement Option R 95 98 0 9 10 R 99 O 11 12 None None None R 100 R 101 102 R 103 105 None None None None R 106 R 107 120 O 13 19 CR 7 R 121 122 127 133 R 123 R 124 R 125 126 0 20 R 134 R 135 138 O 21 CR 8 10 3Com Compliance Comments FC NC FC NC Noted Noted FC
27. ports PVCs video dialup and other hardware and software features a Select 3 Fault Management to view or acknowledge alarms and set loopbacks a Select 4 Performance Management to view statistical data a Select 5 Exit to log out Using the Menus gt Navigating Through the Menus The title of the menu or display appears at the top of the screen Your access status appears in the upper righthand corner a Read Write means that you have Read Write control of the PathBuilder 330 S310 and can make changes to the system a Read Only means that you can only monitor the menus and displays Only one Read Write session is allowed at any given time The first session is the Read Write session Subsequent simultaneous sessions are Read Only You select a menu option by typing the selection number and pressing Enter Displays that contain information and no selections include the prompt Press Esc for previous menu M ulti page displays also prompt you to press N for the next page or P for the previous page Only the main menu contains the Exit selection to log out Selecting Exit returns you to the title screen with the password prompt All other menus have a Previous menu selection which returns you to the main menu one screen at a time You can also press Esc to move back one menu at a time 44 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Understanding the Menu Hierarchy Using the Menus to Change Settings A
28. speed and duplex mode and sets itself accordingly If the equipment to which the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is connected does not support autosensing the port falls back to the speed of the remote equipment Configuring the CBR Module The optional CBR module features three T1 E1 CBR ports and one serial port PathBuilder S330 switch or one T1 E1 CBR port and one serial port PathBuilder S310 switch Configuring the CBR module involves the following tasks a Configuring the CBR T1 E1 port s a Configuring the CBR serial port a Configuring the CBR card 116 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Configuring the CBR To configure the CBR T1 DSX E1 port s T1 DSX E1 Port s 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card 2 From the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 select 7 CBR to open the CBR Configuration Selection menu Figure 109 shows the CBR E1 Configuration Selection menu The CBR T1 DSX Configuration Selection menu is the same Figure 109 CBR E1 Configuration M enu ilde ttti alma FPS S35 Cesfigerstiss Fert F Bert 4 8 4 Cord Gaig etic breviest Hea Flere water a telection 1 te amp f 3 Select the option corresponding to the port you want to configure 1 Port 1 2 Port 2 or 3 Port 3 The CBR T1 DSX E1Port Configuration menu for the selected port appears Figure 110 shows a CBR Port Configuration menu for an CBR E
29. the SONET equipment will signal this state This statistic is listed as a numeric value 0 or 1 with 1 indicating that a UEQ condition exists PLM Indicates whether or not a path signal label mismatch as been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 interface This statistic is listed as a numeric value 0 or 1 with 1 indicating that a PLM condition exists OC3 STM 1 Far Path Performance Statistics The OC3 STM 1 Far Path Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics ES The number of far end errored seconds ESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface SES The number of far end severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface UAS The number of far end unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface CVS The number of far end coding violations CVs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface Viewing DS3 Card Statistics Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 193 Viewing OC3 STM 1 ATM Statistics To view OC3 STM 1 ATM statistics From the Performance Management menu select 4 OC3 STM 1 UNI to open the OC3 STM 1 Performance Management menu Select 2 ATM Statistics ATM cell statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset On the OC3 STM 1 ATM Statistics screen you can reset the counter by entering c The OC3 STM 1 ATM Statistics menu provides the following information Cells Received The number of ATM cells received on
30. transitioned from the learning state to the forwarding state Total BridgeUp Time The total amount of time that this port has been up as part of the Spanning Tree bridge IP over ATM Statistics The IP Over ATM Statistics screen displays the following statistics ARP Status LAN Router The IP address of the LAN router that passes the IP traffic over the ATM network MAC Addr The MAC address of the LAN router that passes the IP traffic over the ATM network ATM Router The IP address of the ATM router that passes the IP traffic over the ATM network LAN Side Statistics Received IP Packets The total number of IP packets received on the port Forward IP Packets The total number of IP packets received from the port and forwarded Discarded IP Packets The total number of IP packets received from the port and dropped RX ARP Request The total number of ARP request packets received on the port RX ARP Reply The total number of ARP response packets received on the port Viewing CBR Module Card Statistics ATM Side Statistics Received IP Packets The total number of IP packets received on the virtual circuit assigned at the port Forward IP Packets The total number of IP packets received from the virtual circuit and forwarded Discarded IP Packets The total number of IP packets received from the virtual circuit and dropped RX ARP Request The total number of ARP request packets received on t
31. 1 UNI to open the OC3 STM 1 Performance Management menu Select 1 OC3 STM 1 Performance Monitoring to open the OC3 STM 1 Performance Management menu shown in Figure 162 Figure 162 OC3 STM 1 Performance Management M enu Connect Edi orna Hal hms Fathiei leer 0430 alma PRPS Sisti CE FerFermaece Hewitering Heey Poe eee FH Pee bispi Wt List FH bata Pepe WF Fer Lier FH Bete bispi O23 Path FPH bata ieee AF Fer Fete FH Bete Citar a1 PH bata Freviews Hram j dr be Ph i Fleet eater pelecties 1 te 7 F i 3 4 Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 191 Select the option corresponding to the type of performance monitoring PM data you want to view section line far line path or far path Select the option corresponding to the type of data you want to display current interval or total The OC3 STM 1 Performance Monitoring screen displays the current interval or total data for the type of statistic you selected in step 2b The following subsections list the statistics displayed for each of these types of performance monitoring OC3 STM 1 Section Performance Statistics The OC3 STM 1 Section Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics ES The number of errored seconds ESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 section SES The number of severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 section SEFS The number of severely errored framing seconds S
32. 1 interface 192 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS UAS The number of far end unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 interface CVS The number of far end coding violations CVs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 interface OC3 STM 1 Path Performance Statistics The OC3 STM 1 Path Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics ES The number of errored seconds ESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface SES The number of severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface UAS The number of unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface CVS The number of coding violations CVs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface LOP Indicates whether or not a Loss of Pointer LOP condition has been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface AIS Indicates whether or not an Alarm Indicator Signal AIS condition has been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface RDI Indicates whether or not a Remote Defect Indication RDI condition has been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface Also known as FERF Far End Receive Failure This is the alarm that is generated when a far end AIS or LOP defect is detected UEQ Indicates whether or not an Unequipped UEQ condition has been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 path interface If a path is not provisioned in other words it is idle
33. 110 16 or 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1 Turn off the AC DC power source and connect the AC DC leads to the front of the shelf Dress the leads to the rack leaving a service loop 2 Turn on AC DC power and verify that the POWER indicator on the power supply is on and that the fans are running Figure 20 shows the shelf fill for the AC DC power application Figure 20 Shelf Fill for AC DC Power Application AC Units Only GD AC Power Connector Fuse Holder Redundant Power Supply RPS Connector on DC Units Only DC Power Connector e GND Installing the Optional RPS System The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch also supports the SuperStack Il Redundant Power Supply RPS Figure 20 above shows the location of the RPS Only connect a 3Com RPS option 3C 16073 to this socket For details follow the installation instructions in the guide accompanying the RPS Installation Procedures 27 Figure 21 illustrates the power supply socket and fuse Figure 21 SuperStack Il RPS Power Supply Socket and Fuse Spare fuse holder fy Fuse I AC Power The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch automatically adjusts to the supply voltage The fuse is suitable for both 110V AC and 220 240V AC operations To change the fuse 1 Turn of the power and unplug the unit CAUTION Ensure
34. 178 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Loopbacks 179 OC3 STM 1 Loopbacks 180 DS3 Loopbacks 181 E3 Loopbacks 181 CBR Loopbacks 182 Setting VCM Loopbacks 182 Setting VCM Port Loopbacks 183 Setting VCM Channel Loopbacks 184 Setting Tone Injection 185 Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 185 Viewing Card Statistics 186 Viewing MCPU Card Statistics 187 Viewing T1 E1 UNI with IMA Card Statistics 187 T1 E1 Port Link Statistics 188 T1 E1 Group Statistics 189 Viewing OC3 STM 1 Card Statistics 190 Viewing OC3 STM 1 Performance Statistics 190 Viewing OC3 STM 1 ATM Statistics 193 Viewing DS3 Card Statistics 193 Viewing DS3 UNI Performance Statistics 193 Viewing DS3 UNI ATM Statistics 194 Viewing E3 Card Statistics 194 Viewing E3 UNI Performance Statistics 194 Viewing E3 UNI ATM Statistics 195 Viewing SIM Card Statistics 195 SIM HDLC Statistics 195 SIM Frame Relay Statistics per DLC 196 SIM DXI Statistics 196 SIM ATM VC Statistics per VCI 196 SIM LMI Statistics 197 Viewing Ethernet Card Statistics 197 Ethernet Statistics 198 Spanning Tree Statistics 200 IP over ATM Statistics 200 Ethernet ATM VC STatistics 201 Viewing CBR Module Card Statistics 201 CBR Performance Monitoring Statistics 202 CBR ATM Statistics 202 Viewing Voice Compression Module Statistics 203 Voice Compression M odule Performance Monitoring Statistics 204 Voice Compression Module VC Statistics 205 Voice Compression Module Port Activity Statistics 206 Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics 20
35. 2 Soanning Tree Configuration to open the Spanning Tree Configuration menu shown in Figure 94 Figure 94 Spanning Tree Configuration M enu oA Tasei 152 67 ZHUHAI Fathieiloer oo ian MENN ENRERMET slot amp Spammiiog Iret ConfPigersties ipeeeieg irer Speretiee File Ericgt Friarity hex 000 Belle Timer 7 pecami Feruard belay Tim 15 Ek He g Timer 70 eens 1 Set Hei Tee Pprrplisa 2 Set briage Prierity btr F Set Belle Timer W tet Ferward belag Tim 5 Et Ha ogee Tir Previea Haa Pirot tater a selection 1 te amp 8 Jf Set the following spanning tree parameters Spanning Tree Operation Enables or disables the spanning tree Bridge Priority The value of the write able portion of the bridge ID the first two octets of the eight octet bridge ID The Bridge Priority is a hex value in the range 0 FFFF The other last six octets of the bridge ID are given by the value of dotldBaseBridge Address Hello Timer The time interval between issuing Spanning Tree Protocol configuration messages 1 10 seconds Forward Delay Timer The amount of time in the learning and listening states In other words half the amount of time that must elapse between the time when it is decided that a port should become part of the spanning tree and the time when data traffic is allowed to be forwarded to and from that port 4 to 30 seconds Max Age Timer The maximum age of Span
36. 6 DSR PIN 7 RTS PIN 8 CTS Ethernet Interface Table 18 lists the connector pinouts for the standard Ethernet 10BASE T port LOBASE T and 10 100BASE T Table 18 Ethernet 10BASE T Pinouts Connector Pinouts PIN 1 Tx PIN 2 Tx PIN 3 Rx PIN 4 NC PIN 5 NC PIN 6 Rx PIN 7 NC PIN 8 NC Table 19 lists the connector pinouts for the optional Ethernet 10 100BASE TX module Table 19 Ethernet 10 100 BASE T Pinouts PIN 1 TX PIN 2 TX PIN 3 Rx PIN 4 NC PIN 5 NC PIN 6 Rx PIN 7 NC PIN 8 NC T1 E1 UNI with IMA Table 20 lists the connector pinouts for the T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface Interface Connector Pinouts Table 20 11 E1 UNI with IMA Pinouts PIN 1 Rx ring PIN 2 Rx tip PIN 3 NC PIN 4 Tx ring PIN 5 Tx tip PIN 6 NC PIN 7 NC PIN 8 NC The connector pinouts for the optional four port IMA expansion module are the same as those for the standard T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface Serial Port Connector The following tables list the connector pinouts for the serial port interfaces V 35 Pinouts RS 422 EIA530 and X 21 PathBuilder S330 S310 cables are compatible with Cisco cables except for the DCE EIA530 which Cisco does not manufacture Table 21 Connector Pinouts for V 35 DTE Cable Part 3C63913 Pin on 60 pin Pin onV 35
37. 84 maximum age spanning tree statistic 200 maximum burst size MBS 71 MBS maximum burst size 71 MCPU Shapers screen 72 MCPU virtual circuit parameters IP address 150 IPX address 151 subnet mask 150 media type Ethernet 10 100 PCI parameter 117 memory partition 236 menus Bridge 105 Bridge Configuration 104 Bridge Setup 107 Card Statistics 186 CBR T1 DSX and V35 Configuration 118 changing settingson 44 Configuration Management 68 69 CTX 73 CTX Buffers 75 236 CTX Queue Buffer Configuration 75 CTX Shapers 74 Default Gateway Configuration 53 Destination Address Filter 109 DS3 UNI Configuration 94 Ethernet Configuration Port Card Selection 103 Ethernet Port IP Configuration 50 Ethernet Statistics 198 Fault Management 165 General System Information 60 Group 81 83 hierarchy 44 how to navigate 43 IPoverATM 112 113 IP over ATM Admin Status Change 115 IP over ATM ATM Router Configuration 115 IP over ATM LAN Router Configuration 115 List Card 69 70 LM Configuration 100 Local Host IP Configuration 50 Loopback 178 main 43 Manage Bridge 104 Manage IP Network Configuration 49 Manage Video Dial 161 OC3 Reference Clock Selection 47 OC3 STM 1 Loopback 179 OC3 STM 1 Performance Management 190 PCI Ethernet Configuration 117 Priority Clock Configuration 47 SIM Configuration Port Card Selection 96 SIM Port Configuration Port LM Selection 97 Source Address Filter 108 Source Protocol Filter 107 Spanning Tree Configura
38. Adapter part number 3C63904 T1 E1 UNI Interface LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of each T1 E1 port See Figure 24 The PathBuilder S330 switch has four of each of the following LEDs one for each T1 E1 port The PathBuilder S310 switch has one of each of the following LEDs for its one T1 E1 port a ALARM PORT N red Powers up in the off state and illuminates when an alarm condition is detected on the corresponding T1 E1 line ONLINE PORT N green Powers up in the off state and illuminates when you set the administrative status of the T1 E1 port to In Service See Configuring the T1 E1 Interface in Chapter 4 for details about how to set the administrative status of the T1 E1 ports and or IMA groups Figure 24 PathBuilder 330 T1 E1 UNI LEDs a i i T i poss kooo NOTE The PathBuilder S310 has only one set of functioning LEDs Alarm Online 30 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Connecting to the Serial Port To connect to the serial port connect a DTE or DCE cable to the MOLEX 60 pin connector on the front of the unit The cable options for the serial port are DCE V 35 The connector type on the V 35 cable converter is 35 pin Winchester female a DTE DCE RS 449 The connector type at the end of the RS 449 cable is DB 37 subminiature female for DCE mal
39. Chit is the most common setting as its use of overhead bits for administration and maintenance allows the service provider more visibility in isolating any issues with the physical line connections through the WAN You must match this setting at the two ends of the DS3 trunk 94 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS ATM Cell Mapping How the carrier will provision the DS3 UNI service from the carrier ATM switch Clear HEC or PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol Clear is the option preferred by both domestic and international service providers and within private ATM networks as it gives more payload bandwidth than PLCP You must match this setting at the two ends of the DS3 trunk ATM Payload Scramble Enables yes or disables No payload scrambling for the DS3 port Payload scrambling scrambles the 48 byte payload in outgoing cells in a defined manner and unscrambles the payload in incoming cells It is a technique used to avoid certain transmission equipment behaviors for example erroneous alarm conditions that are caused by sensitivity to certain bit patterns in the ATM payload You must match this setting at the two ends of the DS3 trunk FEAC Loopback DS3 only Enables or disables the system from responding to FEAC Far End Alarm Condition loopback commands loopback activate and deactivate FEAC codes from the central office FEAC is a DS3 overhead function that the service
40. Circuit screen when you select the CBR module to be a side of a circuit vary depending on whether you select the V 35 port or one of the T1 E1 ports In addition to the common Shaper Number Priority and Early Packet Discard parameters you must set the following parameters Port The CBR module port number CDV Buffer Size The Cell Delay Variation buffer size 1 24 ms Cell delay variation refers to the spacing between cells The PathBuilder S330 S310 provides a buffer to account for cell delay variation and thereby prevent cell loss If the cell delay variation exceeds the size of the buffer however then you will lose cells If your cell loss counts are high try setting the cell delay variation to a higher value Your service provider can tell you the maximum cell delay variation for your service Cell Loss Integ Period The amount of time the system will wait before declaring cell loss state Payload Size Type The ATM payload size and type For ports other than structured voice DSX 1 ports this is a read only parameter For structured voice DSX 1 ports select Voice or Data a Set the Payload Size Type to Voice to configure a CAS channel associated signaling channel for structured voice For details see Configuring CBR Circuits for DBA earlier in this chapter a Set the Payload Size Type to Data to configure a CBR circuit for clear channel signaling For details see Configuring CBR Circuits for Clear Chan
41. Cosmet amp Site Bertiseties Fieger fi 535 Carreat Ceaaetties States IHE 1 tat Be Clesties Pee E Set Ceti 3 Preia Hin Plitis weber telection 1 te 4 3 f 3 Select 1 Set Destination Phone and enter the phone number of the site to which you want to connect gt Viewing the Video Call Routing Table Managing the Video Dial Feature 157 4 Select 2 Set Connection The session begins as soon as the software matches the phone number you entered in step 3 to one of the numbers on the call routing table one of the numbers associated with an RS 366 virtual circuit template Ending Video Dial up Sessions A video dial up session ends disconnects automatically when the video call is disconnected You can also end disconnect a video dial up session via the PathBuilder 330 S310 interface To do this From the Configuration Management menu select 5 Manage Video Dial to open the Manage Video Dial menu shown earlier in Figure 144 From the Manage Video Dial menu select 3 Manually Disconnect A Site to open the Manually Disconnect A Site menu shown in Figure 146 The destination phone number for the current session and the current connection status are displayed at the top of the menu Figure 146 Manually Disconnect A Site Menu Fathi leer 130 alma FP Henge Firet fite Bertiseties Fieger fi 555 12Fe Carreat Caaatties States ati 1 Set Bitcoaaect Z Froeviees Meow Flees eater a selectin
42. DBA both for CAS channel associated signaling and CCS common channel signaling applications Table 8 summarizes the key CBR port and virtual circuit parameters for these types of applications For details about how DBA works see DSO Signaling and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation in Appendix B Table 8 CBR Port and Circuit Settings for CAS versus CCS Parameter Setting for CAS Setting for CCS Port Mode Structured Voice Structured Data Port Data Bits M ask N A Leave at default setting 127 in most cases for details see Checking the Data Bytes to Determine a DBA Bits Mask Setting after this table VC Payload Size Type Voice Set automatically when VC Mode set to DBA VC Onhook Detection Enabled Set automatically when VC Mode set to DBA VC Mode N A DBA for channels 1 23 DSX 1 or 1 15 and 17 31 E1 Normal for channel 24 DSX 1 or 16 E1 Checking the Data Bytes to Determine a DBA Bits Mask Setting CCS monitors for voice activity In most cases the default DBA Bits M ask 127 works but if you are having a problem with a CCS circuit you can set the DBA Bits M ask to monitor any bits The unit will monitor the virtual circuit and you can use the activity reported on the channel reported under CBR ATM statistics as Data Bytes To to determine the proper DBA Bits Mask For details about checking the data bytes see CBR ATM Statistics in Chapter 5 gt Configuring CBR Circuits for Structured Voice DBA CAS
43. Ethernet PCI Port LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the Ethernet 10 100BASE T port See Figure 32 a ACT Indicates that there is traffic on the PCI Ethernet port If this LED is off then no data is currently being received or transmitted on the port a 10LNK Indicates a valid 10 Mbps link has been established 100 LNK Indicates a valid 100 M bps link has been established If neither the 10 LNK nor the 100 LNK LED is on a valid link could not be established Figure 32 PathBuilder S330 S310 Ethernet 10 100BASE T Port LEDs 100 LNK 10 LNK ACT 330 only Installation Procedures 37 Connecting to the DS3 E3 Module Connect the DS3 E3 module to a DS3 repeater using the female BNC connectors The maximum coax run is 450 feet The transmitter in the DS3 UNI Module includes selectable LBO Line Build Out to adjust the output signal to cable runs of 0 255 or 225 450 feet Select the LBO during card configuration from the local terminal or NMS For details see Configuring the DS3 E3 UNI Module in Chapter 4 DS3 E3 LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the DS3 E3 UNI port See Figure 33 a INS Illuminates when the DS3 E3 card is in service a ALM Illuminates when an alarm is present on the DS3 card a L
44. His Tree tetp Fety F kinin teter feet F Tervice His Tzk Gear Ferte 3 Serratiea tatai Get f tereice B nia Partit 7 Set Test Lisi Fret Leegth bet Test Fetters Mam Liak lag ee iet Tert Prebet t Him Tee teti Fety 10 Tet Sinis trte Hia Tzk bpr Farts 11 Prezir Ha t IHS Id Flers ater a selecties 1 te 11 11 f If the Admin Status of the group is In Service select 10 Set Admin Status and enter 1 to take the group out of service You must take the group out of service before you can modify it Change any of the group parameters as desired Deleting IMA and UNI Groups To delete an existing IMA or UNI group From the Group menu shown in Figure 70 select 3 Delete Group to open the Delete Group Selection menu Enter the number corresponding to the group you want to delete to open the Delete Group menu shown in Figure 77 This menu lists the parameters for the selected group and warns you that deleting the group will delete any virtual circuits using that group 86 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 77 Delete Group Menu Fatheileer 430 is Sn blete Gree FII FHI Belete Gee binim Fert s i 1 4 IHA ig 1 bpiratisa Pertis Test Link get celeb Frame Leegth 12 Cells Test Fathers eet selecbed Har Lisak lag aoe 35 Tet Prebhisre biribiri His Tx fte tip Fety amp kinie teter feet F Tervice Hia ke Dtartige Perto amp Setration
45. Management in Chapter 3 for details 5 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen pressing Enter after each entry Default values are listed in square brackets at the end of each prompt Your settings are added to list of parameters at the top of the screen as you enter them You must enter a setting for all the parameters for which you are prompted in order to add a circuit Press Delete to back up to a previous selection When you have entered a setting for each parameter the Add Virtual Screen again displays the list of PathBuilder S330 S310 modules and ports by slot number and prompts you to enter a slot number for side B of the circuit as shown in Figure 125 134 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 125 Add Virtual Circuit Screen with Side A Completed Fathibellaer D530 Sai Firtesl Circeit Girit Type Redcat Por Bevcriptiss CEt iia States ie sereice fla Sethe Citar 70 61 5 es OM beFFer Fire 1 af Cell Less latig Peried 2500 At Fogle Fires tgp oe ess eee Dhiki betectioa 1 italia figesliog Tepes TCE Tel Chamari i Friwitpi U Early Fatket birtard dikt Eater tice amp ilet 2 E Friscity acocpied Some parameters that appear on the Add Virtual Circuit screen may not apply to i gt the particular circuit you are configuring The system skips any non applicable parameters and does not allow you to set them In addit
46. Network Connection DXI Frames ATM Cells DXI DCE anes lt gt PathBuilder lt _ gt 8330 8310 DXI protocol defines an open interface between the router and the Data Service Unit The Data Service Unit off loads cell encapsulation services from the Brouter This will allow your current brouter to support ATM simply by supporting V 35 and High level Data Link Control HDLC 242 APPENDIX B PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW The DXI protocol itself is based on HDLC and provides the mapping within the HDLC frame to place the router data on an appropriate VC See Figure 172 Figure 172 DXI Protocol Enabling Transmission Between ATM Network and DXI Device V 35 RS 449 422 X 21 RS 530 IP Internet Router M DXI DXI Protocol z DXI Transport DXI Link Transport Router DXI AAL 5 ATM ATM Cell a ATM DSU SONET The ATM DXI Specification defines 3 different modes 1a 1b and 2 of connections This software release supports mode 1a which includes the following features Up to 1023 virtual connections Uses AAL5 Maximum DTE SDU size 9232 bytes Uses 16 bit FCS Through ATM DXI the DCE allows the DTE to participate in an ATM network See Figure 173 Figure 173 DCE Allows DTE to Participate in ATM Network through ATM DXI DTE SDU AAL 5 CPCS DXI Data Link AAL 5 SAR DXI Physical UNI Physical DXI UNI
47. Out of Service or In Service Sonet Interface Mode The SONET interface supports two modes OC3 and STM 1 Choose the mode used at your location OC3 is used most often in the United States while STM 1 is common in other countries ATM Payload Scramble Enables yes or disables no payload scrambling for the OC3 STM 1 port The default is disabled no Payload scrambling is a technique used to avoid certain transmission equipment behaviors for example erroneous alarm conditions that are caused by sensitivity to certain bit patterns in the ATM payload When you set payload scrambling to yes the ATM Payload Scramble scrambles the 48 byte payload in outgoing cells in a defined manner and unscrambles the payload in incoming cells The payload scramble settings must match at the two ends of the OC3 SDH trunk Timing Source The timing source for the OC3 STM 1 transmit clock Loop Configures the OC3 STM 1 port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the timing source timing is received from the service loop Select Loop if the OC3 STM 1 port is used for the network carrier service termination in which case the carrier the service loop typically provides the timing source System Configures the OC3 STM 1port interface to use the system clock as defined in the System Clock Configuration menu as its timing source For details about designating the system clock see Configuring the System Clock in
48. POPUNI Configuring Virtual Circuits 133 3 Set the administrative status for the circuit A screen appears listing the PathBuilder S330 S310 modules and ports by slot number and prompting you to select a slot for side A as shown in Figure 124 Figure 124 Selecting a Slot for Side A of the Virtual Circuit A Taa EET ZNL Coraci Gdi mina Hap Eii trasi Fathballaer Stt0 E EE OM Firtesl Circeit Cirit Type Bedicert Por Berriptiss CET iia States Cie sereice Eater tide tiet 5 E Bais GEEET scoephed 4 Enter the slot number for the module that you want to define as side A of the virtual circuit For example to assign the SIM card as side A you would enter 5 The default slot number is indicated by an asterisk To select the default slot number simply press Enter After you enter the slot number the Add Virtual Circuit screen displays the selected slot number and port type lists the parameters you will enter for side A of the circuit and prompts you to set the first parameter The parameters listed vary depending on the type of port you selected See Virtual Circuit Parameters later in this section for parameter descriptions You can also create an in band circuit between two nodes by defining the PathBuilder S330 S310 M CPU with its own IP address as one side of the virtual circuit This enables you to manage a remote hub from a local network management station See Configuring In band
49. PathBuilder S330 S310 switch do the following Unpack and inspect the PathBuilder 330 S310 equipment for any damage that might have occurred during shipment 2 Inventory the equipment against the shipping notice 3 Save the boxes and packing materials in the event there is damage or in case you need to reship the unit at a future date If anything is damaged or missing contact the shipper and 3Com immediately CAUTION Many of the integrated circuits on the modules are sensitive to static electricity Always wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap when removing plug in modules from the shelf 12 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Installation Overview Figure 3 summarizes the overall installation procedure for the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch Figure 3 General Installation Procedure Prepare the Site Verify clearance around the shelf site Fabricate and run cabling and wiring N Install the optional modules N Step 2 Install the unit in the rack Connect AC or DC power and optionally the RPS system Step 4 Connect I O cabling and wiring N Connect the management terminal Step 1 optional Step 3 Step 5 For detailed descriptions of the installation steps see Installation Procedures later in this chapter Installation Overview 13 Figure 4 is an example of a PathBuilder S330 configuration with all of the associated
50. Products returned to 3Com s Corporate Service Center must be pre authorized by 3Com with a Return Material Authorization RMA number marked on the outside of the package and sent prepaid and packaged appropriately for safe shipment and it is recommended that they be insured or sent by a method that provides for tracking of the package The repaired or replaced item will be shipped to Customer at 3Com s expense not later than thirty 30 days after 3Com receives the defective product Dead or Defective on Arrival In the event a product completely fails to function or exhibits a defect in materials or workmanship within the first forty eight 48 hours of installation but no later than thirty 30 days after the date of purchase and this is verified by 3Com it will be considered dead or defective on arrival DOA and a replacement shall be provided by advance replacement The replacement product will normally be shipped not later than three 3 business days after 3Com s verification of the DOA product but may be delayed due to export or import procedures When an advance replacement is provided and Customer fails to return the original product to 3Com within fifteen 15 days after shipment of the replacement 3Com will charge Customer for the replacement product at list price 3Com shall not be responsible for any software firmware information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on orintegrated with any products returned to 3Com
51. S310 and the next crossconnect of FOTs Fiber Optic Terminal system in feet 1 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 or 500 600 Line Code T1 DSX only The zero code suppression technique configured to the CBR T1 DSX port Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection line coding The default is B8ZS The Line Code must match at local and remote ports AMI Alternate mark inversion a T1 1 544 M bps carrier line coding format whereby successive ones marks are alternately inverted B8ZS Binary 8 Zero Substitution a T1 1 544M bps carrier line coding format used to accommodate ones density for clear channel transmission The Line Code for CBR E1 ports is a read only parameter and is always set to HDB3 Port Mode The type of service configured to the specified port Both Structured Data and Structured Voice modes allow end to end DSO connectivity For PRI Primary Rate Interface signaling you must set the Port Mode to Structured Voice 118 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Structured Data Structured service provides N x 64 kbit second capability where N ranges between 1 and the maximum number of available DSO channels Structured data service passes traffic with signaling information disabled it provides for DSO midspan carrier access without A amp B signaling bits terminating DS1 or E1 framing at the CBR T1 DSX or CBR E1 inte
52. TEF TEF TEF TEF it TEF e400 TEF Tt TEF Tt Esbe hereel 1 20 er 21 fer preeiees j ia PERNT Cony det Cong OFF F rS 5a 7 rS 7 s 7 mS T5 5 7 rS 15 m 7 ie i rS 7 r 7 If you are not using a certain port and need to reallocate the buffers or do not like the default configuration you can define a new configuration See Configuring CTX Buffers in Chapter 4 for details CTX Switch 237 The default memory configuration uses all available memory In order to reallocate memory to a given queue you must first deallocate it from one of the other queues Since the CTX is output buffered and if the WAN trunk has the lowest speed for nxT1 E1 the WAN trunk should take up most of the buffer CBR traffic voice and video requires the least latency during transmission while VBR traffic email and FTP is more tolerable to delays but more sensitive to errors The PathBuilder S330 S310 platform handles these traffic patterns with multiple levels of priorities Each switch port except the first T1 E1 UNI port has two queues one for high and one for low The first T1 E1 UNI port or IMA group has four queues one for high 0 one for medium 1 and two for low 2 3 with multiple traffic shapers To get a practical feel for the queue size configuration consider an example in which the PathBuilder 330 is configured on the trunk side with a single group of 4 x T1 E1 The o
53. VCM s T1 DSX port Table 31 VCM T1 DSX Pinouts PIN 1 Rx ring PIN 2 Rx tip PIN 3 NC PIN 4 Tx ring PIN 5 Tx tip PIN 6 NC PIN 7 NC PIN 8 NC Options and Parts List The tables below list available options for the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch Contact 3Com or your VAR with the appropriate part number for ordering and pricing information Table 32 PathBuilder 330 Part Numbers Part Number 3C63300A AC NC 3C63300A DC NC 3C63303A AC NC 3C63303A DC NC 3C63304 NC 3C63305 NC 3C63306 NC 3C63307 NC 3C63301 3C63308 3C63311 3C63314 3C63313 3C63318 continued Description SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with AC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI mmf andnxTl WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with DC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI mmf and n xT1 WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with AC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI smf and n xT1 WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with DC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI smf and n xT1 WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with AC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI mmf and n x El WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with DC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UN
54. VCM output on the receive side the transmitted data will continue to go on the output Network Line Loops the VCM received data back on the output side after the digital data has been recovered Network Card Loops the T1 DSX received payload back toward the line output Setting VCM Channel Loopbacks To set VCM channel loopbacks From the VCM Loopback menu shown earlier in Figure 158 select 2 Set Channel Loopback You are prompted to enter a channel number Enter the number of the channel for which you want to set a loopback to open the VCM Channel Loopback menu for that channel Figure 159 shows the VCM T1 DSX Channel Loopback menu The VCM E1 Channel Loopback menu is the same Figure 159 VCM Channel Loopback M enu Fathiei leer 0530 alma PRPS Siete Pert WH FH Char Leaphart Hee Chmel 1 Lenght He Lepore 1 Set Lepik E Spel bettie Te Cpe Previast Hea Flecct eater a selection 1 te 3 3 f Select 1 Set Loopback A prompt appears listing the available types of channel loopback Enter the appropriate number to select one of the following types of channel loopbacks or no loopback PCM Loopback Loops digital receive to transmit toward the T1 port PCM Packet Loopback Loops coder output to coder input toward the T1 port using the DSP channel PCM packet loopback Network Packet Loopback Loops coder input to coder output toward the ATM network using the DSP channel network packe
55. Virtual Circuit menu select 5 Show Virtual Circuit Statistics to display a summary of statistics for all circuits as shown in Figure 165 You can also display a summary of virtual circuits by selecting 4 Performance Management from the main menu to open the Performance Management menu and then selecting 2 Show Virtual Circuit Statistics Fathieilaer 530 alma MRN SEFE Firtesl Circeit Stetirtics Tife amp Fir E tard iff Fz tE tard ifp Fz tE Brccriptitk bebe tt nF tettina tt Land EAL bes berce tE ii ii a ii Ester ghee 1 3 Far Petilla ttetastics E te clear ML statistics ESG fer presias mean Each pair of rows on the Virtual Circuit Statistics Summary screen provides the following information about one of the existing virtual circuits Row 1 left to right m Virtual circuit number a side A card type a side A slot and port numbers IP address for the M CPU card a side A receive VCI VPI a side A transmit VCI VPI side B card type a side B slot and port numbers IP address for the M CPU card m side B receive VCI VPI a side B transmit VCI VPI a Virtual circuit description Row 2 left to right a cells received on side A m cells dropped on side A a cells received on side B cells dropped on side B To view additional information about a particular circuit enter the desired virtual circuit number In addition to the information displayed on the summary screen the Virtual Circuit St
56. address and a destination address in its header These are MAC addresses that are unique physical addresses assigned to every Ethernet interface on every Ethernet LAN Packet transmission from one unit to another on the same LAN is easily accomplished However packet transmission between units on different LANs requires a higher level addressing scheme ATM networks are organized into virtual circuits or logical duplex paths between two ATM unit ports as shown in Figure 179 Each transmission direction in a virtual circuit is referred to as a virtual channel Virtual channels are then grouped into virtual paths between two ports The channels and paths are assigned numbers VPls Virtual Path Indicators and VCls Virtual Channel Indicators Each ATM cell a fixed length unit of data over ATM is assigned to a virtual circuit by including the circuit s VPI VCI in the cell s header These are then used to steer the cell through an ATM unit and the ATM network 252 APPENDIX B PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW Figure 179 Virtual Circuit Scheme Transmission Path VPI 1 Virtual eee Transmit Circuit vCI 1 Receive H VPI 2 A VCls VPI3 A VCls i g Figure 180 illustrates this on a network using PathBuilder S330 switch Suppose workstation 1 on LAN AA wants to send data to workstation 2 on LAN BB It transmits Ethernet packets that include it
57. and remote ends Check the IMA group configuration to ensure consistent frame size on the local and remote ends Check links for evidence of noise Check to be sure that AFA is enabled See also Loss of IMA Frame LIF This is a specific cause of that alarm and will also be reported Correct T1 or E1 facilities error Make sure that the same number of links are configured and enabled on both ends of the IMA configuration Make sure that the configuration of both groups is the same For instance make sure that the payload scrambling setting is the same on both ends Connect an external loopback cable to the port If there are no alarms the problem is elsewhere Check for an open short or wiring error in the cable between the PathBuilder network interface port and your service provider s network interface unit or the terminal equipment An open transmit pair can cause this condition Managing System Alarms 175 DSX 1 E1 CBR Module Alarms Table 12 describes the alarms specific to DSX 1 and E1 CBR modules Table 12 DSX 1 E1 CBR Module Alarms Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps Cellbus parity Parity error on cells received Check VC and port configuration from cell bus E1 Loss of CAS E1 signaling multiframe Check the physical connection and the M ultiframe alignment has been lost carrier for configuration problems El TimeChannel16 All 1sin E1 time slot 16 for2 Make sure both the local device and AIS Rev consecutive
58. board consisting of one T1 DSX or E1 interface It services traffic generated by your existing PBXs channels T1 E1 multiplexers CSU DSUs and video conferencing devices Install the voice compression module in slot 7 or slot 8 Figure 7 shows the VCM module connections Figure 7 Voice Compression Module Connections PBX T1 DSX E1 Us oa 9 2000 S000 Installation Procedures 17 a Ethernet 10 100 module A board consisting of one 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet port Figure 8 shows the Ethernet 10 100 module connections Install the Ethernet 10 100 module in slot 7 or slot 8 Figure 8 Ethernet 10 100 Module Connections LAN a DS3 E3 module A board consisting of one DS3 or E3 port It is typically used for terminating accessing the public or private ATM WAN services However depending on your local applications you can also use the DS3 E3 module for taking local DS3 or E3 ATM traffic across the WAN Install the DS3 E3 module in slot 8 or slot 9 one module per shelf Figure 9 shows the DS3 E3 module connections Figure 9 DS3 E3 Module Connections Network UD oo o o CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Four port IMA module A board consisting of four T1 E1 UNI with IMA ports It adds four ports to the four existing T1 E1 UNI with IMA ports on the PathBuilde
59. cabling connected Figure 4 PathBuilder S330 Full System Configuration Video Audio Codec PBX PBX a hi a rq V 35 1 DSX E1 T1 DSX E1 Rs 449 RS 366 nee aa RS 530 X 21 Network Slot 8 Slot 9 nxT1 E1 IMA NMS Console Router OC3 STM 1 LAN lhe CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION NMS Console _ Figure 5 is an example of a PathBuilder S310 switch with all of the associated cabling connected Figure 5 PathBuilder S310 Full System Configuration Video Audio Codec PBX PBX dn Lai ET iq V 35 i REAA er T1 DSX E1 T1 DSX E1 RS 530 X 21 Slot 8 T1 E1 Router Site Requirements LAN lhe The operating site for the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch must meet the following requirements a Bewithin the maximum distances to the port and trunk connections as well as the NMS terminal a Have interconnect cabling and wiring ready and labeled Have a dedicated source of switched and fused AC power or a primary DC source Be within the operating environment for the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch as specified under PathBuilder S330 Specifications and PathBuilder 310 Specifications in Appendix A m Provide clearance for making a
60. controls the activity on the shelf These functions include m Providing a user interface through a VT100 terminal or Ethernet Telnet a Programming configurations a Generating and filtering alarms and transmitting them to the NMS a Gathering performance monitoring data a Checking and assigning an appropriate clock source a Communicating with other nodes via the management VC channel CTX Switch The CTX switch interfaces to all ATM busses in the system It handles address translation and switching among seven ATM ports Up to four ports come from the T1 E1 UNI with IM As The other three ports come from the onboard OC3 STM 1 the SAR and expansion slots 7 8 and or 9 the optional modules CBR Voice Compression four port IMA Ethernet 10 100 and DS3 E3 UNI Address translation is done via two lookups The first lookup is a VP lookup all 8 bits included If a VP circuit is set up then a VP translation is done otherwise a second lookup consisting of 2 VPI bits and 8 VCI bits is done For VC connections any four VPs in the range 0 255 are allowed Once the VC is found the CTX performs the address translation If a cell carries data then the switch tries to place it in the proper output FIFO First In First Out order If the queue is congested and early packet discard is enabled an early packet discard operation is performed to check if the cell needs to be discarded Counters for cells received and cells dropped are
61. earlier in Figure 96 This menu allows you to enable or disable the filters you have configured 7 Select 2 Set Source Address Filtering The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Source Address Filter 1 Disable 2 Enable 8 Enter 2 to enable the source address filter Configuring Destination Address Filtering Destination address filtering prevents LAN packets with destination addresses specified in the filter from being sent to the WAN You can use destination address filtering to prevent some stations from receiving data from the ATM WAN link For example you can save network traffic sensitive stations such as local file servers and CAD servers from unnecessary data coming from the WAN To configure destination address filtering 1 From the Bridge menu select 5 Destination Address Filtering to open the Destination Address Filter menu shown in Figure 98 Figure 98 Destination Address Filter M enu FEBE mm E Corraci Ect orina ban ti tiee Patikaildsr 530 alma PRPS ETEEEHET siet Pertisstisa digress Filter Hrag 1 Last Pertisplis Filter ress i bectieaties Filter iirecst Belete Bectisstiee Filter birer Aries Hee io bp Flaca weber a aelection 1 te amp 4 E 2 Select 2 Add Destination Filter Address The Add Destination Address Filter screen appears This screen displays the following prompt Enter MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX or lt CR gt 3 Enter th
62. end IMA device This alarm means that a link was operating correctly but then received a Transmit link ID already assigned to a previous link A Tx Misconnected alarm is also generated If you are not troubleshooting the port turn off the loopback Verify that the framing format configured on the port matches the framing format on the line Check the port s statistics report for evidence of a bad line bursts of LCVs could indicate a timing problem If connected to local DS3 E3 OC3 equipment check that equipment s output level to make sure it is not overdriving the input ATM Forum required alarms are indicated by the notation ATM Forum R xxx where xxx is the required alarm number Troubleshooting Steps Check the removed link for the CRC errors Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary 171 Managing System Alarms Table 11 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Module Alarms continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps Bad M Bad Offset BAD SCCI 3Com Patent Pending Bad Symmetry Duplicated IMA ID Duplicated Link ID continued The far end frame size M has changed in an IMA link The maximum value for the frame size on the local device s serial card must match the maximum value for the frame size of the connected device The link with the BAD M is probably misconnected Far end ICP cell offset has c
63. for parameter descriptions 4 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen pressing Enter after each entry Your settings are added to list of parameters at the top of the screen as you enter them You must enter a setting for all the parameters for which you are prompted in order to add a circuit template Press Delete to back up to a previous selection When you have completed side A of the circuit template by entering a setting for each parameter the Add Virtual Circuit screen displays a list of PathBuilder 330 S310 modules that you can use for side B of the circuit template Figure 128 shows the Add Virtual Circuit screen with side A completed for a video virtual circuit template 5 6 Pathibelleer 0530 Sai Firtesl Circeit Cirit Typer EGA Teeplete Bevcriptios vider cat SIRE Slat Pertftard 7 4 C88 1 2 05 OM beFFer Fire 1 af Cell Less latig Parisi 2500 At Fogle Sires tps a7 pes date bkit betectioa 1 ital figesliag Tepe He Figesliag T H Bandwidth i bet Pipar 535 TEes Priarity Early Fecket Fimea 1 e5 Eater tice amp ilet 2 E Friscity scocpied Select the slot number corresponding to the module by which you are connected to the network for side B of the circuit template Repeat steps 3 and 4 for side B of the circuit template After you enter the last parameter for side B the following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Is the above information cor
64. for repair whether under warranty or not WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF A 3COM PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REM EDY FOR BREACH OF THAT WARRANTY SHALL BE REPAIR REPLACEM ENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID AT 3COM S OPTION TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IM PLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES TERM S OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION AND NON INFRINGEMENT ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ED 3COM NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS 3COM SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT OR MALFUNCTION IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEM PTS TO OPEN REPAIR OR MODIFY THE PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OTHER HAZARDS OR ACTS OF GOD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW 3COM ALSO EXCLUDES FOR ITSELF AND ITS SUPPLIERS ANY LIABILITY WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR T
65. frames the far end device are configured for Time Slot 16 framing If both devices are correctly configured there may be a hardware problem in either device Far End El Lossof The far end device has lost Check the E1 configuration of the far CAS Channel Associated signaling end device HP cellbus High priority cell bus Remove high priority connections until congested congested the configured bandwidth is less than or equal to the total bandwidth on the port If you have over subscribed the port and all high priority devices are using the connections turn off some devices The cell port has been configured to pass more CBR traffic than it can physically handle The aggregate bandwidth of the CBR connections exceeds the total bandwidth of the port This alarm indicates that you either mistakenly oversubscribed the cell port with CBR connections or more connections than expected are simultaneously active When this condition exists on the HP cell bus lower priority cell busses will not be able to pass traffic out LP cellbus Low priority cell bus congested Remove low priority connections until congested the configured bandwidth is less than or equal to the total bandwidth on the port If you have over subscribed the port and all low priority devices are using the connections turn off some devices MP cellbus Medium priority cell bus Remove medium priority connections congested congested until the configured bandwidth
66. frames received from the HDLC serial interfaces are segmented to cells by the SAR and passed to the CTX chip where they can be switched On the serial interface transmit side cells received from the ATM interfaces are reassembled into frames and passed to the HDLC serial interfaces The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch uses a RISC processor to perform the lookup and interworking functions between frame and ATM services It also performs the LM I functions and collects alarms and statistics The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch provides for frame relay service and network interworking FRF 5 and 8 as well as ATM DXI and transparent HDLC operation You can use it for interworking between the ATM network and a variety of different frame based networks or devices such as Frame Relay and ATM DXI The interface can be clocked up to 6 2M bps and it supports the following modes of operation Internal timing DCE provides the clock for a router External timing DTE receives a clock from a DCE device such as a DSU digital service unit The mode of operation is selected automatically by autosensing based on the type of cable connected to the unit DCE or DTE The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch supports three modes of Frame to Cell transit services ATM DXI Mode 1A Supported by certain routers HDLC SDLC Used mainly for transparent point to point operation Frame Relay Forum Specification 5 and 8 modes 1 and 2 Used to terminat
67. front socket which is reserved for the RAM module a f you are installing one CIM install it in the socket adjacent to the front RAM module socket a f you are installing two CIMs install the first CIM in the third socket back and the second CIM in the socket adjacent to the front RAM module socket a f you are installing three CIMs install the first CIM in the fourth socket back the second CIM in the third socket back and the third CIM in the socket adjacent to the front RAM module socket a f you are installing four CIM s supported for E1 voice compression modules only install the first CIM in the rear socket the second CIM in the fourth socket back the third CIM in the third socket back and the fourth CIM in the socket adjacent to the front RAM module socket 22 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AN gt gt a Carefully insert the CIM into the socket with the CIM angled toward the front of the card and the CIM components facing the front of the card arrow 1 Figure 16 Inserting the DSP CIM into the Socket b Carefully move the CIM into the vertical position arrow 2 The socket clips automatically engage the CIM as you move it into position CAUTION The DSP CIMs are keyed so that you can insert them only one way Do not force the CIM into position If you are having trouble engaging the CIM in the socket then you probably inserted it facing the wrong way in step 6a Make sure that the large components o
68. gt Erasing the System Database 3 In addition to setting passwords you can also take over read write sessions and erase the system database from the Super User Privilege menu shown earlier in Figure 52 The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch allows only one read write session at a time If you have super user privileges however you can take over a read write session without logging off When you take over a read write session the previous read write session is forced to a read only session To take over a read write session From the Super User Privilege menu shown earlier in Figure 52 select 2 Take Over Read Write Session The following prompt appears Do you want to take over read write session Y N N Enter y to take over the read write session The following message appears The current session has been changed to Read Write Press any key to return Press any key to resume your session in read write mode The interface for the user whose read write session you took over will switch to read only mode the next time that user changes screens In certain situations if anomalous behavior on the part of the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch makes you suspect that the database has been corrupted or if you have moved a unit from a different location for example you may want to consider erasing the system database and starting from scratch You must have super user privileges in order to erase the system database
69. in Figure 67 Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 81 3 From the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu select 3 Group Configuration to open the Group menu shown in Figure 70 Figure 70 Group Menu Pathiellaer IHi FIFE Pi FHI Erer Meee LSTA oe Bii tremp Pelete fee Presieme Ha Flac taber a selection 1 te amp 8 E 4 Select 2 Add Group to open the Add Group menu shown in Figure 71 Figure 71 Add Group Menu Selecting Group Type Fathiballaw 0 30 tlet irepl FH WHI bhi ire 1 iI 2 Ma F Proeviees Heg Fiery saber a lectis 1 te F 3 f 82 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS 5 10 Select 1 UNI The Add Group menu appears as shown in Figure 72 Figure 72 Add Group Menu Adding UNI Group Fathbellaer it lmm EP bleCe freee Fi FHI ee eee Sis Pertosyi Serration Part a Bisa States fet oF ereire fetraties chatec bet af tareice 4 Set kinin Pertis 2 Set ria Shates F Foeries Hrag Flacct eater a selection 1 te 3 3 f Select 1 Set Admin Port s The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Admin Port s Enter the port numbers for the T1 E1 port you want to include in the UNI group Select 2 Set Admin Status and enter 2 to put the group in service Select 3 Previous M enu If desired repeat steps 5 8 to set up a second UNI group and put it into service Adding IMA Groups Fro
70. in the motherboard On power up or reset the code image is copied from the flash memory to the main memory The flash memory retains a copy of the operation firmware and can be upgraded using TFTP or the Xmodem protocol TFTP is used if you are attached over the Ethernet interface standard 1OBASE T or optional 10 100BASE T through a Telnet session Xmodem is used if you are attached to serial port 1 on a VT100 terminal We recommend that you avoid using the serial interfaces unless the Ethernet interface is unavailable as a download could take 30 minutes at 9600 baud using the serial interfaces When downloading the flash memory is overwritten with the new code Once the firmware is successfully downloaded a system reset brings up the new code The following instructions pertain to UNIX environments You can also download firmware from a PC from a TFTP application configure for binary mode specify the location of the image files and use the PUT command Downloading Firmware Using TFTP via an Ethernet Port To download new firmware using TFTP via an Ethernet port Be sure to log in via Telnet If you log in at a serial port the download sequence will attempt an Xmodem rather than a TFTP download 1 Obtain the correct image file location and name from 3Com Customer Service 2 Telnet into the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch Viewing and Configuring System Information 63 3 From the System Administration menu select 6 Download Firmware
71. indicate the status of the Ethernet port See Figure 26 TX data green Indicates transmit to the cable activity The LED flashes momentarily for each frame sent to the cable a RX data green Indicates receive from the cable activity The LED flashes momentarily for each frame received from the cable a Link green Indicates that you have a link to the remote system If this LED is off then a problem exists with the remote link For example the Ethernet cable may not be connected properly or the remote Ethernet unit may be down Figure 26 PathBuilder S330 S310 Ethernet Port LEDs Lt 2000 2000 Pa inlay t a Link RX data TX data 32 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Connecting to the OC3 STM 1 Port 330 only The OC3 STM 1 UNI port is equipped with an internal SC type connector supporting the use of multi mode or single mode fiber optic cable as shown in Figure 27 and Figure 28 Figure 27 OC3 STM 1 UNI Multi Mode Fiber Optic Cable Figure 28 OC3 STM 1 UNI Single M ode Fiber Optic Cable mwil e EEEE Public ATM Service Installation Procedures 33 OC3 STM 1 LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the OC3 STM
72. is less than or equal to the total bandwidth on the port If you have over subscribed the port and all medium priority devices are using the connections turn off some devices Receive FIFO Cells are being received from Reconfigure the CBR connection so Overflow the cell bus faster than the CBR that it has adequate bandwidth can process them SAR SRAM failure SAR SRAM failure applicable Replace the unit to CBR continued 176 Table 12 Transmit FIFO Overflow VC RDI Receive SIM Alarms CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS The cell bus is congested and cells are backed up on the CBR Traffic at the output side of the CBR port is being transmitted more slowly than it is being received from the cell bus Asa result the output buffer is overflowing In general the problem is that the CBR connection is not synchronized end to end The clock rate of the output port does not match the clock rate of the device from which the traffic originated VC RDI Remote Defect Indication OAM received in the connection The far end equipment has a problem with the signal it is receiving indicating that the problem lies between the network provider and the far end terminal equipment for this connection DSX 1 E1 CBR Module Alarms continued The entire CBR connection must be synchronous end to end Make sure the clock rates of the devices at either end of the connection match each
73. is not supported in Release 2 04 DTMF relay Dialed digits are detected by the DSP and transported using FRF 11 Dialed Digit Payload format The dialed digit frame is transported only when a DTMF tone is detected The DTMF tone is generated by the DSP when dialed digits are received through the packet network ATM FoRuM IMA COMPLIANCE Table 44 details the compliance of the PathBuilder S 330 S310 Release 2 03 xx and higher with ATM Forum IMA specifications ATMF IMA Letter Ballot July 1997 The compliance table is applicable for both T1 and E1 UNI with IMA Table 44 ATM Forum IMA Specification Compliance Table Requirement 3Com Section Description Option Compliance Comments 1 Introduction None Noted 1 1 Overview of the Inverse None Noted Multiplexing for ATM 1 2 Terminology None Noted 2 Terms and Objectives None Noted 3 IMA Objectives None Noted IMA Reference M odels None Noted 4 1 IMA Sublayer in OSI Layer None Noted Reference M odel 4 2 Reference M odel of Unit None Noted Operation IM A 4 2 1 Source Interface None Noted 4 2 2 Cell Function None Noted 4 2 3 Inverse M ultiplexing None Noted 4 2 4 Link Management None Noted 4 2 5 Unit Management None Noted 4 3 Timing Reference M odel None Noted 5 Basic IMA Protocol None Definitions 5 1 IMA Physical Link R 1 R 2 FC Characteristics 5 2 Transmission Convergence None Noted Sublayer Specification 5 2 1 Exceptions to the Interface R 3 4 FC Specific Transmission Convergence Su
74. it is time tagged An aging timer in the switch which you set purges entries from the forwarding tables after they have been in the tables for the aged time The bridges must then relearn purged addresses This controls the size of the forwarding tables particularly in large networks In the switch each bridge also has a static table associated with it You can enter MAC addresses and corresponding VPIs VCls into the static table that will not be affected by the aging timer These entries might be for LAN units that are relatively permanent and are accessed through the ATM network frequently such as servers In the example shown in Figure 180 there is only one transmission path the T1 n x T1 or El n x E1 between the two PathBuilder S330 switches so cells leaving Switch A on VPI VCI 1 33 arrive at Switch B on VPI VCI 1 33 Also if theT1 nxT1 or E1 n x E1 trunk were switched through a standard telephone switching system to interconnect many PathBuilder S330 switches each switch would have to have the same VPI VCI designations assigned The ATM switch removes this restriction Figure 181 shows several PathBuilder S330 S31 switches in an ATM switched network The switch maps one VPI VCI into another based on the destination of the packets in the cell It learns the complete topology of the network to do so You can independently configure each PathBuilder 330 S310 switch connected to the ATM switch Figure 181 Virtual Circuits in a Swi
75. low2 T1 E1 UNI Early Packet Discard Enables yes or disables no early packet discard For every connection where early packet discard is enabled a status is kept when there is a partial packet for that connection in the queue Once the queue cell level exceeds the Congestion On thresholds only connections with partial packets already existing in the queue are allowed in Cells from other connections are dropped Once the congestion has subsided to the Congestion Off level then all remaining connections are allowed CAUTION Do not enable early packet discard for AAL1 traffic MCPU Virtual Circuit Parameters IP Address The IP address for the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch If you do not enter a value for this parameter the interface will not be added to the IP stack Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch IP Encapsulation The encapsulation type used for sending IP packets over the ATM link Routed PDUs or Bridged PDUs When configuring inband circuits you must set both the near and the far ends to the same IP Encapsulation type Configuring Virtual Circuits 147 T1 E1 UNI Port Virtual Circuit Parameters Receive VPI VCI The VPI VCI of cells received by the T1 E1 port Transmit VPI VCI The transmit VPI VCI of cells transmitted by the T1 E1 port OC3 STM 1 Port Virtual Circuit Parameters Receive VPI The VPI of cells received by the OC3 STM 1 port Transmit VPI VCI The trans
76. multi mode or single mode fiber compliant with ATM Forum s UNI 3 1 ANSI T1 105 a Ethernet interface and bridge function bridged RFC 1483 spanning tree and classical IP over ATM RFC 1577 2225 through the standard Ethernet 10BASE T port and the optional Ethernet 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet module a Serial V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 interface frame module including DXI protocol basic frame relay protocol DLCI to VP VC conversion and transparent HDLC mode of operation Structured and unstructured CBR T1 DSX E1 and V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 interface 330 Only Dynamic bandwidth allocation DBA for structured voice and structured data CBR ports When DBA is implemented on a CBR port configured for structured voice stored signaling bits are checked and bandwidth is released when an on hook idle condition is detected When DBA is implemented on a CBR port configured for structured data stored data bits are checked and bandwidth is released when and idle code is detected RS 366 based video dial feature supporting point to point and multi point video conferencing Voice compression supporting voice activity detection modem detection DTMF relay and G 729A G 726 and G 711 compression algorithms DS3 E3 UNI interface Local management via a VT100 terminal or a PC emulating one connected directly to the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch or through a Telnet session Software downloading via TFTP FTP or direct via RS 232
77. need a user name and password with Web browser software such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer The 3Com BBS contains patches software and drivers for 3Com products This Service service is available through analog modem or digital modem ISDN 24 hours a day 7 days a week Access by Analog Modem To reach the service by modem set your modem to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit Call the telephone number nearest you Country Data Rate Telephone Number Country Data Rate Telephone Number Australia Up to 14 400 bps 612 9955 2073 Japan Up to 14 400 bps 8135977 7977 Brazil Up to 28 800 bps 55115181 9666 Mexico Up to 28 800 bps 525 520 7835 France Up to 14 400 bps 3316986 6954 P R of China Up to 14 400 bps 8610 684 92351 Germany Up to 28 800 bps 4989 62732 188 Taiwan R O C Up to 14 400 bps 886 2 3775840 Hong Kong Up to 14 400 bps 852 2537 5601 U K Up to 28 800 bps 44 1442 438278 Italy Up to 14 400 bps 39 2 27300680 U S A Up to 53 333 bps 1847 262 6000 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service Access by Digital Modem ISDN users can dial in to the 3Com BBS using a digital modem for fast access up to 64 Kbps To access the 3Com BBS using ISDN call the following number 1 847 262 6000 The 3Com Facts automated fax service provides technical articles diagrams and troubleshooting instructions on 3Com products 24 hours a day 7 days a week Call 3Com Facts using your Touch Tone telephone 1 408 727 7021 Support from You
78. not be supported NC See above FC FC ITC mode not supported FC 0 5 NC NC Will interoperate with equipment that does support this option Noted FC FC FC FC CR 5 6 NC FC FC Table 44 Section 9 2 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 2 1 10 1 2 2 10 1 3 10 1 4 10 1 5 10 1 6 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 1 1 10 2 1 2 10 2 1 3 10 2 2 ATM Forum IMA Specification Compliance Table continued Description Differential Link Delay Compensation at Receiver IMA Interface Operation IMA Link Operation Overview of the Link State Machine Definitions of the Transmit Receive States and Events Transmit Link States Receive Link States Definitions of the Transmit Receive Link Actions Link Events Driving the Link State Machines Link State Transition Tables Processing of the Tx and RX State Fields IMA Group Operation IMA Group State Machine Definition Overview of the Group State Machine Detailed Group State Machine Definition Synchronized Link Activation during Group Start Up Procedure Link Additional and Slow Recovery LASR Procedure continued Requirement Option R 65 O 7 None None None None None None None None R 66 67 R 68 71 0 8 None None None R 72 R 73 74 R 75 77 R 78 R 79 81 R 82 86 R 87 94 3Com Compliance Comments FC E1 IMA supports 0 7 NC up to 56 ms of differential delay DS1 IMA supports up to 70 ms of
79. of range LODS is declared after the Rx IMA fails to synchronize the IMA link s in an IMA group within some time limit Loss of IMA Frame is detected in the Rx direction for an IMA link UP There is an IMA frame size mismatch between two ends of the circuit This can be caused by missing ICP cells ATM cells that carry protocol information bad IMA ID bad sequence number bad M bad offset HEC error or CRC error in ICP cells This problem may occur if the link gets noisy and there is no AFA to prevent the ICP from getting corrupted It is detected in hardware and may or may not cause an operational problem Two consecutive ICP cells missing from the IMA frame Remote Failure Indication Far end IMA Rx networking link state machines detected LOS OOF AIS LCD LIF or LODS An 8 bit pattern is sent to the remote node which must then echo it back on all ports The local node checks the echoed pattern and reports an alarm if cells from one or more of the links fail to arrive This alarm is declared on all links which do not reply or reply incorrectly OOF alarm is detected A received remote alarm indication means that the far end equipment has a problem with the signal it is receiving from the PathBuilder device Remove the link and stop Tx and Rx data Have your carrier verify the time synch and routing of individual T1s E1s in the group Check the IMA group configuration to ensure consistency on the local
80. of the screen 3 Enter the new setting 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any other settings you want to change 5 Select 8 Previous Menu to return to the System Administration menu Viewing RS 232 Port Configuration Information Viewing the Firmware Version 61 Viewing and Configuring System Information Figure 56 Specifying General System Information Fathielleer O50 General Sprie IeFernetiss melf Hees Cerber Hane Pie Hebr Haletenaere Catat Leceties ete Lepat Thaw bert 10 nisab Det bet det 1 bet Siew Haw Gerteser Hose Pete Helier Hristea Datert Set Letatitk het Ste Lepat Tine Freri Hen Place taber a selection 1 te 7 7 f You enter initial configuration information using the VT100 terminal connected to the RS 232 port on the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch See Logging On in Chapter 3 for details To view the terminal configuration From the System Administration menu select 4 RS 232 Port Configuration To view the version number for the firmware that is currently running on the CPU From the System Administration menu select 5 Report Firmware Version to open the Report Firmware Version screen shown in Figure 57 Figure 57 Report Firmware Version Screen Fathballaer 0 30 Eegert Firgware Merri Hiatal Freceicer Attie Firmuare beleae Series brigiac Wes bate Company Hane Prefect Hider Geet Farewere Erler 7 FOE 00 baja be jeter AF Az 2 20k 0l b
81. on the selected shaper by entering the desired virtual circuit number To view virtual circuit statistics by port group for the selected shaper enter p from the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail screen The screen that appears displays the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics by Port Group Summary screen except that it lists information by port group only for circuits on the selected shaper rather than for all circuits You can view the number of cells received dropped and sent from and to a particular port group on the selected shaper by entering the desired port group number To display virtual circuit statistics by buffer From the Configuration Management menu select 2 Manage Card to open the List Card menu Select 2 CTX to open the CTX menu 3 From the CTX menu select 5 Show VC Statistics by Buffer to display counts of cells sent and dropped for each buffer To view statistics for a single buffer enter the desired buffer number The Virtual Statistics by Buffer detail screen lists the number of cells received dropped and sent on the selected buffer It is similar to the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper detail screen shown earlier in Figure 167 5 To view virtual circuit statistics by circuit for the selected buffer enter v from the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer Detail screen The screen that appears displays the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics Summary screen shown ea
82. other and match the transmit clock rate of the CBR ports on the PathBuilder switch Check for a defective cable between the far end interface port and your service provider s network interface unit An open transmit line can cause this condition Table 13 describes the alarms specific to the SIM Table 13 SIM Alarms Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps LM I Link Down The Local Management Interface has taken the link down Voice Compression Module Alarms Table 12 describes the major alarms specific to the Voice Compression module Table 14 Voice Compression Module Alarms Alarm Meaning Check the LMI protocol configuration for the port Troubleshooting Steps E1 Loss of CAS Multiframe E1 Time Channel 16 AIS Rev Far End E1 Loss of CAS Channel PCM Loopback Condition E1 signaling multiframe alignment has been lost All 1s in E1 time slot 16 for 2 consecutive frames The far end device has lost Channel Associated signaling A loopback is configured on the channel Loopbacks are for troubleshooting only and should not be present during normal operating conditions Check the physical connection and the carrier for configuration problems Make sure both the local device and the far end device are configured for Time Slot 16 framing If both devices are correctly configured there may be a hardware problem in either device Check the E1 configuration of the far end device If y
83. point to point HDLC connections across the ATM network No service based encapsulation other than AAL5 is needed All packets are terminated and SAR d processed via segmentation and relay to a single VP VC in the ATM network Transparent mode functionality is best implemented with a PRBS type of pattern included in a sequence of frames The TTC Firebird V 35 frame relay interface provides that simple capability When using transparent HDLC mode you set the following parameters a Minimum number of flags between HDLC frames CRC type The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch will SAR AAL5 and map HDLC SDLC frames onto an ATM VCC You could use the HDLC service for router to router and X 25 to X 25 links You could use the SDLC service for IBM FID2 3270 SNA Peripheral or IBM FID4 372X SNA Backbone Figure 176 shows HDLC SDLC applications You should disable NRZI on the FEP i e IBM 3745 NRZI is commonly used when the FEP is connected to DSUs over a non digital line The PathBuilder S330 switch does not require NRZI to be enabled Figure 176 HDLC SDLC Applications PathBuilder PathBuilder 330 S310 330 S310 HDLC HDLC E D X 25 X 25 X 25 X 25 PAD bees 3 7 3 FID 4 FID 4 5 S 7 SDLC 5 N 2 FID2 FID 2 3270 A 5 SDLC Host Frame Relay Mode Frame relay mode is used to terminate a frame relay router across the ATM network for exam
84. provider may use for establishing loopback for problem resolution of the network The service provider uses FEAC codes to obtain downstream or upstream conditions of a DS3 network When the FEAC Loopback option is enabled the system responds to a loopback activate command by enabling the DS3 line loopback The system removes the loopback automatically after 15 minutes or when it receives the deactivate command DS3 Timing Source DS3 only The timing source for the DS3 transmit clock system or loop If you set the DS3 Timing Source to system at one end of the DS3 trunk you must set it to loop at the other end System Configures the DS3 port interface to use the system clock as defined in the System Clock Configuration menu as its timing source For details about designating the system clock see Configuring the System Clock in Chapter 3 Loop Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the timing source timing is received from the service loop Select this option if the DS3 UNI module is used for the network carrier service termination in which case the carrier the service loop typically provides the timing source E3 Timing Source E3 only The timing source for the E3 transmit clock system or loop If you set the E3 Timing Source to system at one end of the E3 trunk you must set it to loop at the other end System Configures the E3 port interface to use the system clock as
85. set the following parameters Configure the port for Structured Data a Set an Idle Timer value The CBR software starts an internal timer when no cell is being received If the amount of time you specify as the Idle Timer expires before another cell is received the software shuts off cell transmission and puts the virtual circuit into a listening mode 2 Configure a virtual circuit for the DSX 1 E1 CBR port When a DSX 1 E1 CBR is configured for Structured Data the Add Virtual Circuit screen includes a Mode parameter Set the circuit Mode to RS366 Adding Voice To configure a VPC VCC virtual circuit to connect data ports Compression Module VCC Circuits You must configure at least one VCM VCC circuit before you can configure any VCM subchannel circuits 1 When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit type as shown earlier in Figure 121 enter 3 to create a VCM VCC circuit A screen appears prompting you to set the administrative status of the circuit 2 Set the administrative status of the circuit A screen appears listing the modules available to assign as side A of the virtual circuit as shown in Figure 125 Figure 130 Selecting a Slot for Side A of aVCM VCC Virtual Circuit Fatebaileer S530 E E bd Virtesl firceit irit Tyr WH A Pemriptis besteirceits EE cas F541 4 k FIH e BOM Eater Side tiet i E EE CLEF scocpied gt Yy Configuring Virtual Circuits 141 3 Enter the number corresp
86. spt ie perp Speration Link pelsp aver U FE Tx State ket ik prap kz Tact Pattee H3 FE Ex Stabe eet is pef Test Freceiee geek led HE kr Fallere khit FE Er Filwr mar Press map kep te previee mepi The IMA Link Status screen lists the following information pertaining to the IM A status of an individual link in an IMA group NE Tx State The near end transmit state in the interworking link state machine Table 6 lists the possible link states NE Rx State The near end transmit state in the interworking link state machine Table 6 lists the possible link states FE Tx State The far end transmit state in the interworking link state machine Table 6 lists the possible link states FE Rx State The far end transmit state in the interworking link state machine Table 6 lists the possible link states Table 6 Possible IMA Link States State Tx Condition Rx Condition not in group This link is not part of the IMA This link is not part of the IMA group group unusable blocked This is caused by LOS which This is caused by AFA excessive would result in defective clock delay or mismatched protocol from the framer if the port is in looped timing usable This link is ready to pass data This link is ready to pass data active This link is passing data This link is passing data NE Rx Failure Near end Rx failure status in the interworking link state machine lists the possible IMA link failure sta
87. statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 Ethernet 10 100 PCI module 4 6 configuring 116 connections 36 LEDs 36 Ethernet 10 100 PCI parameters admin status 117 media type 117 Ethernet 10 100 module connector pinouts 222 specifications 217 221 Ethernet Configuration Port Card Selection menu 103 Ethernet interface principles of operation 248 Ethernet port connecting 31 connector pinouts 222 LEDs 31 36 statistics 198 virtual circuit parameters 154 Ethernet Port IP Configuration menu 50 Ethernet Statistics menu 198 Ethernet voice applications 254 excessive collisions Ethernet statistic 199 expansion modules CBR 4 6 DS3 E3 4 94 Ethernet 10 100 PCI 4 6 116 IMA four port 3 4 77 installing 19 voice compression VCM 4 6 126 expansion slot 9 effects of populating on IMA group 1 38 80 external timing 240 F failure IMA group parameter 91 Fault Management menu 165 Fault Management main menu option 43 fax service 3ComFacts 278 FAX support voice compression parameter 128 FCC Part 68 Statement xiii FCS errors HDLC statistic 195 FCS size serial port parameter 98 FE number of failures T1 E1 statistic 189 FE Rx failure IMA link parameter 89 FE Rx state IMA link parameter 88 FE state IMA group parameter 90 FE Tx state IMA link parameter 87 FEAC loopback DS3 E3 parameter 95 features 5 FECN to EFCI mapping serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameter 153 filtering destination address 109 source a
88. switch has only a single T1 E1 interface On the T1 E1 receive side the data flow is as follows a A line interface unit recovers the digital data and performs the T1 E1 framing on it with DSX and CSU capability The integral CSU eliminates the need for an external CSU a The data flows through a framer to get the ATM cells The output of the framer interfaces to the IMA circuitry that stores the data into memory and synchronizes the cells back All four T1s Els go into the IMA buffers where they can be treated as one group or as four separate groups four individual T1s E1s a After the cells are synchronized the IMA circuitry tags them with a group number and passes them to the CTX At the CTX interface the cells will look like they are coming from different groups On the T1 E1 transmit side the data flow is as follows m Cells received from the CTX toward the T1 E1 groups are stored in the corresponding buffers as described under CTX Output Queues and Memory Partition earlier in this chapter Group 1 consists of 4 buffers the other three groups have two buffers each a The cells are picked up from the queues in order of priority under the shaper control and delivered to the IMA logic OC3 STM 1 Port 239 a The IMA logic spreads the cells in a particular group across the physical lines and adds the IMA overhead functions a The cells are passed to a line HEC framer to synchronize to the line speed a The T1 E1
89. tatai Get f tereice His Tx Oper Ferts amp Hia he Geer Parti 4 Warming This will delete ete acing this great are p cere pee want te delete Greepe 1 7 cee E 3 Enter y in response to the confirmation prompt to delete the group gt When you delete an IMA group all the VCs using that group are also deleted Viewing IMA Link Status To view IMA Link Status for a selected T1 E1 port 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card 2 From the List Card menu select 3 DS1 UNI to open the T1 DS1 UNI or El UNI Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 67 3 Select 2 IMA Link Status to open the IMA Link Status menu shown in Figure 78 The IMA Link Status menu lists only the ports that are members of an IMA group If you have installed the four port IMA expansion card the IMA Link Status menu lists up to eight T1 or E1 ports Figure 78 IMA Link Status Menu Fathiei leer it alma PP betes Pr ING FHI Disk States Hemm Fert Z Fert 3 Fert k ebeiees Hee Flece aber a aelection 1 te amp 4 E Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 87 4 Enter the number corresponding to the port for which you want to view IMA link status The IMA Link Status screen for that port appears as shown in Figure 79 Figure 79 IMA Link Status Screen tuk taeda Fathiei leer 0530 alma MRN Sete Liek 11 CHI Me Lisk Ftrtey Erem i Z Tx LIF 8 HE Tx State oot in grep fr LIB HE Er Stebe gt
90. temperature Storage temperature Humidity Altitude Regulatory compliance Safety Emissions STANDARDS ATM Forum ANSI TIA EIA AT amp T Frame Relay Forum IETF RFCs continued 1 2 when Ethernet 10 100 module is installed 1 1 8 9 cm H x 43 2 cm x W x 38 7 cm D 3 5 in H x 17 in W x 15 25 in D Yes with brackets 2 RMS 2 fans 37 CRM each deregulated 20 6 75 kg 15 00 Ib per shelf 9 00 kg 20 00 Ib per shelf 90 264 VAC 50 60 Hz 110 220 self sensing standard grounded outlet or 42 to 60 VDC 60 watts typical 90 watts max 1 5A 110VAC 0 75A 220VAC 3A 48VDC 0 C to 45 C 0 F to 113 F 40 to 70 C 40 F to 158 F 95 40 C 104 F non condensing 14000 ft UL listed 1950 3rd edition CSA 22 2 EN60950 FCC Part 68 FCC Part 15 Class A EN 50082 EN 55022 Class A UNI 3 x T1 E1 CES 2 0 IMA ATM DXI 1 0 71 403 T1 617 Annex D EIA 232 EIA 574 RS 366 422 423 449 Pubs 54016 and 62411 FRF 5 FRF 8 FRF 11 1213 1211 1483 1490 1406 1493 bridge MIB 1577 2225 IP over ATM 1643 Ethernet M IB PathBuilder S310 Specifications 219 Table 16 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications continued MOTHERBOARD SPECIFICATIONS M ain microprocessor Backplane speed Memory usage Front panel LEDs Common Ethernet Serial T1 Management Interface Interface type Connector type Ethernet 10BASE T Interface Number of ports Interface type Connect
91. the default description that the system assigns to video virtual circuits when they are activated Adding PVC Virtual Circuits Configuring Virtual Circuits 131 A second screen appears As shown in Figure 121 the description you entered appears at the top of the screen and a prompt at the bottom of the screen asks you to select the virtual circuit class PVC RS366 Template VCM VCC or VCM Subchannel For descriptions of the available VC classes see Supported Classes of Virtual Circuits earlier in this section Figure 121 Selecting the Virtual Circuit Class Pathibellaer 0530 Sii Firtesl Circwit Beecripties ELH Eater BE Ciais 19 Pe Teaplate PtH BEE StH Sechaeetl 1 E Beccriptiss scocpted Enter the number corresponding to the class of virtual circuit you want to define If you want to create a standard VPC VCC permanent virtual circuit to connect data ports select 1 PVC and follow the instructions under Adding PVC Virtual Circuits If you want to create a virtual circuit to support video conferencing select 2 RS366 Template and follow the instructions under Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates If you want to create a VCC virtual circuit to connect VCM ports select 3 VCM VCC and follow the instructions under Adding Voice Compression Module VCC Circuits If you want to create a VCM subchannel circuit that bundles multiple DSOs select 4 VCM Subchannel and fo
92. tie sereice fla Sletihertitard EH IEHBAHEE Set Greep tard Bie FHI tA FIU Charl 1 Emei Fili L HEI 1 Tract E oe HIF amp Frisrits Priarite 1 Early Patiet birtad 1 men Early Fecket Hine dies Eater IEI u 295 BE bat bha added Press ang beg te comtione f 5 Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu Configuring Virtual Circuits 145 VCM Subchannel Virtual Circuit Example The following example shows how you can set up a three node VCM network by creating all required VCM VCC circuits and VCM subchannel circuits Figure 137 illustrates this setup Figure 137 Three Node VCM Network and Associated Virtual Circuits 330 A 330 A to 330 B BEEF 330 A to S330 C 4 subchannel circuits 4 subchannel circuits DSO 1 4 DSO 5 8 DLCI 16 DLCI 17 SCID 11 14 SCID 11 14 VC1 ATM VC2 Network 330 B to 330 A oar 4 subchannel circuits 330 C to S330 A 4 subchannel circuits Ds0 1 4 DSO 1 4 Bcc 16 DLCI 17 H SCID 11 14 SCID 11 14 P g PBX 2 For the purposes of this example assume you want to make the following connections a Connect subchannels 1 4 on PBX 1 to subchannels 1 4 on PBX 2 Connect subchannels 5 8 on PBX 1 to subchannels 1 4 on PBX 3 You need to build the following VCM VCC and subchannel circuits At PathBuilder S330 A S330 A a Add a virtual circuit VC 1 between 330 A and 330 B a Add a virtual circuit V
93. to the shelf three successive times The system reference clock was lost Configuration data for a new card is uploaded Power supply has failed The congestion threshold for Queue 0 was exceeded Information only Information only Could indicate a potential problem You may need to reset the card Information only Information only Could indicate a potential problem You may need to reset the card Information only Could occur when the card is plugged in or the system is powered up Replace the unit Check the physical connection Check for other alarms such as LOS LOF LOCD Check the physical connection Replace the fan tray Replace the fan tray Clear the history alarms table through NMS or Telnet Have the idprom replaced with the correct version The system takes no action if it recognizes the proper card ID Information only Information only Try reassigning the clock especially to internal Information only The card was not stored in the database Replace the power supply with an operating unit Check and correct VC connections Check and adjust VI shaper values Check and adjust incoming traffic volume Check for faulty IMA links which may reduce traffic handling fora group 168 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Table 9 MCPU and CTX Module System Alarms continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps Queue 1 Over
94. user interface b Switch to binary mode by entering binary c Verify that the current directory is flashDev standby d Put the code image file by entering put lt image filename gt image where lt image filename gt is the filename of the code image e Exit FTP by entering bye 64 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS gt gt Backing up and Restoring the Database and Code Image gt Downloading Firmware Using Xmodem via the Serial Port To download new firmware using the Xmodem protocol via the serial port You must use a terminal emulation program that supports Xmodem protocol 1 Obtain the correct image file location and name from 3Com Customer Service 2 Log into the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch through a serial port 3 From the System Administration menu select 6 Download Firmware The following prompt appears This action will erase the flash memory Do you want to download firmware Y N N Enter y The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch assumes that an Xmodem download is to be done and looks for that protocol over the serial port Once the switch has erased the flash memory a message on the screen indicates that the switch is ready to accept an Xmodem download On the terminal emulation prompt select Xmodem protocol and input the file name of the binary file to be downloaded The typical download time at 9600 baud is greater than 30 minutes The configuration d
95. using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly You should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations you make to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request that you disconnect the equipment xiv CHAPTER SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATORY INFORMATION CE Notice Marking by the symbol CE indicates compliance of the equipment with the EMC Telecom and Low Voltage directives of the European Community Such marking is indicative that this equipment meets or exceeds the following technical standards EN55022 Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment EN50082 1 Electromagnetic compatibility generic immunity standard part 1 residential commercial and light industrial CTR 12 Connection of 2 Mbit s Unstructured Leased Lines CTR13 Connection to 2 Mbit s Structured Leased Lines EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment EN 41003 Particular safety requirements for electrical equipment to be connected to Telecom n
96. via VT100 menu driven interface Telnet or SNMP with local remote and in band access The following optional modules are available for use with the PathBuilder S330 switch The four port CBR module services traffic generated by your existing PBXs channels T1 E1 multiplexers CSU DSUs and video conferencing devices The CBR module consists of one V 35 RS 449 and three T1 DSX or E1 interfaces which support both structured and unstructured services in accordance with the ATM Forum s Circuit Emulation Service CES specifications The CBR module provides a smooth migration from legacy CBR service PBX voice video to ATM service It also supports all relevant ATM and T1 E1 standards ensuring easy integration of existing equipment into new ATM networks The one port voice compression module VCM is similar in function to the CBR module but it employs compression algorithms that allow more voice calls to be placed through the same bandwidth The VCM s T1 DSX E1 interface connects to a PBX trunk which may use CAS or CCS signaling Its 24 30 DSO channels can carry individual voice fax modem or data connections You can also bundle multiple DSOs to provide connections for high rate applications such as video conference or multiple link PPP For CCS a DSO is used as an ISDN D channel for carrying signal messages The Ethernet 10 100 module provides a one port PCI Ethernet interface that you can set for 10 or 100Mbps full or half duplex
97. want LM messages specifically messages regarding problems affecting VCs connected to the Frame Relay port to be reported from the ATM side When you enable End to end LMI problems on the ATM side are reported back to the Frame Relay port via LM I messages In this way the router to which the Frame Relay port is connected can detect problems on the ATM side When you disable End to end LMI LM I messages are sent only between the Frame Relay port and the router to which it is connected Set Defaults Use this option to reset the LMI parameters to their default values thereby restoring a known working LM I configuration The only type of configuration you can perform on the serial card is to put it in service or out of service To set the administrative status of the serial card 1 From the Configuration Management menu shown earlier in Figure 59 select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown in Figure 60 2 From the List Card menu select 5 SIM to open the SIM Configuration Port Card Selection menu shown in Figure 85 3 Select 2 Card Configuration to open the SIM Card Configuration menu shown in Figure 89 Fathibelleer 0530 het SIN Cord CeePigereties BY Bes me erial Hear da re binis States ie Service bpr States la Saree Max Frame Size amp IE 1 Set Sie Fetes 2 Frewiee Hie Flac ater a selection 1 te 2 f 4 Select 1 Set Admin Status to put the serial ca
98. you can change it if you want For example you should make the queue buffer used for your router traffic as large as possible To do this you must first deallocate memory from another queue OC3 STM 1 queue 3 for example and reallocate the memory to the queue that will carry your router traffic See CTX Output Queues and Memory Partition in Appendix B for reference information pertaining to configuring the output buffers To change the default output buffer configuration From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu Select 2 CTX to open the CTX menu shown above in Figure 63 3 From the CTX menu select 2 Manage Buffers to open the CTX Buffers menu shown in Figure 65 Figure 65 CTX Buffers Menu 1S 93 64 1081 Fathiei leer 0530 alwa MENE ETE Beffers Tiet laterface ura arter telis Chg bet Cong OFF F high TEF rS 5a T 1 rit rS ra 7 high TEE T5 prt 75 kigh TEE T5 rt 75 high TEF 75 T high TEF T5 T 75 7a T5 13208 high TEE T5 ka 75 hig TEE T5 Tit 75 bigh TEE T5 ree a ees a G a a C l l rah Emter parari 1 20 af 21 fer preria 4 Select the number corresponding to the queue for which you want to change the buffer size The CTX Queue Buffer Configuration menu shown in Figure 66 appears This menu lists the current buffer configuration for the selected queue and provides options that allow yo
99. 0 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 3 Remove the cover plate from the slot into which you want to install the optional module by unscrewing the two retaining screws Figure 13 shows the retaining screws being removed from slot 7 Figure 13 Removing the Cover Plate from Slot 7 a n 4 If you are installing a CBR Ethernet 10 100 DS3 E3 or four port IMA expansion module skip to step 9 If you are installing a voice compression module proceed to step 5 to install the DSP CIMs 5 Identify the five CIM sockets located towards the rear of the Voice Compression card As shown in Figure 14 the first socket the one closest to the components on the card is already populated with a RAM module Figure 14 CIM Sockets on Voice Compression Card RAM Module Installation Procedures 21 6 Remove the RAM module from the front socket as shown in Figure 15 a Disengage the RAM module from the socket by pressing downward and outward on the two socket clips arrow 1 The disengaged module will angle towards the front of the card arrow 2 Figure 15 Disengaging the RAM Module from the Front Socket b Carefully remove the RAM module from the socket arrow 3 and place it in an anti static container 7 Install the DSP CIM s as shown in Figure 16 keeping in mind that you must install the CIMs contiguously from back to front always ending with a CIM in the socket adjacent to the
100. 0 module and you are configuring the PCI Ethernet interface select 2 PCI Ethernet Port IP Configuration to open the PCI Ethernet Port IP Configuration menu This menu is similar to the Ethernet Port IP Configuration menu shown in Figure 46 except that it does not include an option for setting the community name Figure 46 Ethernet Port IP Configuration M enu A Tele WEE GA 10 Fathiei leer 530 flares PRPS Etherect Fert IF Gafipm sti IF Spiet TRE FEE TO Tabari Hirik 255 299 295 0 HEC Bere DE DD OE SPS PS ee n het IF ares Sat Select Hirik Set Ceeeity Hee Premism Hee Flac ater a selection 1 te amp 4 f MAEHIHG Te apple IF adirecc aad imitt Ark thas pelet a taber ites 7 fra peris are Performing Initial System Configuration 51 Enter the following information by selecting the appropriate options and responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen to set local host interface parameters IP Address Provided by the network administrator This is the IP address of the PathBuilder S330 S310 management CPU You should consult the network administrator to obtain an IP address for the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch which will allow its 1OBaseT Management port to co exist with hosts on its local LAN Subnet Mask Provided by the network administrator The IP addresses for the 1OBASE T Ethernet interface and the 10 100BASE T Ethernet interface should not be on the same subnet Com
101. 1 card For the PathBuilder S310 switch you can configure only one T1 DSX E1 port on the CBR module Figure 110 CBR E1 Port Configuration Menu Unstructured M ode Fathbellaer itt la OF Flet Perce CHE E1 Drafipmr piisa jse fer SH Sigeslieg He Sigesling t Hee Bechrecternd Cht k bistable renimp He Framing S nia States et F perveire Tinisg Lang Setratiea ttattar Get ef tareice idle Vise 5 perami el FFU Cees Hee 1 Set Fert Hee Sa bet h tet Fir carly 6 Tet nia Ibate Set Time F Poeviees Hag Set idis Tirer Flece taber a selection 1 te 7 7 E As shown in Figure 111 if you set the Port Mode to Structured Voice you can set additional trunk conditioning TC parameters on the CBR Port Configuration menu Figure 111 CBR E1 Port Configuration Menu Structured Voice M ode ai WIA Conrac d anna bain Fathiei leer 0530 alma MENE Flet Perce CHE E1 Drafipmr piisa lnt Cet SEE idle Tier F Sees t Heit Sorect Faict Adria thatec Get F terwice fpereticn States Get oF hereice Sel BGO tha s Heme Fert Hee bet Timing Framing Set Iiis Tirer Te Figeelisg Ope bet Ep IEI Sigealiog Bits tet bina Staten t TEE Figesliog Fits 10 Previa Hrag Fleet cater s celecties 1 te 40 10 Set the following port configuration parameters LBO T1 DSX only Line Build Out LBO refers to the signal generation regeneration of the distance between the PathBuilder 330
102. 1 port See Figure 29 a OC3 STM 1 Alert red Powers up in the off state and illuminates when a Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Frame LOF Loss of Pointer LOP or Loss of ATM Frame LOAF condition is detected on the incoming OC3 STM 1 If none of these conditions is present the OC3 STM 1 ALARM LED is off a OC3 STM 1 Active green Powers up in the off state and illuminates when the OC3 STM 1 is online Figure 29 OC3 STM 1 Port LEDs e CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION VV Inservice T1 DSX E1 ports Serial RS 366 and V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 port Connecting to the CBR Module The CBR module provides an RJ48 DSX interface for T1 DSX E1 traffic Line Build Outs LBOs to DSX of up to 655 feet are supported You must configure the LBOs in the CBR DSX Configuration Menu See Configuring the CBR Module in Chapter 4 for details You can typically make local connections to DTE equipment without DSU CSUs as long as the equipment supports a direct T1 DSX E1 interface and can recover a T1 DSX E1 signal For connector pinouts see CBR Module Connector Pinouts in Appendix A If you are using a G703 coax physical connection to connect the E1 line to the interface you must use the E1 Balun Adapter part number 3C63904 The serial port of the PathBuilder S330 S310 CBR module has two types of interface V 35 for video data and RS 366 for vide
103. 10 switch For details about setting the default gateway see Configuring the Default Gateway earlier in this chapter CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND aaae APPLICATIONS eere e This chapter tells you how to configure the CPU modules ports and related applications for the SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder S330 S310 switch so that the devices can pass traffic It contains the following sections a Viewing and Configuring System Information a Using the Configuration Management M enu a Using the List Card Menu a Configuring the Management CPU a Configuring the CTX a Configuring Ports a Configuring the T1 E1 Interface a Configuring the OC3 STM 1 Port Configuring the DS3 E3 UNI Module a Configuring the Serial Interface Configuring the Ethernet Interface a Configuring the Ethernet 10 100 Module Configuring the CBR Module a Configuring the Voice Compression Module a Configuring Virtual Circuits a Managing the Video Dial Feature Viewing and The System Administration menu shown in Figure 55 includes options that allow Configuring System you to view and configure system information In addition to using this menu for Information initial configuration as described in Chapter 3 you can a Specify general system information a View system parameters for the RS 232 port a View the current firmware version a Downl
104. 2 0 7 0 6 channels 6 11 3333 0 13 0 12 channels 12 17 Voice Compression Module The optional Voice Compression module VCM provides one T1 or E1 port It is similar in function to the CBR module but it employs compression algorithms that allow more voice calls to be placed through the same bandwidth The incoming voice signal is carried on one or more of the T1 E1 port s 24 30 channels The voice data in each DSO channel is in PCM format This data is compressed by the DSP and the output from the DSP is encapsulated into FRF 11 packets by the host CPU on the VCM daughtercard The packets are then passed to the mother board through the PCI interface handed over to the AAL5 SAR and transmitted to the ATM interface In the reverse direction compressed voice packets are received by the SAR on the ATM interface in FRF 11 format The packets are then passed to the VCM daughtercard via the PCI interface The packets are unpacked by the daughtercard CPU before they are handed to the DSP which decompressed the voice data and plays out the voice onto the T1 E1 PCM interface Supported Voice Compression Features b gt The VCM supports the following features G 165 G 711 G 726 and G 729A compression algorithms You must configure the voice coding compression for each DSO channel The decompression runs in the same mode as the compression In addition the remote end must be set up to run the same mode as the local end
105. 21 X 21 PBS330 3333 nx T1 E1 PBS600 MCU 4444 To set up multi point video conferencing you build virtual circuits defined by transmit and receive vpi vci combinations between the remote units and between the remote units and the central unit The remote units can use the same vpi vci to communicate with the central unit one at a time or you can allocate different channels and set up separate virtual connections to each remote unit Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 and Table 43 list possible routing tables when the remote units have been allocated different channels on the central unit s T1 line Voice Compression Module 267 Table 40 Multi point Video Conferencing Routing Table Remote Unit 1111 Destination Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci Speed Status 2222 0 1 0 2 384k idle 3333 0 1 0 3 384k idle 4444 0 1 0 2 384k active Table 41 Multi point Video Conferencing Routing Table Remote Unit 2222 Destination Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci Speed Status 1111 0 2 0 1 384k idle 3333 0 2 0 3 384k idle 4444 0 6 0 7 384k active Table 42 Multi point Video Conferencing Routing Table Remote Unit 3333 Destination Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci Speed Status 1111 0 3 0 1 384k idle 2222 0 3 0 2 384k idle 4444 0 12 0 13 384k active Table 43 Multi point Video Conferencing Routing Table Central Unit 4444 Source Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci DSOs 1111 0 2 0 1 channels 0 5 222
106. 257 conferencing 265 Video Call Routing Table 164 video conferencing 265 multi point 140 267 point to point 140 265 266 video dial defining virtual circuits for 140 how connection established 140 how feature works 140 video dial feature 265 ending video dial up sessions 162 managing 160 setting up a session 161 starting video dial up sessions 161 viewing call routing table 163 video dial parameters dest phone 163 index 163 Rx vpi vci 163 speed 163 status 163 Tx vpi vci 163 virtual channel connections VCCs defining 132 virtual channel identifier VCI 132 Virtual Circuit menu 133 virtual circuit parameters common early packet discard 150 group card 150 priority 150 shaper number 150 slot port 150 virtual circuit statistics VCM 205 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail screen 209 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Summary screen 208 Virtual Circuit Statistics Summary screen 207 virtual circuits adding 133 adding RS 366 video 140 141 CBR parameters 154 classesof 132 134 common parameters 150 configuration parameters 141 configuring 132 configuring for clear channel signaling 139 configuring for DBA 138 configuring for structured data DBA 139 configuring for structured voice DBA 139 defining RS 366 Lite 143 defining side A for video circuit 141 deleting 160 DXI parameters 153 Ethernet parameters 154 Frame Relay parameters 151 in a simple network 252 in a switched network 253 in band 136 ma
107. 3 coax physical connection to connect the E1 line to the interface you must use the E1 Balun Adapter part number 3C63904 Voice Compression Module LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the voice compression module See Figure 31 a PWR Illuminates when the VCM is receiving power a FAIL Illuminates when the VCM card fails a TEST Illuminates during powerup as internal diagnostics are being performed and during loopbacks a STS 0 Status 0 Blinks green during normal operation a STS 1 Status 1 Illuminates when the VCM port is in service a INS Illuminates when the VCM card is in service a ALM Illuminates when there is an alarm present on the VCM card Figure 31 Voice Compression Module LEDS 36 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Connecting to the Ethernet 10 100 Module To connect to the PCI Ethernet port on the Ethernet 10 100 module run a cable from the port to the LAN The appropriate LNK LED 100 LNK or 10 LNK LED depending on the speed for which the port is configured illuminates if you make the connection properly The cable run from the PathBuilder S330 S310 Ethernet port to the Ethernet LAN connection must be no longer than 100 meters in compliance with EIA TIA standards for 1OBASE T This cable length should include service loops at the ends and the complete cable route distances
108. 310 switch to communicate with an Ethernet network you must set the IP parameters for the local host interfaces via the M anage IP Network Configuration menu To open the Manage IP Network Communication menu From the main menu select 2 Configuration Management to open the Configuration Management menu From the Configuration Management menu select 6 Manage IP Network Configuration to open the M anage IP Network Configuration menu shown in Figure 44 Performing Initial System Configuration 49 Figure 44 Manage IP Network Configuration M enu Pathbellaer D550 Mesepe IF Htet Daip 1 Lecel Best IF Graf ig ei 2 Trap Cliset Canfigeration 3 Pefit eben ComFigerstiss b Prteieet Hha Pltrit taber a aelection 1 te amp a E From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu you can configure the following Local host IP parameters a Trap clients a Default gateway The following subsections describe how to set these network communication parameters Configuring the Local Host IP Parameters For the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to communicate on an Ethernet network you must assign an IP address to the local host interfaces the standard 10BASE T Ethernet interface and if you have installed the optional Ethernet 10 100 module the PCI Ethernet interface For the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch to communicate on the network you must use the VT100 terminal to assign an IP address After you have entered the IP address f
109. 5 FRF 8 FRF 11 1213 1211 1483 1490 1406 1493 bridge M IB 1577 2225 IP over ATM 1643 Ethernet M IB MOTHERBOARD SPECIFICATIONS Main microprocessor Backplane speed Memory usage Front panel LEDs Common Ethernet Serial OC3 STM 1 T1 1 4 Management Interface Interface type Connector type continued RISC 360 MHz Flash EPROM 8 MB DRAM 16 MB Power Status Alert Tx Rx Link TD RD Alert Active Alert Active RS 232C Female DB 9 PathBuilder S330 Specifications 215 Table 15 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications continued Ethernet 10BASE T Interface Number of ports 1 Interface type VC level dual leaky bucket 56 Kbps to 16 66 Mbps Connector type RJ 45 Data support 10BASE T IEEE 802 3 ATM support Bridging with filtering spanning tree RFC 1483 LLC_SNAP RFC 1577 2225 IP over ATM Shaping AAL5 peak rate Forwarding rate Greater than 7000 pps n x T1 n x E1 UNI with IMA Interface Number of ports Type of interface Connector type Line Framing Line Coding ATM framing ATM support LBO Electrical interface Attenuation Payload scrambling OC3 STM 1 Interface Number of ports Interface type Connector type Line Code Fiber Type Wavelength Receiver input power Transmit output power Clock Application support ATM support continued 4 8 when 4 port IMA expansion card is installed T1 or E1 UNI with IMA with integral CSU and DSX RJ48C or G703 coax
110. 6 Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Circuit 206 Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Port Group 208 Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper 208 Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer Queue 209 A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS PathBuilder S330 Specifications 213 PathBuilder S310 Specifications 218 Connector Pinouts 222 Management Interface Connector Pinouts 222 Ethernet Interface LOBASE T and 10 100BASE T Connector Pinouts 222 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Interface Connector Pinouts 223 Serial Port Connector Pinouts 223 CBR Module Connector Pinouts 230 Voice Compression Module Connector Pinouts 232 Options and Parts Lit 232 B PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW Management CPU 235 CTX Switch 235 CTX Output Queues and M emory Partition 236 Setting up a Virtual Circuit 238 VPI and VCI Ranges 238 Early and Partial Packet Discard 238 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Interface 238 OC3 STM 1 Pot 239 DS3 E3 UNI Modules 239 Serial Interface 240 Serial Interface Frame Protocol Modes 240 ATM DXIMode 241 HDLC SDLC Mode 245 Frame Relay Mode 246 Ethernet Interface 10BASE T or 10 100BASE T 248 Bridge Operation 249 Filtering 250 Spanning Tree 250 Spanning Tree Operation 250 Spanning Tree Instances 251 Addressing 251 Segmentation 254 Reassembly 254 Typical Ethernet and Voice Application Configurations 254 CBR Module 257 Structured DS1 259 DSO Signaling and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation 261 Unstructured DS1 264
111. 8 shows a representative Equipment List PEST OOF Beet one PEST OOF Bet one EESLIINI Beet ony BEST AHEM HEIN ities arr The Equipment List displays the following information for each installed module Slot Slot number This is a reference number for the ports on the motherboard This number corresponds to the number on the List Card menu See Figure 60 later in this chapter Card type The card type Shelf MCPU CTX T1 E1 UNI 4 or 8 if the optional four port IMA expansion module is installed OC3 STM 1 UNI SIM Ethernet CBR T 1DSX CBR E1 VOICE COMP if the optional voice compression module is installed PCI ETHERNET if the optional Ethernet 10 100 module is installed or DS3 E3 UNI if the optional DS3 UNI or E3 UNI module is installed PART idprom The part number as programmed at the factory PART oem The part number for OEM customers 68 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Serial The serial number for the card This is the same for all ports on the motherboard The optional CBR module has a separate serial number Rev The revision number for the card This is the same for all ports on the motherboard as they come already installed in the unit The optional CBR module has a separate revision number Verifying Hardware Requirements In order to execute the release 2 04 software with the new Ethernet 10 100 and four port IMA expansion modules
112. ASE T 1 2 when Ethernet 10 100 module is installed V 35 RS422 1 OC3 STM 1 1 single mode or multi mode T1 E1 UNI with IMA 4 8 when 4 port IMA expansion module is installed Mechanical Shelf dimensions 8 9 cmH x 43 2 cm x W x 38 7 cm D 3 5 in H x17 in W x 15 25 in D 19 in rack mountable Yes with brackets Rack mount spacing 2 RMS Cooling 2 fans 37 CRM each deregulated 20 Unit weight approx 6 75 kg 15 00 Ib per shelf Shipping weight approx 9 00 kg 20 00 Ib per shelf Input power requirements 90 264 VAC 50 60 Hz 110 220 self sensing standard grounded outlet or 42 to 60 VDC Power consumption 60 watts typical 90 watts max Maximum current 1 54 110VAC 0 75A 220VAC 3A 48VDC continued 214 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Table 15 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications continued SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS continued Environmental Operating temperature Storage temperature Humidity Altitude Regulatory compliance Safety Emissions STANDARDS ATM Forum ANSI TIA EIA AT amp T Frame Relay Forum IETF RFCs 0 C to 45 C 0 F to 113 F 40 to 70 C 40 F to 158 F 95 40 C 104 F non condensing 14000 ft UL listed 1950 3rd edition CSA 22 2 EN60950 FCC Part 68 FCC Part 15 Class A EN 50082 EN 55022 Class A UNI 3 x T1 E1 CES 2 0 IMA ATM DXI 1 0 71 403 T1 617 Annex D EIA 232 EIA 574 RS 366 422 423 449 Pubs 54016 and 62411 FRF
113. ATM VC statistic 197 port CBR parameter 154 port group VC statistic 208 ports configuring 74 configuring CBR DSX 1 E1 118 configuring CBR serial 123 configuring DS3 E3 94 configuring Ethernet 102 configuring Ethernet 10 100 PCl 116 configuring OC3 STM 1 93 configuring serial 96 configuring T1 El 77 configuring VCM 129 safety classification xii power and power cords xii connecting 26 requirements 25 shelf fill 26 specifications 25 power supply connecting 25 PRI PBX tie line setting up 140 Priority Clock Configuration menu 47 priority common virtual circuit parameter 150 procedure LMI parameter 100 product benefits 8 product features 5 product overview 3 protocol modes 240 PSES P bit severely errored seconds DS3 statistic 193 PVCs 151 definition 132 mapping over ATM 241 R rack mounting xi 24 25 rcvd for VC statistic 208 rcvd from VC statistic 208 RDI remote defect indication OC3 STM 1 line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 read write privileges 43 read write session taking over 56 rebooting system 67 receive full status responses LM I statistic 197 receive timing phase serial port parameter 98 receive unconfigured PVCs LMI statistic 197 receive VCI T1 E1 virtual circuit parameter 151 receive VPI OC3 STM 1 virtual circuit parameter 151 T1 E1 virtual circuit parameter 151 received BECN Frame Relay statistic 196 received bytes DXI statistic 196 Ethernet statistic 199 Frame Rel
114. BR 1 544 Mbps of bandwidth Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation DBA X Video Conferencing Figure 193 depicts the effects of structured versus unstructured service on the DS1 framing Figure 193 Structured Versus Unstructured Effects on Transit DS1 PathBuilder 8330 8310 Interface DS1 p AAL 1 DSO DSO DSO DSO A amp B ESF FDL DS1 Structured N x 64 Kbps v Bit Bucket PathBuilder S330 S310 Interface DS1 i gt AAL 1 DS1 ESF FDL gt DS1 1 544 Mbps DSO 64 Kbps oo gt ng DS1 Unstructured DS Digital Signal ESF Extended Superframe The serial port of the PathBuilder S330 S310 CBR module has two types of interface V 35 for video data and RS 366 for video dial These interfaces are broken out from a 50 pin connector on the 330 S310 via a Y cable The V 35 RS 366 serial CBR connector is ideal for directly connecting to H 320 video codec devices such as PictureTel Vtel and CLI These device applications are used for group room conferencing applications and distance learning typically over an ISDN dial network The PathBuilder S330 S310 platforms simulate a dial ISDN network over an ATM network allowing you to integrate voice video and data on a single ATM network The RS 366 based video dial feature allows a dial based video session using the ATM circuit emulation provided by the PathBuilder S330 S310 platforms The PathB
115. BR virtual circuit parameters CDV buffer size 154 payload size type 154 CCS common channel signaling 138 139 140 263 CCV C bit coding violations DS3 statistic 193 CDV buffer size CBR virtual circuit parameter 154 CE Notice xiv cells dropped DS3 ATM statistic 194 E3 ATM statistic 195 cells received DS3 ATM statistic 194 E3 ATM statistic 195 OC3 STM 1 ATM statistic 193 cells transmitted DS3 ATM statistic 194 E3 ATM statistic 195 OC3 STM 1 ATM statistic 193 cells with correctable HCS error OC3 STM 1 ATM statistic 193 cells with HCS errors DS3 statistic 194 E3 ATM statistic 195 cells with uncorrectable HCS error OC3 STM 1 ATM statistic 193 CES C bit errored seconds DS3 statistic 194 ch channel number VCM port activity statistic 206 channel associated signaling CAS 138 139 261 262 multiframe structure for 3x64kbit s DS1 261 channel loopbacks VCM 184 clear channel signaling 139 codeimage 65 backing up 65 backing up and restoring 64 restoring 66 common channel signaling CCS 138 139 140 203 263 communication parameters setting 45 48 community name setting for Ethernet port 51 compression algorithms 269 selecting 128 Configuration 68 configuration bridge 103 104 buffers CTX 74 cards and ports 74 CBR card 126 CBR DSX 1 E1 ports 118 CBR module 117 CBR serial port 123 124 communication parameters 45 48 CTX default gateway 53 DS3 E3 module 94 E3 UNI module 94 Ethernet 10 100 PCI modu
116. Built in menu driven software for configuring modules ports virtual circuits and bridges setting loopbacks and collecting and displaying alarms Key Benefits 330 Only The PathBuilder 330 S310 switches provide the following key benefits Complete integration into existing application environments by supporting legacy data video and voice applications thereby avoiding costly forklift upgrades Video dial feature supports point to point and multi point dialed video conferencing over ATM networks including a RS 366 video dial a Static call routing for all destinations a Ideal for video equipment such as H320 a Dynamic bandwidth allocation at both the V 35 RS 366 port and the T1 DSX E1 port on the CBR module a Video session dialed through SNMP interface via Telnet and RS 232 a Simulation of a switched ISDN network over an ATM network Standards based IMA implementation the PathBuilder 330 offers T1 nxT1 and E1 nxE1 ATM access with up to four T1 E1 connections eight connections when you install the optional 4 port IMA expansion card allowing you to scale up WAN bandwidth as your traffic increases Each user to network interface UNI can be used alone or bundled into a group providing up to 6 8 Mbps aggregated WAN access speed Easily upgradable no additional hardware required to move from the PathBuilder 310 switch to the PathBuilder S330 switch update your system simply by purchasing a software upgrade A sop
117. C 2 between 330 A and 330 C a Add four subchannel circuits to VC 1 setting these VCM circuit parameters a DSO 1 4 a DLCI 16 a SCID 11 14 a Add four subchannel circuits to VC 2 setting these VCM circuit parameters DSO 5 8 a DLCI 17 a SCID 11 14 146 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Virtual Circuit Parameters At PathBuilder S330 B S330 B a Add a virtual circuit VC 1 between S330 B and S330 A Add four subchannel circuits to VC 1 setting these VCM circuit parameters a DSO 1 4 a DLCI 16 a SCID 11 14 At PathBuilder S330 C S330 C a Add a virtual circuit VC 2 between S330 C and 330 A a Add four subchannel circuits to VC 2 setting these VCM circuit parameters a DSO 1 4 a DLCI 17 a SCID 11 14 The following subsections describe parameters you must enter when you configure virtual circuits for different port types Common Virtual Circuit Parameters The following parameters are common to most port types Slot Port or Group Card The slot number port or IMA group number and card type Shaper Number The number corresponding to the SAR shaper you want to assign to this circuit You define the fifteen available shapers from the M CPU Shapers screen See Configuring MCPU Shapers earlier in this chapter for details Priority The priority level high or low M CPU OC3 STM 1 QSIM HSIM FAM Ethernet CBR VCM high medium low1 or
118. Chapter 3 Configuring the DS3 E3 UNI Module To configure the DS3 UNI or E3 UNI module 1 From the List Card menu select 9 DS3 UNI to open the DS3 UNI Configuration menu Figure 84 shows the DS3 UNI Configuration menu The E3 UNI Configuration menu is similar Figure 84 DS3 UNI Configuration M enu Fathiei leer 430 flares RRS Slee PIF WHI CeePiger tise EY Bee 05 Serial Henke oO binis Fhetes Is Sereice bratia States la tareice Lib Leagth iF FEM Litphati bitable Bid Frosiog Heri GET E Tinieg beer ees ATH Cell Happeiag FUG FLEP Tinig bearca BIS Tinley STH Feler Tereble Tey Hetherkend Tinieg femre Bi Er Cler i nia Dhabas Ea LEF Leegte det FES LEHE BIJ Franikg Heit T tet i3 Tisieg Deerce 4 ATH Gell Hopping fet AL Tinieg prece 5 ATH Paglieri Scraale iet Hetiiritard Tiniag teerce 10 Previews Hrem Flee enter s selectios 1 te 10 10 2 Set the following parameters as desired Admin Status Administrative Status In Service or Out of Service LBO Length DS3 only Line Build Out length The signal generation regeneration of the distance between the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch and the next crossconnect or FOTs Fiber Optic Terminal system in feet 0 225 or 225 450 DS3 Framing Mode DS3 only The type of frame organization configured for the specified port interface Chit or M 23 Set this parameter to match the framing type offered by your service provider
119. Circuits for the Entire Chassis earlier in this section for details Enters to view Statistics for the selected circuit a Enter dato delete the circuit a Enter mto modify the circuit To modify an existing virtual circuit From the Virtual Circuit menu select 3 M odify Virtual Circuit The M odify Virtual Circuit selection screen appears This screen displays a list of existing virtual circuits Enter the VC of the circuit you want to modify The following prompt appears Enter Description 12 characters maximum lt circuit description gt where lt circuit description gt is the Description for the selected circuit If desired change the circuit description by backspacing and typing over the existing description otherwise press Return to change other circuit parameters Deleting Virtual Circuits i gt 1 Managing the Video Dial Feature 155 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen to modify the circuit parameters as desired To delete an existing virtual circuit From the Virtual Circuit menu select 4 Delete Virtual Circuit The Delete Virtual Circuit screen appears This screen displays a list of existing virtual circuits Enter the VC of the circuit you want to delete The following prompt appears Are you sure you want to delete VC lt VC number gt where lt vc number gt Is the number of the selected virtual circuit Enter y in response to the confirmation prompt to del
120. Configuring the T1 E1 Card Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 91 Rx Configured Links The number of configured receive links Tx Active links The number of active transmit links Rx Active links The number of active receive links The only type of configuration you can perform on the T1 E1 UNI card is to put it in service or out of service To put the T1 E1 UNI card in service or out of service From the Configuration Management menu shown earlier in Figure 59 select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 From the List Card menu select the number corresponding to the slot in which the T1 UNI or E1 UNI card is installed to open the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 67 From the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu select 5 Card Information to open the Card Configuration menu Figure 82 shows the T1 DS1 UNI Card Configuration menu The E1 UNI Card Configuration menu is the same Figure 82 Configuring the T1 E1 Card OW Vetoes 05 97 64 100 mE Gerrari ri orna ain tii taea Pathbsilrr IHO ilan EEEE Titi PH WHI ComFigeretios mY Ervi z Irial Hester Eatin binin Stieber Ie ferric eratiea Staten le Saree persti resp Haa ef MG rempit 1 i iet iia States E Previews Heeg Fler ember elertia 1 te Z F f Select 1 Set Admin Service and enter 2 to put the card in service or 1 to take it out of service In a
121. DXI AAL5 DCE or DTE Internal or external smooth clock VC level dual leaky bucket 56 Kbps to 6 Mbps 56 Kbps 6 Mbps 50 ft 8 Mbps Smooth clocks on transmit and receive lines to DTE MOLEX 60 pin female 35 pin Winchester female for DCE male for DTE DB 37 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE DB 25 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE DB 15 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE 4 3 direct T1 DSX E1 1 DSU CSU 3 each RJ 48 100 Ohms D4 or ESF AMI or B8ZS 0 to 655 ft HD pin V 35 RS 449 EIA530 X 21 DCE Internal ALARM Inservice n x56 Kbps or n x 64 Kbps structured n 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 24 or 1 544 Mbps unstructured CAS CCS support with dynamic bandwidth allocation AAL1 ATM CES 2 0 Looped system adaptive SRTS 24 ms T1 DSX 32 ms E1 CBR RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter DB 25 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE PathBuilder S330 Specifications 217 Table 15 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications continued VOICE COMPRESSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports 1 Interface type s 1direct T1 DSX E1 T1 DSX E1 physical 1 each RJ 48 Impedance 100 Ohms Framing D4 or ESF Line Coding AMI or B8ZS LBO 0 to 655 ft Clock DCE Internal Front panel LEDs 1 7 PWR FAIL TEST STS 0 STS 1 INS ALM Data rates n x 56 Kbps or n x 64 Kbps structured n 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 24 ATM support CAS CCS support with dynamic bandwidth allocation AAL
122. Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 A Circuit GND 45 B RTS 42 C Out CTS 35 D In DSR 34 E In DCD 33 F In DTR 43 H Out LL not used 44 K Out SD 18 P Out SD 17 S Out RD 28 R In RD 27 T In SCTE 20 U Out SCTE 19 Ww Out SCR 26 V In SCR 25 X In SCT 24 Y In SCT 23 AA In Shorting GR 1 48 49 Shorting GR 2 50 51 52 Shorting GR 3 53 54 55 56 Table 22 Connector Pinouts for V 35 DCE Cable Part 3C63914 Pin on 60 pin Pin on V 35 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 A Circuit GND 45 B RTS 35 C In CTS 42 D Out DSR 43 E Out DCD 44 F Out DTR 34 H In LL not used 33 K In SD 28 P In SD 27 S In RD 18 R Out RD 17 T Out SCTE 26 U In SCTE 25 Ww In SCR 22 V Out SCR 21 X Out SCT 20 Y Out SCT 19 AA Out Shorting GR 1 48 49 Shorting GR 2 50 51 Shorting GR 3 53 54 55 56 Table 23 Connector Pinouts for RS 449 DTE Cable Part 3C 63920 Pin on 60 pin Pin on DB 37 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 1 Circuit GND 15 16 45 19 20 37 RTS 9 10 7 25 Out CTS 1 2 9 27 In DSR 3 4 11 29 In DCD not used see 5 6 13 31 In DCE cable DTR 7 8 12 30 Out LL not used 44 10 Out SD 11 4 Out SD 12 22 Out RD 28 6 In RD 27 24
123. EFSs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 section CVS The number of coding violations CVs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 section LOS The number of Loss of Signal LOS conditions encountered by the OC3 STM 1 section LOF The number of Loss of Frame LOF conditions encountered by the OC3 STM 1 section OC3 STM 1 Line Performance Statistics The OC3 STM 1 Line Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics ES The number of errored seconds ESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 line SES The number of severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 line UAS The number of unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 line CVS The number of coding violations CVs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 line AIS Indicates whether or not an Alarm Indicator Signal AIS condition has been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 line RDI Indicates whether or not a Remote Defect Indication RDI condition has been encountered by the OC3 STM 1 interface Also known as FERF Far End Receive Failure This is the alarm that is generated when a far end AIS or LOP defect is detected OC3 STM 1 Far Line Performance Statistics The OC3 STM 1 Far Line Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics ES The number of far end errored seconds ESs encountered by the OC3 STM 1 interface SES The number of far end severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the OC3 STM
124. Fert WH PH Fert Gefipmrrisa Te Tigeelisg Fily a bppk TE tighaiisg ELGG eFf ikti Timisg gerbes B nia States Get f dareice Speeratios States fet f ereire Pa FRO eeo Ft Ja E LE b Bet TEI tigelisg Fits F T Set TEZ tigazlisg Fits tet Time t tet iva States 10 Freri Hrag E Frey Tiyanak ing t TE Figeslieg TFt Flers ater selecties 1 te 10 10 T Set the following port configuration parameters LBO T1 DSX only Line Build Out LBO refers to the signal generation regeneration of the distance between the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch and the next crossconnect of FOTS Fiber Optic Terminal system in feet 1 110 110 220 220 330 330 440 440 550 550 600 or 600 Line Code The zero code suppression technique configured to the VCM T1 Elport Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection line coding The Line Code must match at local and remote ports AMI Alternate mark inversion a carrier line coding format whereby successive ones marks are alternately inverted B8ZS T1 DSX only Binary 8 Zero Substitution a T1 1 544M bps carrier line coding format used to accommodate ones density for clear channel transmission HDB3 E1 only High Density Bipolar 3 an E1 carrier line coding format To transmit data and maintain synchronization E0 transmitters use HDB3 encoding to replace runs of four consecutive zeros Framing The type of frame organ
125. Figure 36 NMS Terminal Connection Options RS 232 LAN 10BASE T PE VT 10 NMS Terminal When the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is powered up and operating and your terminal is connected operating and properly configured the title screen shown in Figure 37 appears on your terminal Figure 37 NMS PathBuilder S330 S310 Title Screen ten terperation Fauthigiiaer AO lert Gor laterite britais 2 0 00 Faceuerd i The Title screen identifies the interface and its software release number and prompts you for a password To open the main menu shown in Figure 38 enter the default password in all lowercase letters password If the software does not accept your password entry try again If the password still is not accepted check with your system administrator to obtain the correct password Using the Menus 43 Figure 38 PathBuilder S330 S310 Main Menu F Taai 198 97 64 101 Mm E Connari Exit Jarina Hp EH E FPatikaildsr 530 alma MENE Heise Hrag psten Siete CeeFigeration Hamaqemrat Falt Heaegenest Ferhertaktt Hiaapeeat Exit iA dir di bh Fiesp eater a yrlectisa 1 te 5 f Use the options on the main menu as follows a Select 1 System Administration to access common parameters a Select 2 Configuration Management to view or set configuration parameters for cards
126. Fleg Betes A FES fire 5 Change the following parameters as desired Link Type The input output protocol for encapsulation and SAR to AAL5 conversion DXI ATM Forum Mode 1A SDLC ITU standard HDLC SDLC frame Frame Relay Frame Relay Forum Specification 5 and 8 modes 1 and 2 Configuring the SIM Local Management Interface gt Configuring the Serial Interface 97 Terminal Timing Source This parameter applies only when the attached cable is DCE type cable The setting for the Terminal Timing depends on the nature and speed of the device application but the typical configuration is Internal the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch provides the clock for the device application In any case the Terminal Timing Source setting for the PathBuilder 330 S310 serial port must be the opposite of that for the device For example if the Terminal Timing Source for the router is set to Internal then you must set the Terminal Timing Source for the serial port to External Internal Configures the port to use the internal clock as the terminal timing source The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch provides the clock to clock in the data traffic from a router or other data device External Configures the port to use an external device as the terminal timing source The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch accepts the clock for data from the router or other data device Receive Timing Phase Receive timing phase control This param
127. From the Virtual Circuit menu select 1 List Virtual Circuits to open the List Virtual Circuit Summary screen shown in Figure 140 The List Virtual Circuit summary screen shown in Figure 140 appears This screen shows a summary of all virtual circuits with a virtual circuit number VC assigned to each Figure 140 List Virtual Circuit Summary Screen Taye MV i j e AL E Coraci Et orina Hain tek Eei Fathiei leer 30 alma MRN Last Firtesl Circeits Ti e amp Tir E ECE card ijp rI tE tard ifp FI tE icriptiona 1 SIH amp MED bii a Of 1s bere ts E EEE 7 1 Tels B A WF LEE bebo CE ej CHRE Ps Ja m i bii oa ae rd tee beiireci tt i CHF et A mea we be bein z3 ib amp OO Sele bii a a on tec heirce t Eater ptem 1 5 5 Est far perisas mca The List Virtual Circuit Summary Screen shows a summary of all virtual circuits with a virtual circuit number VC assigned to each It displays the following information A question mark appears to the left of the card name if the virtual circuit is not Operational Card Card type S p Slot and port numbers for side A and side B of the circuit Rx Tx Virtual circuit information specific to the card type For example for UNI cards these columns list the receive transmit VPI VCI for side A and side B of the circuit while for CBR cards these columns list the DSO channels Description The description entered when the circuit was configured 2 T
128. Hap ra Fathieilder 330 Siete TIH Catig sti 1 Fert 1 2 Card Ceafigeratioa T Freviees Heeg Flere ater s selection 1 te 4 3 3 Select 1 Port 1 to open the SIM Port Configuration Port LM I selection menu shown in Figure 86 96 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 86 SIM Port Configuration Port LM I Selection M enu F Taa 07 Gd 10 Fathiei leer 0530 alwa MRN Siete FIH Fert 1 Dafipm ttim 4 Pert GesFigerstiss 2 LHI Cafi atisa 3 Previews Hrag Flere eater s selection 1 te 4 3 4 Select 1 Port Configuration to open the SIM Port Configuration menu shown in Figure 87 This menu displays the current serial port configuration and provides options that allow you to change certain parameters Figure 87 Configuring the Serial Port Fatikaildsr 0130 alma ERPS Fiets Fert TIH Fet DaFipm ptim Lik Iypr Frer Eel ETF GFF Cable Teper Hear er OFF Termins Vinieg Seerce Iebereel CE BFF beceiet Tinieg Peate Herwal Gon OFF Bate Este 1 54 fies Soetes fet F Terriret His Flag Bytes 1 Serr Staten Get f Sareice FES faire Z Epitet 4 Set Link Tee Set His Fla Erir 2 tet Terminal Tinig ieit Set FEI Diz F bet Eerie Tinieg Fees Ta Bet Sinje Foes b Set bata ate Previeas Flac eater a selection i te amp J MAEHIMGS The pert bes te Pre is HET EF SERFIDE state bih Chaylee thee Seceler Tiniag Phase Bate Eple His
129. I AALS Timing Looped system Class of Service AAL5 T1 DSX Elconnector type RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter Frame Relay support FRF 5 FRF 8 FRF 11 Compression Types G 165 G 729A G 726 G 711 voice activity detection fax modem detection data will switch to 40 or 60 kbps DTM F relay DS3 E3 EXPANSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports 1 Interface type s DS3 E3 Connector type Coax BNC ATM Framing HEC PLCP LBO 0 to 250 ft 250 to 450 ft Line Coding B8ZsS DS3 HDB3 E3 Line Framing M 23 and C BIT DS3 G 751 PLCP G 804 G832 HEC E3 ETHERNET 10 100 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports 1 Interface type VC level dual leaky bucket 56 Kbps to 16 66 Mbps Connector type RJ 45 Data support 10BASE T 100BASE TX IEEE 802 3 ATM support Bridging with filtering spanning tree RFC 1483 LLC_SNAP RFC 1577 2225 IP over ATM Shaping AAL5 peak rate Forwarding rate Greater than 7000 pps 218 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS PathBuilder 310 Specifications Table 16 lists complete specifications for the PathBuilder S310 WAN access switch Table 16 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Ethernet LOBASE T V 35 RS422 T1 E1 UNI Mechanical Shelf dimensions 19 in rack mountable Rack mount spacing Cooling Unit weight approx Shipping weight approx Input power requirements Power consumption Maximum current Environmental Operating
130. I virtual path identifier 132 VPI and VCI ranges 238 VT100 configuring via 41 W warning information xi World Wide Web WWW 277 3Com Corporation LIMITED WARRANTY SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 S310 WAN Access Switches HARDWARE 3Com warrants this hardware product to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the following length of time from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller Network interface cards Lifetime Other hardware products one 1 year Spare Parts and Spares Kits 90 days 3Com s sole obligation under this express warranty shall be at 3Com s option and expense to repair the defective product or part deliver to Customer an equivalent product or part to replace the defective item or if neither of the two foregoing options is reasonably available 3Com may in its sole discretion refund to Customer the purchase price paid for the defective product All products that are replaced will become the property of 3Com Replacement products may be new or reconditioned 3Com warrants any replaced or repaired product or part for ninety 90 days from shipment or the remainder of the initial warranty period whichever is longer SOFTWARE 3Com warrants that each software program licensed from it will perform in substantial conformance to its program specifications for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller 3Com w
131. I mmf and n x El WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with AC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI smf and n x El WAN SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with DC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data OC3 STM 1 UNI smf and n x El WAN Optional Four Port CBR Module with three T1 DSX ports and one V 35 RS 449 port Optional Four Port CBR Module with three E1 ports and one V 35 RS 449 port Optional DS1 Voice Compression Module 1 SIM M Optional E1 Voice Compression Module 1 SIM M Voice Compression SIM M Optional Ethernet 10 100 Module Table 32 PathBuilder S330 Part Numbers continued Part Number 3C63322 3C63323 3C63324 3C63325 Description Optional Four port T1 UNI with IMA Expansion Module Optional Four port E1 UNI with IMA Expansion Module Optional single port DS3 Expansion Module Optional single port E3 Expansion M odule Table 33 PathBuilder 310 Part Numbers Part Number 3C63502A NC 3C63503A NC 3C63508 NC 3C63509 NC 3C63504 3C 63510 3C63311 3C63314 3C63313 3C63318 Description SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with AC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data and one T1 UNI SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with DC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data and one T1 UNI SuperStack II PathBuilder S310E ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with AC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data and one E1 UNI S
132. I with IMA Module Alarms continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps Duplicated Offset Excessive Link Delay Group n Abort Symmetry Group n Config Abort ATM Forum R 128 Group n Degraded Service Group n Dup IMA ID Group n FE Abort Symmetry Group n FE Blocked ATM Forum R 132 Group n FE Config Abort Group n FE Start Up ATM Forum R 127 Group n FE Insufficient Links ATM Forum R 131 continued Duplicated far end ICP cell offset in this IMA group in an IMA link Each IMA group assigns a unique Transmit offset to each link in the group This alarm means that a link received a Transmit offset already assigned to a previous link Some of the links are probably misconnected Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary The link has exceeded the user selectable value for acceptable link delay Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary Also try adjusting the link delay parameter for The link is removed from the the IMA group group Generated when Group n Config Abort is generated due to group symmetry problem Check and correct near end symmetry Only symmetric operation is supported in PathBuilder switches Check and correct the near end and far end parameters for compatibility The near end node rejects the far end IMA parameters The IMA group is passing data with less than the number of IMA
133. IA530 DCE Cable Part 3C 63923 Pin on 60 pin Pin on DB 25 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 1 Circuit GND 45 7 RTS 1 2 4 19 In CTS 9 10 5 13 Out DSR 7 8 6 22 Out DCD not used see 5 6 8 10 Out DCE cable DTR 3 4 20 23 In LL not used 29 18 In SD 28 2 In SD 27 14 In RD 11 3 Out RD 12 16 Out SCTE 26 24 In SCTE 25 11 In SCR 24 17 Out SCR 23 9 Out SCT 13 15 Out SCT 14 12 Out Shorting GR 1 47 48 49 Table 27 Pinouts for X 21 DTE Cable Part 3C63924 Pin on 60 pin Pin on DB 25 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 1 Circuit GND 15 8 RTS 9 10 3 10 Out CTS 1 2 5 12 In DSR In DCD In DTR Out LL Out SD 11 2 Out SD 12 9 Out RD 28 4 In RD 27 11 In SCTE Out SCTE Out SCR 24 26 6 In SCR 23 25 13 In SCT In SCT In Shorting GR 1 48 49 Shorting GR 2 51 52 230 CBR Module Connector Pinouts APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Table 28 Pinouts for X 21 DCE Cable Part 3C63925 Pin on 60 pin Pin on DB 25 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 1 Circuit GND 15 8 RTS 1 2 3 10 In CTS 9 10 5 12 Out DSR Out DCD Out DTR In LL In SD
134. IP over ATM Admin Status Change menu for IP over ATM status shown in Figure 107 Corse Ex Tersinal Help me PathiuLleer S330 Te EN ETEERHET slt IF prer ATH binin Ftates Cheep IF ewer lH States Bitabled 1 Fet IF ener AIH States 2 Pre ita Haa Pitit taber a selection 1 te 2 2 f b Select 1 Set IP over ATM Status The following prompt appears Enter IP over ATM Status 1 Disabled 2 Enabled c Enter 2 to enable or 1 to disable IP over ATM d Select 2 Previous menu to return to the IP over ATM menu 7 Enable or disable Bridging a Select 3 Enable Disable Bridging to open the IP over ATM Admin Status Change menu for Bridging Control status This menu is the same as the IP over ATM Admin Status Change menu for IP over ATM status except that it allows you to enable or disable bridging rather than IP over ATM b Select 1 Set Bridging Control Status The following prompt appears Enter Bridging Status 1 Disabled 2 Enabled c Enter 2 to enable or 1 to disable bridging control Configuring the Ethernet 10 100 Module The Ethernet 10 100 module provides a one port 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet interface Configuring the optional Ethernet 10 100 module involves the following tasks Configuring the Ethernet 10 100 interface Configuring the bridge including the spanning tree a Configuring IP over ATM This section tells you how to configure the Ethernet 10 100 PCI Ethe
135. In SCTE 13 17 Out SCTE 14 35 Out SCR 26 8 In SCR 25 26 In SCT 24 5 In SCT 23 23 In Shorting GR 1 48 49 Shorting GR 2 51 52 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Table 24 Connector Pinouts for RS 449 DCE Cable Part 3C63921 Pin on 60 pin Pin on DB 37 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 1 Circuit GND 15 16 30 19 20 37 RTS 1 2 7 25 In CTS 9 10 9 27 Out DSR 7 8 11 29 Out DCD 5 6 13 31 Out DTR 3 4 12 30 In LL not used 29 10 In SD 28 4 In SD 27 22 In RD 11 6 Out RD 12 24 Out SCTE 26 17 In SCTE 25 35 In SCR 24 8 Out SCR 23 26 Out SCT 13 5 Out SCT 14 23 Out Shorting GR 1 48 49 Table 25 Connector Pinouts for EIA530 DTE Cable Part 3C 63922 Pin on 60 pin Pin on DB 25 Direction for Signal Name Connector Connector Serial Port Frame GND 46 1 Circuit GND 45 7 RTS 9 10 4 19 Out CTS 1 2 5 13 In DSR 3 4 6 22 In DCD not used see 5 6 8 10 In DCE cable DTR 7 8 20 23 Out LL not used 44 18 Out SD 11 2 Out SD 12 14 Out RD 28 3 In RD 27 16 In SCTE 13 24 Out SCTE 14 11 Out SCR 26 17 In SCR 25 9 In SCT 24 15 In SCT 23 12 In Shorting GR 1 47 48 49 Shorting GR 2 51 52 228 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Table 26 Connector Pinouts for E
136. Information only Troubleshooting Steps Alarm Indication Signal AIS Far End Receive Failure continued An incoming alarm indication signal AIS indicates a LOS problem is occurring on the line upstream of the equipment connected to this port The far end equipment has a problem with the signal it is receiving from the PathBuilder device Check your locally connected DS3 E3 OC3 equipment or ask your service provider to trace the source of the AIS signal Check for a defective cable between the PathBuilder device network interface port and your service provider s network interface unit An open transmit line can cause this condition Check the LBO setting of the port 169 Managing System Alarms Table 10 Alarms Common to Several Modules continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps FEAC Loopback Idle Signal In Band Loopback Link Down Link Up Local Card Loopback Loss of Cell Delineation LOCD Loss of Signal LOS Network Card Loopback continued A DS3 overhead function that allows the system to be enabled or disabled for responding to Far End Alarm Condition commands from the central office When enabled the DS3 line loopback is put up upon instruction from the central office The system removes the loopback upon instruction or after 15 minutes The line has not been provisioned for service No data will pass on a line with an idle signal A loopback
137. Key Public Switched PBX or Key System Telephone System Network ATM Network Ethernet Ethernet LAN LAN Drop and Insert DSO channels can be allowed to transit the entire path providing DSO to DSO connectivity between end locations Structured DSOs can also be groomed to be combined through an ATM network thereby allowing end to end DSO switching as shown in Figure 188 Figure 188 Structured DSO Combining ORS Structured DSO Grooming D ATM Network Up to 24 Timeslots PBX Private Branch Exchange VCC Virtual Channel Connection DSO Signaling and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation Structured voice DSOs allow for channel associated signaling by providing a path for DSO ABCD bits See Figure 189 Channel associated signaling allows telephone supervision to be signaled end to end Note that structured DS1 CBR occupies only the needed bandwidth for the DSOs selected Figure 189 Channel Associated Signaling DSO in ABCD Bits Channel Associated Channel Signaling CAS Bank These frames are then followed by the ABCD bits of each active DSO Two DSO0 s ABCD bits are provided in each byte after the last DSO group Figure 190 shows an example of three DSOs and their ABCD bits sent in a structured encapsulation CBRModule 261 Figure 190 Multiframe Structure for 3x64kbit s DS1 with CAS AAL1 Pointer First Transported Octet o
138. LC mode 245 hello time spanning tree statistic 200 hello timer spanning tree parameter 106 l I O cabling connecting 27 idle timer CBR parameter 122 IMA inverse multiplexing algorithm 3 7 8 compliance table 271 group queues 237 IMA expansion card four port 4 IMA expansion module four port 3 configuring 77 connecting 38 LEDs 38 IMA group parameters admin port s 84 admin status 84 failure 91 FE state 90 frame length 84 IMAID 84 least delay link 91 max link delay 84 min oper ports 84 min startup ports 84 NE state 90 NE state last changed 91 operation link delay 91 operation port s 90 Rx active links 92 Rx available cell rate 91 Rx configured links 92 Rx framer length 91 RXIMAID 91 Rx timing ref link 91 test link 84 test pattern 84 test procedure 84 Tx active links 92 Tx available cell rate cps 91 Tx configured links 92 Tx timing ref link 91 IMA group status viewing 89 IMA groups adding 82 configuring 80 deleting 85 modifying 85 viewing or modifying existing 85 IMA ID IMA group parameter 84 IMA link failure status conditions 89 IMA link parameters FE Rx failure 89 FE Rx state 88 FE Tx state 87 NE Rx failure 88 NE Rx state 87 NE Tx state 87 operation link delay 89 RxLID 89 Rx test pattern 89 test procedure 89 TxLID 89 IMA link states 88 IMA link status viewing 86 inband Ipbk T1 E1 parameter 79 in band management configuring 57 in
139. LMI 98 configuring 98 location bridge parameter 111 LOF loss of frame OC3 STM 1 section statistic 191 logging on 41 logging out 43 Loopback menu 178 OC3 STM 1 179 loopbacks 178 CBR T1 DSX E1 182 local card CBR 182 local card DS3 181 local card E3 181 local card T1 E1 179 local card VCM 183 network card CBR 182 network card DS3 181 network card E3 181 network card T1 E1 179 network card VCM 183 network line CBR 182 network line DS3 181 network line E3 181 network line T1 E1 179 network line VCM 183 network packet 184 OC3 STM 1 180 PCM 184 PCM packet 184 T1 E1 UNI interface 179 VCM channel 184 VCM port 183 voice compression module 182 LOP loss of pointer OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 LOS loss of signal OC3 STM 1 section statistic 191 loss of seq num sync LM I statistic 197 M MAC addr IP over ATM statistic 200 MAC address bridge parameter 110 MAC MTU exceeded bridge filtering statistic 199 main menu 43 options 43 Manage Bridge menu 104 Manage IP Network Configuration menu 49 Manage Video Dial menu 161 management CPU MCPU configuring 59 configuring shapers 71 72 LEDs 68 required rev 68 statistics 187 tips on configuring shapers 71 viewing configuration information 71 virtual circuit parameters 150 management interface connector pinouts 222 management terminal connecting 39 42 max age timer spanning tree parameter 106 max link delay IMA group parameter
140. ORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE PERFORM ANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF 3COM OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO REPAIR REPLACEM ENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID AT 3COM S OPTION THIS DISCLAIM ER OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT BE AFFECTED IF ANY REM EDY PROVIDED HEREIN SHALL FAIL OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE DISCLAIMER Some countries states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or the limitation of incidental or consequential damages for certain products supplied to consumers or the limitation of liability for personal injury so the above limitations and exclusions may be limited in their application to you When the implied warranties are not allowed to be excluded in their entirety they will be limited to the duration of the applicable written warranty This warranty gives you specific legal rights which may vary depending on local law GOVERNING LAW This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the State of California U S A excluding its conflicts of laws principles and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for
141. OS RED Powers up in the off state and illuminates when a LOS Loss of Signal condition is detected on the incoming DS3 The LOS LED is off if a signal is present It reflects the state of the DS3 in real time a LOF RED Powers up in the off state and illuminates when a LOF Loss of Frame condition is detected on the incoming DS3 The LOF LED is off when the signal is in frame It reflects the state of the DS3 in real time a LOCD RED Powers up in the off state and illuminates when a LOCD Loss of Cell Delineation condition is detected on the incoming DS3 under HEC Header Error Control framing The LOCD LED is off when delineations are obtained It reflects the state of the DS3 in real time Figure 33 DS3 UNI Module LEDs L U l Eo LOCD LOF LOS ALM 38 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 330 only gt Connecting to the Four Port IMA Module The optional four port IMA module provides four additional T1 E1 ports You can connect up to four T1 E1 lines to this interface and combine them to forma logical inverse multiplexed high speed link You make connections to the four port IMA module in the same way that you make connections to the standard PathBuilder S330 S310 T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface For details see Connecting to the T1 E1 UNI Interface earlier in this chapter For connector pinouts see T1 E1 UNI with IMA Interface C
142. Parameters f the serial port is configured as a DXI port you must set the following virtual circuit parameters in addition to the common Shaper Number Priority and Early Packet Discard parameters DFA VPI The virtual path indicator VPI number corresponding to the DFA field 0 15 This parameter defines the selected VPI for Mapping to from the Port card Router to the trunk DFA VCI The virtual channel indicator VCI number corresponding to the DFA field 0 63 This parameter defines the selected VPI for Mapping to from the Port card Router to the trunk DFA VCI Range The DXI virtual channel indicator range 1 64 This parameter specifies the number of virtual circuits that will be built starting from the specified DFA VPI and DFA VCI thereby allowing quick input of multiple virtual circuits For example if you enter 1 as the DFA VPI 2 as the DFA VCI and 5 as the DFA VCI Range five virtual circuits will be built with the following VPI VCI combinations 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 and 5 6 SDLC Virtual Circuit Parameters f the serial port is configured as a SDLC port you simply set the common Shaper Number Priority and Early Packet Discard parameters Ethernet Port Virtual Circuit Parameters For Ethernet port virtual circuits you simply set the common Shaper Number Priority and Early Packet Discard parameters CBR Module Virtual Circuit Parameters The parameters that appear on the Add Virtual
143. Previous M enu to return to the T1 E1 UNI Configuration menu Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other T1 E1 ports that you want to configure You can map two to four T1 E1 ports into an IMA group thereby creating a logical inverse multiplexed high speed link The PathBuilder 330 also supports UNI groups The PathBuilder S310 switch features a single T1 E1 port and supports a UNI group on this port it does not support IMA groups The PathBuilder 330 supports up to four UNI or IMA groups using any combination of ports on the standard T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface and if installed the optional four port IMA expansion module Expansion slot 9 shares the same queue queue 1 as the group 1 IMA UNI therefore if an expansion module DS3 E3 UNI or four port IMA is installed in slot 9 the system deletes group 1 and all corresponding virtual circuits on startup and generates an information only alarm Furthermore you cannot add group 1 if an expansion module is installed in slot 9 either in the chassis or in the database If you enter a card type for slot 9 via the List Card menu group 1 and the corresponding virtual circuits are not deleted until the system is restarted Adding UNI Groups To set up a UNI group From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 From the List Card menu select 3 DS1 UNI to open the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu shown earlier
144. R virtual channel connection VCC The VCC is established as a permanent virtual circuit PVC and mapped from the ATM port on the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to another PathBuilder S330 S310 switch or to an ATM Forum circuit emulation compliant device The T1 DSX E1 inputs can be either ESF SF or no framing using B8ZS or AMI In accordance with the ATM Forum s Circuit Emulation Service CES specifications the received frame can be broken up into its DSO and ABCD signaling components using structured mode or tunneled through the ATM network using unstructured mode Structured mode allows DSO mid span drop and insert or grooming a In structured format the data is framed on then any single 64K channel or a group of timeslots can be selected grouped and SAR d to a single ATM connection In the T1 DSX E1 format up to 24 channels or a combination thereof can be selected The timing in structured mode should be loop or system See Structured DS1 later in this section for further information on structured service and when to use it In unstructured format the data is treated as bits in bits out and is converted into cells with a single VP VC connection You can select the timing loop system SRTS or adaptive in unstructured mode With SRTS timing the internal system clock on both ends must be traceable to a common source See Unstructured DS1 later in this section for details on unstructured service and when to use i
145. S AND APPLICATIONS Figure 60 List Card Menu Fathibeilaer IHO Litt Cord Hees CeaFig Card Tipe atteal Card Teper ST HE Bid HI t B HI B HI FIH FIH EDSERHET ETEERHET CH E1 3 705 TEE E103 7075 BRICE CAF BII SIE CAHP ELI DME 1 2 ke 5 amp F HEIHE Prezir Hee Flac weber a selection 0 te i i f Configuring the MCPU configuration involves viewing configuration information and managing Management CPU shapers To open the MCPU Menu 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu 2 Select 1 MCPU to open the MCPU Configuration menu shown in Figure 63 From the MCPU Card menu you access the submenus and screens from which you view configuration information and configure shapers as described in the following subsections Figure 61 MCPU Configuration Menu A Tasei 198 91 64 101 Fathielleer 0530 Siete HEFE Geer igerseties 1 Cord Geer sti 2 ihagper CeafFigeratisa 3 Freri Hea Fleet cater elertia 1 te F F Viewing MCPU Configuration Information Configuring MCPU Shapers Configuring the Management CPU 71 To view configuration information for the management CPU From the MCPU Configuration menu select 1 Card Configuration to open the Management Processor Configuration screen This screen displays the following CPU configuration information Hardware revision Serial number
146. Structured versus Unstructured Summary 264 Video Conferencing 265 Point to Point Video Conferencing 265 Multi point Video Conferencing 267 Voice Compression Module 268 Supported Voice Compression Features 269 C ATM Forum IMA COMPLIANCE D TECHNICAL SUPPORT Online Technical Services 277 World Wide Web Site 277 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 277 3Com FTP Site 277 3Com Bulletin Board Service 278 Access by Analog Modem 278 Access by Digital Modem 278 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service 278 Support from Your Network Supplier 278 Support from 3Com 279 Returning Products for Repair 280 INDEX 3COM CORPORATION LIMITED WARRANTY oe Servicing xi WARNING INFORMATION This section contains warning information for AC powered systems CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments of performance or procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace the battery with only the same or equivalent type as that recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Servicing Service of this unit is to be performed by qualified service personnel only Service of certain components and subassemblies in this equipment is accomplished by the replacement of Field Replaceable Units FRUs However safety agency approval requires that the servicing of other subassemblies within
147. SuperStack Il PathBuilder 9330 8310 WAN Access Switches Reference Guide Release 2 04 http www 3com com Part No 09 1850 000 Published August 1999 3Com Corporation 5400 Bayfront Plaza Santa Clara California 95052 8145 Copyright 1999 3Com Corporation All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work such as translation transformation or adaptation without written permission from 3Com Corporation 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change 3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty term or condition of any kind either implied or expressed including but not limited to the implied warranties terms or conditions of merchantability satisfactory quality and fitness for a particular purpose 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this documentation at any time If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document in the hard copy documentation or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE TXT or LICENSE TXT If you are unable to locate a copy please contac
148. System Configures the VCM port interface to use the system clock as defined in the System Clock Configuration menu as its timing source For details about designating the system clock see Configuring the System Clock in Chapter 3 Loop Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the timing source timing is received from the service loop Select Loop if the VCM T1 E1 port is used for the network carrier service termination in which case the carrier the service loop typically provides the timing source CRC E1 only Enables With CRC multiframe or disables No CRC multiframe Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC information CRC is a framing option that checks for errors in data It is a communication check for parity framing and is used for performance monitoring in E1 networks Admin Status Administrative status Out of Service or In Service 128 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Configuring the VCM To configure the VCM card Card 1 From the VCM Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 115 select 3 Card Configuration to open the VCM Card Configuration menu This menu lists information about the VCM card and allows you to set the card s administrative status Figure 118 shows a representative VCM Card Configuration menu Figure 118 VCM Card Configuration Menu Fathieilaer 30 alma Fae SleCe WEH FI Gerd Cee ieee BY Ere Serial H
149. T1 E1 parameter 92 0 OC3 Reference Clock Selection menu 47 OC3 STM 1 Loopback menu 179 OC3 STM 1 parameters admin status 93 ATM payload scramble 93 Sonet interface mode 93 timing source 94 OC3 STM 1 Performance M anagement menu 190 OC3 STM 1 port 239 configuring 93 connecting 32 data flow 239 LEDs 33 loopbacks 180 performance monitoring 190 principles of operation 239 virtual circuit parameters 151 OC3 STM 1 statistics ATM 193 far line performance 191 far path performance 192 line performance 191 path performance 192 0C3 STM 1 virtual circuit parameters receive VPI 151 transmit VCI 151 transmit VPI 151 OC3 STM 1statistics section performance 191 online technical services 277 operation group T1 El parameter 92 operation link delay IMA group parameter 91 IMA link parameter 89 T1 El parameter 80 operation port s IMA group parameter 90 operational status port 76 ordering additional equipment 232 output port disabled bridge filtering statistic 199 output queues 236 priorities 237 oversized frames Ethernet statistic 199 P part idprom equipment list parameter 67 part oem equipment list parameter 68 partial packet discard 238 parts list 9 parts ordering 232 passwords changing default 45 55 default 42 setting 54 PathBuilder 233 payload size type CBR virtual circuit parameter 154 PCI Ethernet Configuration Menu 117 PCM loopback for VCM 184 PCM packet loopback for VCM 184 PCR peak cell ra
150. X E1 physical 1 each RJ 48 Impedance 100 Ohms Framing D4 or ESF Line Coding AMI or B8ZS LBO 0 to 655 ft Clock DCE Internal Front panel LEDs 1 7 PWR FAIL TEST STS 0 STS 1 INS ALM Data rates n x 56 Kbps or n x 64 Kbps structured n 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 24 ATM support CAS CCS support with dynamic bandwidth allocation AALI AALS Timing Looped system Class of Service AAL5 T1 DSX Elconnector type RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter Frame Relay support FRF 5 FRF 8 FRF 11 Compression Types G 165 G 729A G 726 G 711 voice activity detection fax modem detection data will switch to 40 or 60 kbps DTM F relay ETHERNET 10 100 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports 1 Interface type VC level dual leaky bucket 56 Kbps to 16 66 Mbps Connector type RJ 45 Data support 10BASE T 100BASE TX IEEE 802 3 ATM support Bridging with filtering spanning tree RFC 1483 LLC_SNAP RFC 1577 2225 IP over ATM Shaping AAL5 peak rate Forwarding rate Greater than 7000 pps 222 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Connector Pinouts This section lists the connector pinouts for the interfaces supported by the PathBuilder S330 S310 WAN access switches Management Interface Table 17 lists the connector pinouts for the management interface Connector Pinouts Table 17 Management Interface Pinouts PIN Carrier Detect PIN 2 Rx Data PIN 3 Tx Data PIN 4 DTR PINS Signal Ground PIN
151. a single IMA bundle The unit also supports an automatic mechanism for removing failed lines from an IMA bundle ensuring the resiliency required for your mission critical applications a Multiple connections to Ethernet segments over ATM WAN and support of bridging including learning aging filtering spanning tree and classical IP over ATM RFC 1577 2225 through the standard Ethernet 1OBASE T port and the optional Ethernet 10 100BASE T Ethernet PCI module The standard Ethernet 10BASE T port supports half duplex only while the optional Ethernet 10 100BASE T port supports both half and full duplex Support of Frame Relay service and network interworking ATM DXI and SDLC HDLC pass through through the high performance serial frame data interface Choice of either single mode or multi mode OC3 STM 1 separate units through the OC3 STM 1 module Single mode enables higher speed trunking if you have access to fiber WAN while multi mode is ideal for connecting high speed servers switches or hubs equipped with multi mode fiber connections Three expansion slots allowing you to add other advanced features such as T1 DSX or El CBR for voice and video voice compression Ethernet 10 100 DS3 E3 or 4 additional T1 E1 IMA ports 4x switch switching architecture including four priority queues three queues shaped and one bulk shaper with user defined queue sizes and early and partial packet discard capability Device management
152. aight to V 35 35 pin female 2m 6ft RS 449 cable HD 60 pin male to RS 449 37 pin male 2m 6ft crossover DTE RS 449 cable HD 60 pin male straight to RS 449 37 pin female 2m 6ft EIA530 cable HD 60 pin male to EIA530 25 pin male 2m 6ft crossover DTE EIA530 cable HD 60 pin male straight to EIA530 25 pin female 2m 6ft X 21 cable DTE HD 60 pin male to X 21 15 pin male crossover DTE X 21 cable DCE HD 60 pin male straight to X 21 15 pin female T1 E1 cable RJ48 shielded straight to RJ48 8m 25ft T1 E1 cable RJ48 shielded crossover to RJ48 8m 25ft E1 Balun Adapter RJ48 120 ohm to Coax 75 ohm 2M 6Ft Mating connector for 6 pin dual row alarm connector Contact for 6 pin dual row alarm connector 6 contacts required PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW This chapter describes the operation and data flow for each of the SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and S310 WAN access switch PathBuilder S330 S310 switch modules and supported applications It contains the following sections a Management CPU a CTX Switch T1 E1 UNI with IMA Interface a OC3 STM 1 Port DS3 E3 UNI Modules a Serial Interface a Ethernet Interface LOBASE T or 10 100BASE T a CBR Module a Voice Compression Module Management CPU The management CPU provides an intelligent user interface in addition to the other built in interfaces available on the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch It also monitors and
153. ailable links This occurs when the near end has completed parameter negotiation with the far end but is neither passing data nor blocked The near end is idling because it does not have enough links in an IMA group This occurs only after group parameters are negotiated When this occurs the NE Insufficient Links alarm is also reported Summary information alarm to indicate one or more alarms on this IMA group are active Summary informational alarm to indicate all alarms on the IMA group are cleared There are fewer configured links than IMA links required to make an IMA group active The near end has lost all its links in an IMA group because these links have AFA LOS AIS OOF LCD or missing ICP cells This invalidates all the far end identity Different group IMA ID received on different links in an IMA group Different test procedure request from different links in an IMA group from the far end Different frame lengths received on different links in an IMA group Different group symmetry received on different links in an IMA group symmetrical versus asymmetrical operation The far end transmit clocking mode does not match the near end transmit clocking mode IMA label is not ATM Forum 1 0 Far end loopback detected external cable loopback or crosstalk Check and correct any faulty IMA links Check and correct IMA minimum links parameter Take the group down and stop passing
154. ails about setting up virtual circuits VPI and VCI Ranges As explained earlier in this chapter address translation is performed in the CTX For VP connections the full 8 bits of the VPI is looked up so up to 256 VP connections are supported per port For VC connections only two LSB VPI bits and 8 LSB VCI bits are considered So for VC connections VPs 0 through 3 and VCs 1 through 255 are the only ones supported Early packet discard EPD and partial packet discard PPD functions are provided on the CTX for every connection EPD and PPD are enabled per VC for those VCs carrying AALS traffic For EPD every output queue contains two thresholds that you can set congestion ON and congestion OFF You set these thresholds by percentage See Setting Congestion Thresholds in Chapter 4 for details about setting congestion thresholds Partial packet discard works when the queue is actually full and a cell is dropped for a particular connection When this happens the rest of the cells for that connection are discarded until the end of packet is reached T1 E1 UNI with IMA Interface gt The four T1 E1 UNI with IMA interfaces allow you to connect legacy voice video and data traffic to your branch offices using either single T1s Els or nxT1 nxE1 IMA bundles The IMA bundles connect up to four lines from a single office site eight lines if you have installed the optional four port IMA expansion module The PathBuilder S310
155. aja baja nia 10 0 13 Pe iy 2 Ha Bet 1t Peres P T itri Hoa bpr rtisa Fathieilder S50 1 08 00 Prete Exe for prerii ates J 62 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Downloading New Management Processor Firmware gt gt i gt The Report Firmware Version screen displays the following information about the management processor active firmware the upgradeable firmware currently being used by the M CPU Version The released firmware version number This is the version number that is displayed on the login screen Origins The original engineering build number for the release If the Version and Origins release numbers are the same then the release is not an official release but rather a Beta test version Who The user login ID for this softw are build Date The date and time that the build was made Company Name 3Com Corporation or OEM partner if desired Product Name The PathBuilder product for which this image was built PathBuilder S700 PathBuilder S600 PathBuilder S330 or PathBuilder 310 In addition to the management processor firmware information listed above the Report Firmware Version screen also lists the Boot Firmware Release the version number of the boot firmware containing the bootstrap code used to bring up the operation firmware The PathBuilder 330 S310 module retains the operation firmware in a flash memory bank located
156. al Host IP Parameters 49 Configuring Trap Clients 52 Configuring the Default Gateway 53 Setting the Time and Date 54 Setting up Passwords 54 Performing Additional Super User Functions 56 Taking over a Read Write Session 56 Erasing the System Database 56 Configuring In band Management 57 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Viewing and Configuring System Information 59 Specifying General System Information 60 Viewing RS 232 Port Configuration Information 61 Viewing the Firmware Version 61 Downloading New Management Processor Firmware 62 Downloading Firmware Using TFTP via an Ethernet Port 62 Downloading Firmware Using FTP via an Ethernet port 63 Downloading Firmware Using Xmodem via the Serial Port 64 Backing up and Restoring the Database and Code Image 64 Backing up the Database 64 Restoring the Database 65 Backing up the Codelmage 65 Restoring the Code Image 66 Updating the Flash File System 66 Resetting the Interface Card 67 Viewing an Equipment List 67 Verifying Hardware Requirements 68 Using the Configuration Management Menu 68 Using the List Card Menu 69 Configuring the Management CPU 70 Viewing MCPU Configuration Information 71 Configuring MCPU Shapers 71 Configuring the CTX 72 Configuring CTX Shapers 73 Configuring CTX Buffers 74 Setting Congestion Thresholds 76 Configuring Ports 76 Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 77 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports 77 Activation Deactivation Bit Error Rates 79 C
157. also updated depending on the operation CTX Output Queuesand The CTX isan output buffered switch with a bus capacity of 400M bits total It can Memory Partition store 64K cells The CTX terminates three Utopia buses each capable of terminating an OC3 STM 1 payload a The first bus carries the OC3 STM 1 interface on the motherboard m The second bus is shared between the SAR and expansion slot 7 both are treated as separate ports in the switch a The third bus is used by the four T1 E1 UNI with IMA ports this bus can handle up to four separate ports in the switch The output buffer is statically divided on power up into 256 cell blocks Any number of blocks can be allocated to any queue The software sets up a reasonable default configuration as listed on the CTX Buffers menu shown in Figure 168 To modify the CTX Buffers 1 Open the CTX Buffers menu a From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card b From the List Card menu select 2 CTX c From the CTX menu select 2 Manage Buffers 2 Modify the default CTX buffer configuration as desired Figure 168 CTX Buffers Menu Displaying Default Memory Allocation Fat Siet laterface eee TAE as a i 17 rah 3 F 4 3 3 3 k 4 L 4 f t T T E C E t high high high high high high high bbelleer 14t CTE BerFfers kaffer tells TEF Tt TEF it n TEF Tit TEF Tt TEE
158. alt Haspmat pispley bereet ilen Clear terreat alarms Fispley Bistery ilens Clear Bittery alana Leneeack Preriemr Hee 4 ree Plitis weber telection 1 te amp f 2 Select 1 Display Current Alarms to view a list of current alarms as shown in Figure 149 Figure 149 Sample Current Alarm Display Fathielleer DEO Ripley Gerest alarm bee ppt Cre firt Fert ered Hajar TREE F OFF MeO PASTE EF Erilist Farity Failed k OOO FASPRs PF j Less ef tigaal Press Esc Fer perims e i To determine whether or not an alarm generating condition has been resolved clear the current alarms and recheck the Display Current Alarms screen as follows 1 From the Display Current Alarm screen press Esc to return to the Fault Management menu 2 Select 2 Clear Current Alarms 3 Enter y in response to the confirmation prompt to clear the current alarms 4 Select 1 Display Current Alarms to return to the Display Current Alarms screen a Alarm generating conditions that are still present will regenerate alarms on the Display Current Alarms screen a Alarm generating conditions that are no longer present will no longer generate alarms on the Current Alarm screen PathBuilder S330 S310 This section lists the alarm messages meanings of the alarm messages and Alarm Messages troubleshooting tips for the major errors reported from each of the PathBuilder 330 S310 interfaces It contains the following subsections
159. apter 3 for details Establish communication between the PathBuilder S330 S310 and any management terminal in one of these ways a Direct RS 232 using the VT100 terminal or VT100 emulator as described above a Direct 10BaseT on the Management CPU card using an IP Telnet session Figure 35 illustrates the network management station terminal connection options Figure 35 Network Management Station Terminal Connection Options 10BASE T RS 232 LAN VT 100 NMS Terminal eere e L a Logging On GETTING STARTED This chapter tells you how to initialize and prepare SuperStack II PathBuilder 330 and SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder S330 S310 switch for operation and how to use the PathBuilder S330 S310 menus It contains the following sections Logging On a Using the Menus a Performing Initial System Configuration a Performing Additional Super User Functions a Configuring In band Management You enter initial configuration information via the local user interface This interface is presented on a VT100 terminal connected to the RS 232 console port on the front of the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch as shown in Figure 36 See Chapter 2 for details about connecting the VT100 terminal Set the terminal for the following 9600 baud no parity a 8 data bits a 1 stop bit 42 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED
160. arameters 3 Set the VCM subchannel circuit parameters including the following DSO Channel The number of the DSO channel you want to assign to the DLCls used by the circuit DLCI and to increment the subchannel ID SCID The combination of ATM VCC DLCI and SCID must be unique the same combination cannot appear on different DSO channels DLCI Enter the number of the DLCI to be used for the circuit 16 1023 Messages appear at the bottom of the screen after you enter the DSO Channels and DLCI parameters indicating that your entries have been accepted If you do not see such a message the system has not accepted your entry i gt Since all subchannel values must be unique it is easiest to use the same VCC and SCID Subchannel ID the ID number of the subchannel you want to assign to the DSOs used by the circuit 4 255 After you have entered the subchannel parameters the following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Is the above information correct y n The DLCI and SCID numbers must match for the local and remote PathBuilder 330 S310 switches 4 Enter y to confirm your configuration shows a completed VCM subchannel circuit As shown in the figure the following message appears at the bottom of the screen VC has been added Press any key to continue Figure 136 Completed VCM Subchannel Circuit Fathielleer 0530 Oa Firtesl Circeit Circeit Typer MH Seber Bevcriptiss terbcirceit iia States
161. arding Table Figure 99 List Forwarding Table ERTE U 1 Connect Edt arina Hap hms Fathiei leer 0530 alma MRN ETEEERHET slat Last Farwerdieg Table Hap eaters isF Lecetion aye i OM 002 002 Reese Br be EHET amp a EHE Z MENI OES Frit EHET amp 150 eF 3 GEIS eee Leal EHET Pihdit Freit EIC te ge te presisa maai The List Forwarding Table identifies the port on which a certain MAC address is located This can be an Ethernet port or an ATM VC Using the information in the List Forwarding table the bridge knows where to send a MAC address when it receives one If the Ethernet port receives a packet and the destination M AC address is not in the List Forwarding table the port broadcasts the packet sends it to all Vxs associated with that port The List Forwarding Table includes the following columns of information MAC Address The destination MAC address Disp Disposition Bridge The default disposition Flood Flood the frame on all available VCs Filter Drop this frame L_ Static Destination MAC address is in Bridge Static Table SRC_Address Filtering User configured source address filter DEST_ Address Filtering User configured destination address filter Location The port slot and port number on which the destination MAC address is located Age The age of the station address entry in the List Forwarding Table Permanent indicating that the entry is on the Bridge Sta
162. arrants the media containing software against failure during the warranty period No updates are provided 3Com s sole obligation under this express warranty shall be at 3Com s option and expense to refund the purchase price paid by Customer for any defective software product or to replace any defective media with software which substantially conforms to applicable 3Com published specifications Customer assumes responsibility for the selection of the appropriate applications program and associated reference materials 3Com makes no warranty or representation that its software products will meet Customer s requirements or work in combination with any hardware or applications software products provided by third parties that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free or that all defects in the software products will be corrected For any third party products listed in the 3Com software product documentation or specifications as being compatible 3Com will make reasonable efforts to provide compatibility except where the non compatibility is caused by a bug or defect in the third party s product or from use of the software product not in accordance with 3Com s published specifications or user manual YEAR 2000 WARRANTY In addition to the Hardware Warranty and Software Warranty stated above 3Com warrants that each product sold or licensed to Customer on and after January 1 1998 that is date sensitive will continue p
163. atabase is stored in non volatile flash memory in the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch As further protection 3Com recommends that you back up the database after any major configuration changes A power cycle of the shelf is necessary to synchronize the database on the M CPU if it is being restored No additional action is necessary if you are just backing up the database Backing up the Database To back up the database 1 Select 1 System Administration to open the System Administration menu 2 Select 7 Update Flash File System 3 Enter y at the confirmation prompt to update the flash file system Wait for the Update Completed message before continuing to Step 4 4 Create a directory that will hold only the database files M ove to the directory you created in step 4 6 FTP to the node FTP lt node IP address gt a FTP login will be the node name upper left hand corner of user interface a FTP password will be the node password the password used to access user interface Switch to binary mode by entering binary Change directory to fileDev disk by entering cd fileDev disk 10 Viewing and Configuring System Information 65 Back up all files by entering mget Exit FTP by entering bye Restoring the Database To restore the database You must have read write access on the node to perform the restore operation M ove to the directory you created earlier in step 4 under Backing up the Database Th
164. atches DE value to CLP value When the serial port is in this mode it does not translate between Frame Relay NLPID encapsulation rather it send it straight through the ATM network possibly onto a Frame Relay network or device Always 0 Mode 2 mapping with the CLP field mapped to a constant value of 0 Mode 2 is an operational method for indicating data congestion to either the ATM or Frame Relay network M ode 2 allows for translation between NLPID and LLC SNAP encapsulation It is used when connecting a Frame Relay device or network to a non Frame Relay device or network For example if the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch is connecting a router FRAD over an ATM network public or private and at the other site a router with an ATM OC3 STM 1 UNI is connected to the WAN network typically the router OC3 STM 1 UNI does not support NLPID and requires mode 2 mapping so that the packet can be encapsulated to LLC SNAP Configuring Virtual Circuits 149 Always 1 Mode 2 mapping with the CLP field mapped to a constant value of 1 Mode 2 is an operational method for indicating data congestion to either the ATM or Frame Relay network Mode 2 allows for translation between NLPID and LLC SNAP encapsulation It is used when connecting a Frame Relay device or network to a non Frame Relay device or network For example if the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is connecting a router FRAD over an ATM network public or private and at the other site a route
165. atistics Detail screen displays the number of cells sent on each side of the selected circuit Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Port Group gt Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper 1 1 To display statistics for all virtual statistics by port group From the Configuration Management menu select 2 Manage Circuits to open the Virtual Circuit menu From the Virtual Circuit menu select 6 Show Virtual Statistics by Port Group to view a summary of statistics for all circuits on each port group The Port Group Virtual Statistics summary screen displays the following information for each port group Port Group Card type and port group number Revd from The number of cells received Dropped The number of received cells dropped Revd for The number of cells sent Dropped The number of sent cells dropped To view the number of cells received dropped and sent from and to a particular port group enter the desired port group number You can also display a summary of virtual circuits by port group by selecting 4 Performance Management from the main menu to open the Performance Management menu and then selecting 3 Show Virtual Circuits By Port Group To display virtual circuit statistics by shaper From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu 2 Select 2 CTX to open the CTX menu 3 From the CTX menu select 4 VC Statistics by Shaper to displa
166. ay statistic 196 HDLC statistic 195 received CLP DXI statistic 196 received DE Frame Relay statistic 196 received FECN Frame Relay statistic 196 received frames DXI statistic 196 Ethernet statistic 199 Frame Relay statistic 196 HDLC statistic 195 serial port ATM VC statistic 197 VCM VC statistic 205 Received IP Packets 201 received IP packets IP over ATM statistic 200 received LIV responses LM I statistic 197 received LM frames LMI statistic 197 redundant power supply RPS 25 26 27 regulatory information xi xiii Report Firmware Version screen 61 requirements hardware 68 resetting interface card 67 resetting system 56 67 returning products for repair 280 rev equipment list parameter 68 revision number 68 RFC 1577 112 root bridge spanning tree statistic 200 root path cost spanning tree statistic 200 root port spanning tree statistic 200 RPS redundant power supply 25 26 27 RS 232 port entering initial configuration information 61 viewing configuration information 61 RS 366 Lite 143 RS 366 video virtual circuits adding 141 definition 132 running seconds T1 E1 statistic 189 rx side A Ethernet ATM statistic 201 rx side B Ethernet ATM statistic 201 Rx active links IMA group parameter 92 RX ARP Reply 201 Rx ARP reply IP over ATM statistic 201 RX ARP Request 201 Rx ARP request IP over ATM statistic 201 Rx available cell rate cps IMA group parameter 91 Rx bytes VCM port activity statisti
167. band virtual circuit 136 index video dial parameter 163 installation 11 expansion modules 19 general procedure 12 inarack 25 overview 12 procedures 15 rack mounting 24 site requirements 14 interface card resetting 67 internal timing 240 Internal transmit errors Ethernet statistic 199 interworking network 247 service 246 interworking mode serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameter 151 inverse multiplexing algorithm IMA 3 7 8 compliance table 271 group queues 237 IP address IP over ATM parameter 115 MCPU virtual circuit parameter 150 setting Ethernet port 51 setting for in band circuit 150 specifying for default gateway 53 trap client parameter 53 IP encapsulation MCPU virtual circuit parameter 151 IP host setup 51 IPoverATM 3 5 configuring 112 statistics 200 IP over ATM Admin Status Change menu 115 for Bridging Control status 116 for IP over ATM 116 IP over ATM ATM Router Configuration menu 115 IP over ATM Configuration screen 113 IP over ATM LAN Router Configuration menu 115 IP over ATM menu 112 113 IP over ATM parameters IP address 115 subnet mask 115 IPX address M CPU virtual circuit parameter 151 IV IMA IMA violations IMA link statistic 188 L LAN connectivity 257 LAN router configuring for IP over ATM 115 IP over ATM statistic 200 last statistics reset date LM I statistic 197 last statistics reset time LM I statistic 197 late collisions Ethernet statistic 199 LBO line bu
168. blayer 5 2 2 IMA Specific Transmission None Noted Convergence Sublayer Part 5 2 2 1 IMA General Characteristics R 5 12 FC 5 2 2 2 IMA OAM Cell Definition R 13 16 FC 5 2 2 2 1 Filler Cell Definition R 17 FC continued 272 Table 44 Section 5 2 2 2 2 5 2 2 3 5 2 2 3 1 5 2 2 3 2 5 2 2 4 5 2 2 5 5 2 2 6 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 2 8 1 3 9 1 APPENDIX C ATM Forum IMA COMPLIANCE ATM Forum IMA Specification Compliance Table continued Description ICP Cell Definition IMA Frame Definition ICP Cell Offset IMA Frame Length M Processing of the SCCI Field IMA ID Group Symmetry Symmetrical and Asymmetrical Operation Configuration and Operation Quality of Service Support for Common and Independent Transmit Clock Operations IMA Data Cell Rate Implementation Behavior of the Transmit End Derivation of the Transmit IDCR from the TRL Selection of the TRL Stuffing on the TRL and Other Links Behavior of the Receive End Differential Link Delay on IMA Differential Link Delay Requirement on the Transmitter continued Requirement Option R 18 20 R 21 R 22 24 R 25 28 R 29 30 O 1 31 R 32 33 O 2 34 CR 1 3 35 R 36 37 R 38 39 R 40 43 0 3 4 R 44 R 45 R 46 53 O 5 0 6 None R 54 R 55 R 56 59 R 60 CR 5 6 R 61 63 None R 64 3Com Compliance Comments FC FC FC FC FC O 1 NC FC 0 2 CR 1 3 NC FC FC FC Asymmetrical operation will
169. bridge and onto the WAN To configure source address filtering From the Bridge menu select 4 Source Address Filtering to open the Source Address Filter menu shown in Figure 97 Figure 97 Source Address Filter M enu tek E iH FPatikaildsr 530 alma MEN ETEEEHET slet Demet bhireys Filter Hram Last eer Filter eres i feerce Filter Mires Belete emre Filter ress Previa Haa re be Flea weber a selection 1 te amp a E Select 2 Add Source Filter Address The Add Source Address Filter screen appears This screen displays the following prompt Enter MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX or lt CR gt Enter the MAC address of the station from which you do not want packets to traverse the bridge After you make your entry you are returned to the Source Address Filter menu Repeat steps 2 and 3 as desired to add more addresses to the source filter list To view the current list select 1 List Source Filter Address from the Source Filter Address menu m To change an address in the list delete the incorrect address and add the correct address To delete an address from the list select 3 Delete Source Filter Address from the Source Filter Address menu and enter the number corresponding to the address you want to delete Then enter y at the confirmation prompt to delete the selected address Select 4 Previous Menu to return to the Bridge menu Select 1 Setup to open the Bridge Setup menu shown
170. c 206 Rx cell rate IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group statistic 190 Rx cells IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group statistic 190 Rx configured links IMA group parameter 92 Rx framer length IMA group parameter 91 Rx ICP cell error rate IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group statistic 190 Rx IMA ID IMA group parameter 91 Rx LID IMA link parameter 89 T1 El parameter 80 Rx packets VCM port activity statistic 206 Rx test pattern IMA link parameter 89 Rx timing ref link IMA group parameter 91 Rx vpi vci video dial parameter 163 Rx FC near end receive failures IMA link statistic 189 Rx FC FE far end receive failures IMA link statistic 189 Rx UUS IM A near end receive unusable seconds IMA link statistic 188 Rx UUS IM A FE far end receive unusable seconds IMA link statistic 189 S safety classification of ports xii SAP filtered bridge filtering statistic 199 SCR sustained cell rate 71 SCR clock source CBR parameter 124 screens Add Virtual Circuit 135 Add Virtual Circuit initial 133 Alarm History 177 Bridge Static Table 111 Current Alarm 166 IP over ATM Configuration 113 List Forwarding Table 110 List Virtual Circuit Detail 157 158 List Virtual Circuit Summary 157 MCPU Shapers 72 Report Firmware Version 61 title 42 Video Call Routing Table 164 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail 209 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Summary 208 Virtual Circuit Statistics Summary 207 SCT clo
171. cation system or device f Warning Information that alerts you to potential personal injury Table 2 Text Conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen Syntax The word syntax means that you must evaluate the syntax provided and then supply the appropriate values for the placeholders that appear in angle brackets Example To enable RIPIP use the following syntax SETDefault lt port gt RIPIP CONTrol Listen In this example you must supply a port number for lt port gt Commands The word command means that you must enter the command exactly as shown and then press Return or Enter Commands appear in bold Example To remove the IP address enter the following command SETDefault 0 IP NETaddr 0 0 0 0 continued Table 2 Text Conventions continued Convention Description The words enter and type When you see the word enter in this guide you must type something and then press Return or Enter Do not press Return or Enter when an instruction simply says type Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously the key names are linked with a plus sign Example Press Ctrl Alt Del Words in italics Italics are used to a Emphasize a point a Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the text a Identify menu names menu commands and s
172. chip adds the T1 E1 overhead and converts the digital data into a bipolar format suitable for transmission An 8 KHz clock is extracted from the T1 E1 clock on all T1 s E1s and is used for system synchronization The system uses this clock or other clocks to generate a stable 8 KHz clock for all other modules and interfaces OC3 STM 1 Port i gt The OC3 STM 1 port supports either a multi mode fiber interface used mostly for local workgroup switch connection or a single mode fiber interface used for intermediate range operation up to 15 kilometers The PathBuilder S310 switch does not include an OC3 STM 1 port On the O0C3 STM 1 receive side the data flow is as follows a A fiber interface module converts the light to electrical data a The data is fed to a chip where the clock is recovered The PHY chip also provides all the line functions and cell framing a The chip interfaces directly to the CTX which performs address translation and output buffering a The data is placed in the corresponding output buffer On the 0C3 STM 1 transmit side the data flow is as follows a Cells received from the CTX are passed directly to the transmitter Four buffers are supported for the OC3 STM 1 The output of the chip feeds into the fiber interface module An 8 KHz clock is extracted from the OC3 STM 1 clock and the system uses the OC3 STM 1 clock or other line clocks to generate a stable 8 KHz clock to be used
173. ciated with this call Speed The speed of the call in kbps Status The status of the call idle or active Figure 147 Video Call Routing Table Fathielleer 5530 Wisp Fides CHII Eoptiog Teele Ise Bert Fiar F E F E FI EH r nr Ss PEey ry mre ESE Fer periem mey fj Managing the Video Dial Feature 159 PATHBUILDER 9330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS This chapter tells you how to access and manage system alarms for the SuperStack Il PathBuilder S330 and S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder 330 S310 switch how to use available loopbacks and how to view performance statistics for the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch It contains the following sections a Managing System Alarms a Using Loopbacks a Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics a Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics Managing System Alarms Viewing and Clearing Current Alarms 1 The PathBuilder S330 switch detects certain events and reports corresponding alarms and traps to the NMS station s These events are categorized as major alarms minor alarms and information When an alarm occurs an alarm indicator is displayed on the current menu or display as described under Alarm Indicator in Chapter 3 To view a list of current alarms From the main menu select 3 Fault Management to open the Fault Management menu shown in Figure 148 Figure 148 Fault Management M enu EEEE Corraci Edi urina jap Fatbkaild D530 F
174. ck source CBR parameter 124 SCTE clock phase control CBR parameter 125 SCTE clock source CBR parameter 124 SDLC virtual circuit parameters 154 SEFS severely errored framing seconds CBR statistic 202 DS3 statistic 193 OC3 STM 1 section statistic 191 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 serial equipment list parameter 68 serial interface 239 alarms 176 ATM DXIMode 1A 240 CBR 34 265 configuring card 101 protocol modes 240 timing 240 serial number 68 serial port configuring 96 97 connecting 30 effect of changing data format on VCs 151 LEDs 30 pinouts EIA530 DCE cable 228 pinouts EIA530 DTE cable 227 pinouts RS 449 DCE cable 226 pinouts RS 449 DTE cable 225 pinouts V 35 DCE cable 224 pinouts V 35 DTE cable 223 pinouts X 21 DCE cable 230 pinouts X 21 DTE cable 229 principles of operation 239 statistics 195 statistics ATM VC 196 statistics DXI 196 statistics Frame Relay 196 statistics HDLC 195 virtual circuit parameters 151 serial port DXI virtual circuit parameters DFA VCI 153 DFA VCI range 153 DFA VPI 153 serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameters DEto CLP mapping 152 encapsulation mode 151 FECN to EFCI mapping 153 FR SSCS DLCI start end 153 interworking mode 151 start end Frame Relay DLC start end 151 serial port parameters admin status 98 datarate 98 FCS size 98 link type 97 min flag bytes 98 receive timing phase 98 terminal timing source 98 service contrac
175. cting the appropriate options and responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen to configure the selected T1 E1 port Application The application CSU Straight T1 long haul up to 2 000 feet DSX Short haul T1 up to 655 feet YP Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 79 LBO T1 only Line Build Out The setting for the transmit signal level 0 7 5 15 or 22 db The LBO compensates for the distance between the card and the CSU repeater It is a setting for the transmit signal level Framing The type of frame organization configured for the T1 E1 port interface D4 or ESF for T1 For E1 Framing is a read only parameter and is always set to multi frame Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection framing CAUTION A framing mismatch can cause LOF OOF alarm conditions and result in traffic loss Timing T1 only The type of input clock service configured for the T1 module Set the Timing for T1 UNI ports to System System Configures the T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface to use the system clock as defined in the System Clock Configuration menu as its timing source For details about designating the system clock see Configuring the System Clock in Chapter 3 Loop Configures the T1 module to use the input port Rx clock as the timing source timing is received from the service loop This configuration is not recommended for T1 UNI ports Gain Limit T1 on
176. cuit menu Adding VCM Subchannel Circuits i gt 1 To configure a VCM subchannel circuit You must configure at least one VCM VCC circuit before you can configure any VCM subchannel circuits When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit class as shown earlier in Figure 121 select 4 VCM Subchannel A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 134 appears This screen lists the currently configured VCM VCC circuits Figure 134 Selecting a VCM VCC to Use fora VCM Subchannel Circuit EEEE Fath milder 1330 IT mE Oe Firtesl Circeit fiat Fiat E Card ifp rI tard ofp rE eccription bii i ae ee Ts ha B1 F71 bai ia io as Cae ert t Eater itemE 1 3 ESt far perisa mca Enter the number corresponding to the VCM VCC circuit upon which you want to base the subchannel circuit to open the VCM Subchannel Add Virtual Circuit screen shown in Figure 135 Figure 135 Configuring a VCM Subchannel Circuit J Taas FINI Fathbai leer 1530 So Oe Firtesl Circeit Cirit Typer MH See Percriptiss terbcirceit iia States ie sereice fla flatter titard RtH PL EHRER SletfGresp tard Bie FHI y 1 Emei FFL L Hel Iranit E oe HEIR U Friwitp i Prierite 1 Early Patiet birtad dikk Early Fecket Hired dies Eater G20 Chamerl 1 8 i E The VCM Subchannel Add Virtual Circuit screen lists the parameters for the selected VCM VCC circuit and prompts you to configure the subchannel p
177. d receive from another location The PVCs are provisioned by the carrier for use on each PathBuilder 330 S310 switch These PVCs are entered in circuit tables within each PathBuilder 330 S310 switch After the circuits are built the bridge can use this information to send ATM cells to remote sites The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch supports a maximum of 1000 VCs You first configure each PathBuilder S330 S310 switch with the PVC information by using screens which prompt you to input specific information about each Permanent Virtual Circuit See Configuring Virtual Circuits in Chapter 4 for details These PVCs are tied to a specific PathBuilder S 330 S310 port the Ethernet port The PathBuilder 330 S310 Ethernet port can have several PVCs associated with it CBRModule 257 Each PVC represents the logical circuit being used to connect one PathBuilder 330 S310 port to a remote PathBuilder S330 S310 port Once you have entered all PVCs the bridge will learn the network addresses for the local and remote sites and start bridging packets to the correct destination by segmenting the packets into cells which are destined to a remote PathBuilder S330 S310 port See Figure 184 The ATM network will transport the cells according to the VPI VCI headers Figure 185 shows three PathBuilder S330 switches configured to provide LAN connectivity between three different LAN segments Each Ethernet port will run Bridging Learning programs to det
178. data in all links Information only Information only Continue passing data If one or more links comes back re identify the link s and renegotiate parameters with the far end group Correct link connections and or IMA group configuration Use the test procedure from the lowest logical link and ignore the other test procedures Make sure that the IMA frame length is set to the same value for all links Configure the group to be symmetric 3Com PathBuilder switches do not support asymmetric bandwidth for IMA Check configuration Only CTC Common Transfer Clock is supported If the far end transport clocking is set to ITC Independent Transfer Clock change it to CTC Near end and far end IMA protocol versions do no match Check and correct incompatibility Remove loopback condition 174 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Table 11 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Module Alarms continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps IMA Tx Misconnected ATM Forum R 123 Loss of Differential Synchronization LODS ATM Forum R 122 Loss of IMA Frame LIF ATM Forum R 121 Port Missing ICP Cells RFI IMA ATM Forum R 121 Test Pattern Failed Yellow Alarm The near end IMA networking Tx or Rx link state machine detects the link is not connected to the correct FE Tx or Rx links Relative time difference between individual T1s E1s in the IMA group is out
179. ddition to the current T1 E1 card configuration the T1 E1 UNI Card Configuration menu lists the following group related information Operation Group The active IMA groups in the card Num of IMA Group s The number of IMA groups created but not necessarily active on the card 92 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Configuring the OC3 STM 1 Port To configure the OC3 STM 1 port The PathBuilder S310 switch does not support OC3 STM 1 the OC3 STM 1 port is disabled on that device From the Configuration Management menu shown in Figure 59 select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown in Figure 60 From the List Card menu select 4 OC3 UNI to open the SONET UNI Configuration menu shown in Figure 83 This menu displays the current configuration for the OC3 STM 1 port and provides options that allow you to change certain settings Figure 83 Configuring the OC3 STM 1 Port Fathieilaer 530 flares ERP Slethe SET FHI Geer Faber type Mel ti Hee Ei ies a Serie Heber EESC O07 B nia ttatec Get F tareice Bprrstisa States et ef Service Saeet labi Fat Hele e t OTH Fogle jerable Tey Tinig teerce Ope ben Set nia States bet Tart leter ece Hei 1 E 3 iet TH Paglesd icranblit b Set Tinjieg prece S Presisi Haa Flere taber telectiea 1 te 5 3 f 3 Set the following parameters as desired Admin Status Administrative status
180. ddress 108 source protocol 106 107 statistics 199 firmware downloading new 62 downloading via FTP 63 downloading via serial port 64 downloading via TFTP 62 viewing version number 61 flash file system updating 66 flooded frames Ethernet bridge statistic 198 forward delay timer spanning tree parameter 106 forward delay spanning tree statistic 200 Forward IP Packets 201 forward IP packets IP over ATM statistic 200 forwarded frames Ethernet bridge statistic 198 frame length IMA group parameter 84 frame protocol modes 240 Frame Relay DLCI start end serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameter 151 Frame Relay mode 246 Frame Relay virtual circuit parameters 151 framing CBR parameter 121 T1 El parameter 79 voice compression parameter 130 FRF 5 Frame Relay protocol 247 FRF 8 Frame Relay protocol 246 FR SSCS DLCI start end serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameter 153 full system configuration PathBuilder S310 14 PathBuilder S330 13 G gain limit T1 E1 parameter 79 General System Information menu 60 getting started 41 Group menu 81 83 group T1 El parameter 80 group card common virtual circuit parameter 150 groups 85 adding 80 adding IMA 82 adding UNI 80 deleting 85 deletion of group 1 when module installed in slot 9 38 80 modifying 85 partitioning 237 selecting type IMA or UNI 82 84 viewing VC statistics for 208 H hardware requirements 68 HDLC SDLC applications 245 HDLC SD
181. de of receiving and forwarding packets is discovered to be forming a loop it can be put in a blocking state Once the port goes in the blocking state the port card will stop receiving frames on the port Ethernet Interface LOBASE T or 10 100BASE T 251 Spanning Tree Instances The spanning tree logic supports a maximum of 255 physical and virtual ports thereby allowing a maximum of 254 ATM VCs One Ethernet port is required be set aside for other purposes For the purpose of spanning tree operation the Ethernet port and its associated ATM VCs is treated as one bridge entity The spanning tree Algorithm and Protocol STAP module runs a separate instance for each bridge entity VC VC Bridging Operation The Ethernet module supports full mesh bridging between its Ethernet port and all of its associated VCs This bridging must be bidirectional and should be conditional upon the operational status of the Spanning Tree If Soanning Tree operation is disabled VC VC bridging is not necessary since the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is not expected to forward traffic coming from the ATM network For instructions on enabling and disabling the Spanning Tree see Configuring the Spanning Tree in Chapter 4 Addressing The next bridging operation is to determine if a packet is addressed to another unit on the LAN in which case it can be rejected or if it is addressed to a unit across the bridge Each Ethernet packet includes a source
182. e amp f Select 1 Port Configuration to open the T1 DS1 E1 UNI Port Configuration Selection menu Figure 68 shows the T1 DS1 UNI Port Selection menu The E1 UNI Port Configuration menu is the same If you have installed the four port IMA expansion card the T1 E1 Port Selection menu lists eight T1 or E1 ports to select for configuration 78 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 68 T1 DS1 UNI Port Selection M enu Fathbellaer i4 alma Ee TIstEF BS WHI Pert CoePigeretiee Fert 1 Fart 2 Fort F Fart 4 revist Heeg Flem aber a lectia 1 te 5 5 f 4 Select the number corresponding to the T1 Elport you want to configure to open the Port Configuration menu Figure 69 shows a T1 DS1 UNI Port Configuration menu The E1 UNI Port Configuration menu is similar Figure 69 Configuring a T1 E1 Port Patiksildsr 530 lwa PRPS Sete Feti PH WHI CH Cees Spplicetios CH ryp 1 Lib iii Staten Get f Sareice Lime Code BEES Speratios States fet F bereice Fraaieg EGF load Lpi biribiri Tinisg Ipren Gala Likit ares He Spplicetion T Set ie PCat Li Set lel Lp Fremieg F Previews Hees Tinig Geis Linit ore Flere taber celectiea 1 te t f The Port Configuration menu lists the current parameters for the selected T1 E1 port and provides options for changing the settings 5 Change any of the following information by sele
183. e 115 select 1 Channel Configuration You are prompted to enter the channel number of the channel you want to configure You can select any channel 1 24 for T1 or 1 30 for E1 for a total of 8 VCM DSO channels 2 Enter the number of the channel you want to configure After you enter the channel number the VCM Channel Configuration menu Opens Figure 116 shows a representative VCM Channel Configuration menu ofl Tes 152 67 20306 LE Conrac Ect uina Hal Eriti Patikaildsr 0530 alma Fee SlrtE7 WH FH hmar Cf ee Charl u Erie ellr Pa Eecetisg Ha a IHF briag BFF Pics Cefimg bekigs FEH FAL Hein Impp t FEH bE Cee DEH a i Sark Eimer eg fo Bet Pricer Coin fi Set fleece impri fe et Ecke Cee te Sat PIH malay 1 bet F ape t Seely Dettiog Te Chor 2 Poeriees Hrag i i iA Fler eater 2 elerti 1 te DE f Set the following channel configuration parameters Encoding Encoding scheme A law international or M u law United States Voice Coding Voice compression algorithm Clear data 64kbps PCM 40kbps ADPCM 32kbps ADPCM 24kpbs ADPCM 16kbps ADPCM or 8kbps G 729A The Voice Coding setting must match that at the end of the circuit Silence Compression Enable On or disable Off silence compression and comfort noise injection If you enable Silence Suppression the system will automatically insert comfort noise when it detects silence in the voice transmission Echo Canc
184. e LAN or Ethernet port on one PathBuilder S330 switch to another port on another PathBuilder S330 switch Figure 184 ATM Bridging Forward Table ATM MAC Address VP0 200 026080456123 VP0 250 026080123456 PathBuilder Ethernet Bridge VP0 200 Port VP0 250 _ T1 ee Et ok 026080456123 1 AM Network 330 S310 C HL 02608C 123456 PathBuilder S330 S310 A Note that the numbers given for these circuits by the carrier are local to one PathBuilder 330 switch and have no global significance For example VCC number 0 100 is used on two different PathBuilder S330 switches to mean two different circuits The carrier will assign each PathBuilder S330 switch at each location any number of circuits to connect the Ethernet port of each PathBuilder 330 switch to the Ethernet port of any other PathBuilder S330 switch The connections in the carrier network are shown for illustration only The figure shows an example for an ATM switch configuration Note that the VCC numbers get translated by the ATM switch since they have local meaning only for every switch port For example at the 1 location the carrier would provide the PathBuilder S330 switch with four VCCs for the forward and reverse path to connect to LAN2 and LAN3 respectively VCCs are unidirectional and therefore two VCCs are designated on a port of a PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to transmit to an
185. e MAC address of the destination to which you do not want packets to be sent across the bridge After you make your entry you are returned to the Source Address Filter menu 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as desired to add more addresses to the list To view the current list select 1 List Destination Filter Address from the Destination Filter Address menu m To change an address in the list delete the incorrect address and add the correct address a To delete an address from the list select 3 Delete Destination Filter Address from the Destination Filter Address menu and enter the number corresponding to the address you want to delete Then enter 2 at the confirmation prompt to delete the selected address 108 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS 5 Select 4 Previous Menu to return to the Bridge menu 6 Select 1 Setup to open the Bridge Setup menu shown earlier in Figure 96 This menu allows you to enable or disable the filters you have configured 7 Select 3 Set Destination Address Filter The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Destination Address Filter 1 Disable 2 Enable 8 Enter 2 to enable the destination address filter Viewing the List Forwarding Table The List Forwarding Table is a current forwarding table for the bridge To open this table select 6 Forwarding Table from the Bridge menu Figure 99 shows a representative List Forw
186. e Relay Statistics for that virtual circuit The Frame Relay Statistics screen lists the following statistics per DLCI Received Frames The total number of received frames with good FCS at this port Transmitted Frames The total number of successfully transmitted frames at this port Discarded Invalid Frames The total number of frames discarded at this port because they were invalid Invalid frames are frames that are received with good FCS but that cannot be processed due to wrong content Discarded Congested Frames The total number of frames discarded at this port because they were congested Congested frames are frames that were not transmitted due to link congestion Received bytes The total number of bytes received at this port Received DE The number of DE Discard Eligibility frames received at this port Received FECN The number of FECN Forward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received at this port Received BECN The number of BECN Backward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received at this port SIM DXI Statistics The DXI Statistics screen lists the following statistics Received Frames The total number of received frames with good FCS at this port Transmitted Frames The total number of successfully transmitted frames at this port Discarded Invalid Frames The total number of frames discarded at this port because they were invalid Invalid frames are fra
187. e a frame relay router Each service is designed to support a different type of user application however all the services share the same ATM backbone characteristics The serial port modules are mapped over ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs When connecting the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to an ATM network verify that the PVC mapping for in and out ports is defined for proper operation See Figure 169 Serial Interface 241 Figure 169 PathBuilder S330 S310 to ATM PVC PathBuilder PathBuilder Frame S8330 8310 S8330 8310 gt gt gt 4 VPOVC50 gt Ya In It is also important to select the proper traffic contract from the ATM switch service provider This card should use a VBR or CBR circuit set at the speed of the connected port See Figure 170 Figure 170 PathBuilder S330 S310 Traffic Contract PathBuilder S330 S310 Frame In CBR or VBR at Mops T Mbps 1 Mbps Sustained Cell Rate VBR service will work however the synchronous path will be subjected to possible discards and delay The following subsections describe the supported frame protocol modes in greater detail ATM DXI Mode ATM DXI mode is used to interconnect a DTE to a DCE The DTE is typically a legacy interworking device with limited ATM capability Through ATM DXI the DCE allows the DTE to participate in an ATM network Figure 171 illustrates a PathBuilder S330 S310 switch in the ATM DXI network Figure 171 DXI
188. e difference between the number of cells transmitted and the number of cells received Total Number of Buffer Underflows The number of buffer underflows over the virtual circuit Total Number of Buffer Overflows The number of buffer overflows over the virtual circuit Total out of Sequence Errors The number of cells received with out of sequence number mismatch i gt Viewing Voice Compression Module Statistics Total CRC Errors The number of cells received with uncorrectable sequence number CRC error Total OAM Cells Received The number of OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance cells received over the virtual circuit these cells carry OAM information used for network management Total OAM Cells Transmitted The number of Operations Administration and Maintenance OAM cells transmitted over the virtual circuit Current Cell Status The cell loss status no loss 1 or loss 2 The Current Cell Status is set to loss when cells are lost for the number of milliseconds specified by the Cell Loss Integration Period defined for the CBR virtual circuit You define the CLIP when you create the VC Data Bytes To structured data ports only The data bytes to the cell bus Use this value to set the DBA Bits Mask CBR port parameter In most cases the default DBA Bits Mask 127 is appropriate If you are experiencing problems with a CCS circuit however you can set the DBA Bits Mask to monitor dif
189. e for DTE a DTE DCE EIA530 The connector type at the end of the EIA530 cable is DB 25 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE a DTE DCE X 21 The connector type at the end of the X 21 cable is DB 15 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE For connector pinout tables see Serial Port Connector Pinouts in Appendix A Serial Port LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the serial port See Figure 25 a RD active green Flashes with receiving signals a TD active green Flashes with transmitting signals Figure 25 PathBuilder S330 S310 Serial Port LEDs a o o OG W c oa 2000 2000 TD RD Installation Procedures 31 Connecting to the Ethernet 10BASE T Port To connect to the standard Ethernet 10BASE T port run a cable from the port to the LAN The Link LED illuminates if you make the connection properly The cable run from the PathBuilder 330 S310 Ethernet port to the Ethernet LAN connection must be no longer than 100 meters in compliance with EIA TIA standards for 10BASE T This cable length should include service loops at the ends and the complete cable route distances For connector pinouts see Ethernet Interface LOBASE T and 10 100BASE T Connector Pinouts in Appendix A Ethernet Port LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs
190. eer Best ERY Beri iF Medes i ies Fosters a EELE AN m 1 00 00 1 et oF tereit Setration States Get f Darvice i tet iia States E Previews Hey Fleest cater a pelecties 1 te Z 2 f 2 Select 1 Set Admin Status and put the VCM card In Service or Out of Service Configuring Virtual Circuits 129 Configuring Virtual Circuits Supported Classes of Virtual Circuits After you have configured the modules and ports on the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch you can start setting up virtual circuits A virtual circuit is a bi directional path between data ports of connecting ATM units You should have a circuit plan developed in advance The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch supports both VPCs virtual path connections and VCCs virtual channel connections A virtual path is an aggregate collection of virtual channels for the purpose of assigning the channels to a single physical layer A virtual channel is a connection between data ports a You define a VPC at the connecting units by assigning it a Virtual Path Identifier VPI for each direction of transmission a You define a VCC at the connecting units by assigning it a Virtual Path Identifier VPI and a Virtual Channel Identifier VCI for each direction of transmission You can connect one or more virtual circuits to a data port by assigning each a different VPI and VCI The VPI and VCI numbers are normally assigned as a pair VPI VCI When you add a virtual c
191. elay gt Relay gt 5330 5310 Network 0 saso s3i0 Relay DTE DTE Network Application Application FR SSCS FR SSCS Q 922 Q 922 AAL 5 AAL 5 Q 922 Q 922 DL Core DL Core SAR SAR DL Core DL Core ATM ATM PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY 248 APPENDIX B PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW In the interworking scheme shown in Figure 178 a Frame Relay DTE communicates with the other Frame Relay DTEs through an ATM network Note that FR SSCS is used in this configuration This interworking scheme works as follows a The Frame Relay DTE at either end works exactly the same way as the Frame Relay DTE in the Service Interworking configuration it passes its data through Q 922 core service assuming that there is an end to end pipe to carry its data from its end to the other DTE at the far end a On the other end the application resides in a Frame DTE instead of an ATM DTE a The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch performs all the required translation and management functions between these two networks implementing the stacks as indicated in Figure 178 and performing the following key functions Translating from Q 922 Frame to FR SSCS ATM AAL5 PDU and from FR SSCS ATM AAL5 PDU to Q 922 Frame a Supporting 2 octet not 3 octet or 4 octet FR header 10 bit DLC a Allowing you to configure DLCI to VPI VCI mapping a Providing one to one mapping maps one FR SSCS DLC default FR SSCS DLCI
192. ellation Enable On or disable Off echo cancellation If you enable Echo Cancellation the DSP will perform up to 16ms echo cancellation For further information about delay and when to use echo cancellation see Delay and Echo Cancellation later in this section DTMF Relay Enable On or disable Off DTM F Relay If you enable DTMF Relay the Voice Compression module sends DTMF using a different packet If you disable DTMF Relay the Voice Compression module simply compresses the voice signal Fax Modem Support Use this parameter to specify the voice compression setting to which you want the signal to go when a fax or modem signal is detected 64kbps PCM or 40 kbps ADPCM Fax and modem detection is always enabled When a fax or modem signal is detected the voice signal is decompressed As soon as the fax or modem signal is gone the signal reverts to the Voice Coding setting you specified The Fax M odem Support setting must match that at the end of the circuit Select 7 Apply Setting to Channel s to apply your settings to one or more channels The following prompt appears Enter Channel s 1 8 Enter the number s of the channel s to which you want to apply the settings You can enter a single channel a range of channels for example 4 6 or a list of channels separated by commas for example 4 5 6 Configuring the VCM T1 E1 Port 1 Delay and Echo Cancellation SAR delay is caused by the amount o
193. emplates you follow the same basic procedure that you do to add PVC virtual circuits see Adding Virtual Circuits for details The RS 366 video templates are identified as such when you select RS366 Template rather than PVC as the VC Type see step 4 under Adding Virtual Circuits Before you can make a video call you must set up an RS 366 virtual circuit template a You can define as many templates as you want to connect to different destinations a When the phone number associated with a given template is dialed the PathBuilder S330 S310 software locates the template and uses it to create a temporary virtual circuit to which it assigns the default description lt 366 call gt A video connection is established either via the M anual Connect A Site menu as described in M anaging Video Dial up Sessions later in this chapter or when someone dials the phone number associated with the video circuit on a video keypad Data for the video conference is transmitted and received over the newly created lt 366 call gt circuit a When the call is disconnected the system deletes the lt 366 call gt circuit but preserves the template upon which the circuit was based for future use For further details about video conferencing and information on setting up call routing tables for point to point video conferencing between remote PathBuilder 330 S310 switches and multi point video conferencing both between remote Pa
194. enings on the top and bottom of the unit during installation A minimum of 1 rack unit 1 75 space is required Installation Procedures 25 Figure 19 Rack Mounting Ear Configuration 19 A Caution a One rack unit space required above and below the unit for clearance PathBuilder S330 S310 2 Rows 3 5 oe mounting brackets required we 3 Support the shelf in its mounting place and attach the mounting hardware Step 3 Connect ACor You connect the AC DC power at the rear of the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch DC Powerand Table 3 outlines the specifications for the AC DC Source optionally the RPS ae Table 3 AC DC Source Specifications System Input Power 90 264 VAC 50 60Hz standard grounded Requirements outlet 42 to 60 VDC Optional AC 14 AWG wire Belden type 19364 DC minimum 14 AWG wire listed type TC tray cable with three conductors Power Consumption 60 Watts typical 90 Watts maximum Maximum Current 1 5 A 110VAC 0 75A 220VAC 3A 48VDC 26 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION To connect AC or DC power WARNING Before handling AC DC power leads disconnect all power supply cords and always have a partner close by who is familiar with first aid for electrical shock q CAUTION CENTRALIZED 48VDC UNITS To be installed only in Restricted Access Areas dedicated equipment rooms equipment closets etc in accordance with Articles
195. ent 15 minute interval Interval The statistics collected over the previous 24 hours of operations broken into 96 completed 15 minute intervals Total The cumulative sum of the various statistics for the 24 hour period preceding the current 15 minute interval a ATM screens list statistics that monitor the ATM payload These screens also display the date and time of the last reset and allow you to clear the currently displayed statistics a Port Activity screen Voice Compression module lists statistics that monitor VCM port activity a Virtual Circuit Statistics 186 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Viewing Card Statistics To view card statistics 1 From the main menu select 4 Performance Management to open the Performance Management menu shown in Figure 160 Figure 160 Performance Management Menu Fathieilaer irti flares PRP Performance Hamegenent meee 1 Few Cord ttetistics 2 ee Firteal Circeit Statistics 3 Ib Firtesi Circeit Statistics bp Fertrirssp h Presisat Hie Flaca taber itlrctisa 1 te amp 4 2 Select 1 Card Statistics to open the Card Statistics menu shown in Figure 161 Figure 161 Card Statistics Menu Pathiellaer IHi Card ttatistics Heeg Ta CRE E1 CF TF5 b BOH 6120 EHRSHCER F HOE 10 Preeies Hee Pitre eater a selecties 1 te 10 10 E 3 Enter the number corresponding to the card for which you want to view statistics The f
196. er LIV Polling Timer at a higher value than the Network PV Timer parameter on the network side unit User FS Polling Counter N391 The time interval in seconds at which Status Enquiry occurs for full status FS polling 1 255 Configuring the Serial Card Configuring the Serial Interface 99 User or Network Error Threshold N392 User or Network ME Count N393 These parameters are related The User or Network ME Monitored Event Count is the threshold period that you set to determine a service affecting condition The unit monitors events receipt of Status Enquiry messages or expiration of polling timers on the user or network side for the number of seconds 3 10 that you specify Within this specified User or Network ME Count period if an error occurs on the user or network side within the number of seconds that you specify as the User or Network Error Threshold 3 10 the system declares an error You must set the User or Network Error Threshold to a lower value than that of the User or Network ME Count Network PV Timer T392 Network Polling Verification Timer When the unit is configured as the network side unit the user side unit sends the Status Enquiry request The Network Polling Verification acts on the user initiated request and checks whether or not it has any new information to report based on the specified timer End to end LMI Use this option to specify whether or not you
197. erforming properly with regard to such date data onand after January 1 2000 provided that all other products used by Customer in connection or combination with the 3Com product including hardware software and firmware accurately exchange date data with the 3Com product with the exception of those products identified at 3Com s Web site http Awww 3com com products yr2000 html as not meeting this standard If it appears that any product that is stated to meet this standard does not perform properly with regard to such date data on and after January 1 2000 and Customer notifies 3Com before the later of April 1 2000 or ninety 90 days after purchase of the product from 3Com or its authorized reseller 3Com shall at its option and expense provide a software update which would effect the proper performance of such product repair such product deliver to Customer an equivalent product to replace such product or if none of the foregoing is feasible refund to Customer the purchase price paid for such product Any software update or replaced or repaired product will carry a Year 2000 Warranty for ninety 90 days after purchase or until April 1 2000 whichever is later OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE Customer must contact a 3Com Corporate Service Center or an Authorized 3Com Service Center within the applicable warranty period to obtain warranty service authorization Dated proof of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller may be required
198. ermine if received LAN packets should be passed to the WAN ona specific PVC In the above example multi port bridging software will determine if packets will be passed or dropped When a packet comes in from LAN 1 port and the bridge code does not have the destination MAC address associated with one of its logical ports Ethernet PVC 1 PVC 2 it will broadcast the packet on all PVCs associated with this port Once packets are received from the WAN on specific PVC logical ports their source addresses will be learned and associated with the logical port Once you and your carrier have set up PVCs to all remote PathBuilder 330 S310 Ethernet ports the bridging code will do the rest Figure 185 LAN Connectivity PathBuilder S5330 5310 N j DS3 UNI 2 Bridge Forward Known Table a ATM Port P2 DS3 UNI 1 Switched Port P3 Broadcast Port P4 Network PathBuilder Unknown ps 330 S310 1 Circuits Set Up by the Carrier PVC ENDI VPI VCI1 End2 VPI VCI2 DS3 UNI 3 1 P1 0 200 P2 0 100 2 PI 0 250 P3 0 100 3 P2 0 250 P3 0 200 S330 S310 3 CBR Module The optional T1 DSX E1 CBR module provides three T1 DSX or E1 ports one on the PathBuilder S310 switch and one serial port This module services traffic generated by your existing PBXs channels T1 E1 multiplexers CSU DSUs and video conferencing devices This service maps the T1 DSX E1 service through the AAL1 adaptation layer over a CB
199. es elastic storage between the Ethernet and the CTX Reassembly When the CTX receives a cell from the T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface it broadcasts it to the Ethernet port As cells are received by the reassembler their headers are read to determine if they belong to the port If so the header is stripped and the cell is stored in memory appended to the previous ones for that virtual circuit The system also looks for the AALS trailer that signifies the end of a packet When it finds a trailer it performs the CRC calculation checks the length of the cells since the previous trailer to be sure no cells were missed strips the trailer appends the cell to the others to reform the original packet and sends the packet through the Ethernet interface to the LAN A typical Ethernet and voice application configuration involves multiple PathBuilder S330 switches connected through an ATM network that could consist of simply an ATM switch or of an ATM network consisting of multiple switches Figure 183 shows the latter configuration Circuits Set Up on The PathBuilder 330 S310 1 VPIVCI 0 150 PVC 1 2 3 Circuits Set Up By The Carrier Cross Connects END2 PVC 1 2 3 4 5 END1 LAN1 LAN1 CSU1 END1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P1 Unstructured Input Ethernet Interface 10BASE T or 10 100BASE T 255 Structured Input Figure 183 PathBuilder S330 S310 Application
200. ete the circuit When you delete a virtual circuit involving the CBR module in structured voice mode the DSO channels associated with that circuit are trunk conditioned and can no longer be used See DSO Trunk Conditioning earlier in this chapter for further details about trunk conditioning Managing the Video Dial Feature i gt This section tells you how to manage video dial up sessions and view the call routing table Before you can establish video dial up sessions you must configure video virtual circuits For details see Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates earlier in this chapter You manage the video dial feature from the Manage Video Dial menu shown in Figure 144 To open the Manage Video Dial menu From the Configuration Management menu select 5 Manage Video Dial Figure 144 Manage Video Dial Menu FPathkailder 1F 0 Harp Fides ial Heo n Pople Fides Cell Bootie Table Hab alli Commerct Rial Site Heeeelly Fisceeeect amp fite Rees Hee dr ba hh Flaca weber a aelection 1 te amp 4 E Managing Video Dial up To set up activate and end a video dial up session follow these basic steps Sessions 1 Create virtual circuits between the appropriate PathBuilder S330 S310 switches This effectively builds a call routing table For detailed instructions see Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates earlier in this chapter 2 Start the sessi
201. eter applies only when the attached cable is DCE type cable Depending on the speed of the device application and the clock phases particularly those of the return clock you may have to set Receive Timing Phase to Inverted invert the clock to ensure correct clock and data phase This option is used most often to correct for cable length delays when Terminal Timing is set to Internal Normal The receive timing from the remote endpoint node is normal clocking Inverted The receive timing from the remote endpoint node is inverted clocking Data Rate The data rate supported by the port 48K 97K 195K 390K 781K 1 5M 3 1M or 6 2M This parameter applies only when the attached cable is DCE type cable It is a very important parameter as it allows you to direct the SIM to shape particular data applications so as not to exceed the guaranteed bandwidth established by your service provider in your service contract The Data Rate setting also allows you to optimize the entire WAN ATM application by traffic engineering your ATM access applications so as to maintain traffic flow across the network Min Flag Bytes The minimum number of flag bytes required to distinguish a frame 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 or 14 FCS Size The number of bytes to use for FCS Frame Check Sequence calculation for each frame FCS is the CRC remainder sent at the end of a frame This parameter is valid only for HDLC SDLC data Admin Status Ad
202. etworks WARNING This customer equipment is to be installed and maintained by service personnel as defined by AS NZS 3260 clause 1 2 14 3 service Personnel Incorrect connection of connected equipment to the General Purpose Outlet could result in a hazardous situation WARNING Safety requirements are not fulfilled unless the equipment is connected to a wall socket outlet with protective earth contact ABOUT THIS GUIDE This guide describes how to install configure and manage the SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder S330 S310 switch This guide is intended for network administrators system engineers field engineers and other personnel responsible for installing configuring and managing PathBuilder products If release notes are shipped with your product and the information there differs from the information in this guide follow the instructions in the release notes M ost user guides and release notes are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Document Format PDF or HTML on the 3Com World Wide Web site http www 3com com Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide Table 1 Notice Icons Icon Notice Type Description D gt Information note Information that describes important features or instructions Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or potential A damage to an appli
203. f Multiframe m Second Transported Octet of Multiframe w First 125 usec Frame of Multiframe for DS1 Y Second 125 usec Frame of Multiframe for DS1 ABCD for First gt Last 125 usec Frame of Multiframe for Transported DS1 Timeslot ABCD for Signaling Substructure Third Transported Timeslot ABCD for Second Transported Timeslot Figure 191 illustrates AAL1 structured DS1 Figure 191 AAL1 Structured DS1 FEC for SN CSI Lost Cell Detection Clock Recovery k CSI SN SNP SAR SDU AAL Layer SAR 1 Bit 3 Bits 4 Bits 47 Bytes AAL 1 ATM Header AAL 1 Data ATM Layer VCC 5 Bytes 48 Bytes CSI Convergence Sublayer Indicator FEC Forward Error Correction SNP Sequence Number Protection SN Sequence Number SAR SDU Segmentation and Reassembly Service Data Unit VCC Virtual Channel Connection 262 APPENDIX B PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW Structured data DSOs allow for clear channel signaling CCS As opposed to CAS in which signaling is done on all channels in clear channel signaling CCS one channel is used to signal for the other channels The PathBuilder S 330 S310 software can also monitor a full 8 bit pattern on a DSO to determine circuit activity This is the basis for the two supported types of dynamic bandwidth allocation DBA a Structured voice DBA a Structured data DBA Structured Voice DBA When a CBR port is configured as s
204. f time it takes to fill an ATM cell 48 bytes It takes two T1 frames to fill a cell for T1 Since each T1 frame is 192 bits or 24 bytes and each T1 frame is 125 usec long the minimum delay associated with filling and transporting a cell is approximately 250 usec This is the delay for a full T1 payload using unstructured or structured CES When you design ATM WAN access you must also consider the additional delay added by distance The rule of thumb is that every 100 miles adds approximately 1msec of delay to the SAR delay Delay decreases voice quality Typically up to 30 msec of delay is tolerable In situations where delay is greater than 30msec however you will probably need to use echo cancellation Whether or not you use echo cancellation depends on the routes of your network length of the circuit and the channel SAR time with 30 msec being the maximum delay you want to incur However since not all routes are straight when installing a network you should either use a test device that measures the delay on a span or have your service provider verify the delay or mileage on the route To configure the VCM T1 E port From the VCM Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 115 select 2 Port Configuration to open the VCM Port Configuration menu Figure 117 shows the VCM T1 DSX Port Configuration menu The VCM E1 Port Configuration menu is similar Figure 117 VCM Port Configuration M enu FPatikaildsr 30 alwa MEN Tilst
205. ferent bits Check the Data Bytes To value and set the DBA Bits M ask to that value When you check the data bytes you must first make sure that the circuit is in an idle state phone onhook If you cannot access the equipment to see whether or not the circuit is in idle then check the data bytes for at least 30 seconds about seven updates If the Data Bytes To value remains the same for 30 seconds or more it is safe to assume that the circuit is in an idle state You can view performance monitoring virtual circuit and port activity statistics for the Voice Compression module To view VCM statistics From the Card Statistics menu shown earlier in Figure 161 enter the number corresponding to the slot in which the VCM for which you want to view statistics is installed 7 or 8 to open the VCM Card Statistics menu shown in Figure 164 Figure 164 VCM Card Statistics Menu B Velaet EEF Pile E Cenract El Toren an Fathiei leer 30 alma Fae Tistet PCH RL EHMCER Card Shetistics Hesa erfm Heed teri Hirteal Circeit Statistics Fert amp chivity Statistics Rees Ha dr ba hh Flaca aber a aelection 1 te amp 4 E gt 2 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view 1 Performance Monitoring 2 Virtual Circuit Statistics or 3 Port Activity Statistics If you select 2 VC Statistics an additional screen appears from which you must select the virtual circuit for which y
206. for system synchronization DS3 E3 UNI Modules The optional DS3 module is compatible with AT amp T Publication 54014 specifications uses the unchannelized format and is compliant to M 23 or the C bit parity ANSI 107a 1991 specifications It performs the following key functions Provides line interface functions and terminates the FEAC and MDL for the C bit format a Performs ATM to physical layer mapping and adds PLCP according to UNI 3 0 a Performs peak traffic shaping on the transmit 14 bulk shapers The optional E3 UNI module is typically used for terminating accessing public or private WAN services However depending on your local applications you can also use this module in the port slot for taking local traffic across the WAN The E3 UNI module performs the following key functions m Performs ATM to physical layer mapping and adds PLCP according to UNI 3 0 a Performs peak traffic shaping on the transmit 14 bulk shapers Serial Interface Serial Interface Frame Protocol Modes The serial interface is designed to interconnect frame based devices networks and cell based ATM devices networks The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch provides a single serial interface that can be configured as DTE or DCE and with different cable adapters can support V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 interface to routers The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch can perform cell to frame as well as frame to cell conversion On the serial interface receive side
207. from frames into ATM CPCS PDUs or from ATM CPCS PDUs into frames by doing the following Mapping the DFA in the DXI frame to the VPI VCI in the ATM cell header Mapping the CLP in the DXI frame to the CLP in the ATM cell header Mapping the CN in the DXI Frame to the PTI in the ATM cell header Mapping the DFA in the DXI Frame to the VPI VCI in the ATM cell header In the DXI frame header the DFA occupies 6 bits bit 3 to bit 8 in the first octet and 4 bits bit 6 to bit 8 in the second octet The ATM DXI Specification defines a method for mapping between DFA and VPI VCI You can configure the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch by assigning the mapping values in certain way See Configuring Virtual Circuits in Chapter 4 for details Mapping the CLP in the DXI frame to the CLP in the ATM cell header When data is moved from DXI to ATM the CLP bit in the DXI header is copied into the CLP field in the ATM cell header without change When data is moved in the reverse direction the CLP bit in the DXI header is always set 0 no matter what value it isin the ATM cell header Mapping the CN in the DXI Frame to the PTI in the ATM cell header When data is moved from DXI to ATM the CN bit is always set to 0 by the DTE When data is moved in the reverse direction the CN bit is set to 1 if PTI is 01x in the last ATM cell of the AAL5 CPCS PDU otherwise it is set to 0 Serial Interface 245 HDLC SDLC Mode Transparent HDLC mode is used for
208. further details about congestion thresholds CAUTION You should enable early packet discard for AAL5 traffic only Select 4 Previous Menu to return to the CTX Buffers menu Press Esc to return to the CTX menu Select 3 Apply CTX Buffer Changes to apply your settings CAUTION This operation will affect traffic momentarily Setting Congestion Thresholds For every connection where early packet discard is enabled a status is kept when there is a partial packet for that connection in the queue Once the queue cell level exceeds the Congestion On thresholds only connections with partial packets already existing in the queue are allowed in Cells from other connections are dropped Once the congestion has subsided to the Congestion Off level then all remaining connections are allowed Set the Congestion On threshold based on the maximum packet size expected and the number of active connections sending packets at a particular instant based on a probability model Set the Congestion On level to allow some hysteresis in the operation Configuring Ports i gt The PathBuilder S330 S310 ports each have an administrative and an operational status To set up a virtual circuit you must first set the administrative status of the port which will carry the circuit online to In Service You can also configure other parameters depending on the type of port When you set the administrative status to Out of Service the operational statu
209. hanged in an IMA link Each IMA group assigns a unique Transmit offset to each link in the group This alarm means that a link was operating correctly but then received a Transmit offset already assigned to a previous link A Tx Misconnected alarm is also generated Status and Change Control Indication the content of the ICP cells has changed The far end ICP cell SCCI in this link does not agree with the SCCI of the other links in the group The far end group symmetry has changed in an IMA link An IMA group has received an IMA ID that has been received by a previous group The second group must have a unique IMA ID Duplicated far end logical link ID in this IMA group for this IMA link Each IMA group assigns a unique Transmit link ID to each link in the group This link ID should match the Receive link ID of the remote end IMA device This alarm means that a link received a Transmit link ID already assigned to a previous link Check to make sure the maximum frame size is set to the same value on the local and remote ends Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary Remove the link and stop Tx and Rx data Check for loops and check the IMA group configuration Check the links for proper connection Reconnect if necessary 172 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Table 11 T1 E1 UN
210. hat checks for errors in data It is a communication check for parity framing and is used for performance monitoring in El networks CRC4 can be enabled only in structured and multi frame mode Admin Status Administrative status Out of Service or In Service Select 10 Previous Menu to return to the CBR T1 DSX or CBR E1 Configuration Selection menu Repeat steps 3and 4 for the other CBR T1 DSX or CBR E1 ports you want to configure DSO Trunk Conditioning When the PathBuilder S330 switch is powered up all DSO channels on the T1 are trunk conditioned six DSOs at a time This trunk conditioning readies the PBX for voice communication It is performed using TC1 signaling bits first and then TC2 signaling bits The trunk conditioning stays in the each state TC2 then TC3 for one second The DSOs that are not assigned to a PBC stay trunk conditioned forcing the PBX not to use them If there is an alarm state or any error condition that will impact traffic the affected DSO channels are trunk conditioned using TC1 signaling bits first and then TC 2 signaling bits The trunk conditioning stays in the each state TC1 then TC2 for one second This trunk conditioning prevents calls from being placed over a bad line To configure the CBR serial port 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card 2 From the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 select 7 CBR The CBR T1 DSX or CBR E1 Configuration Selection me
211. he virtual circuit RX ARP Reply The total number of ARP response packets received on the virtual circuit Ethernet ATM VC STatistics The Ethernet ATM Statistics screen displays the following ATM VC statistics for the Ethernet port VC The system assigned virtual circuit number Side A card s p The slot and port number for side A of the circuit Side A rx The receive VCI VPI for side A Side A tx The transmit VCI VPI for side A Side B card s p The slot and port number for side B of the circuit Side B rx The receive VCI VPI for side B Side B tx The transmit VCI VPI for side A Desc The user entered description of the circuit You can view both performance monitoring and ATM statistics for the CBR module To view CBR statistics 1 From the Card Statistics menu shown earlier in Figure 161 select 7 CBR 2 Select the port for which you want to view statistics 3 Enter the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view 1 Performance Monitoring or 2 ATM Statistics 202 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS CBR Performance Monitoring Statistics The CBR Performance M onitoring screens display the following statistics for the CBR T1 DSX E1 ports ES The number of errored seconds ESs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface SES The number of severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the CBR T1 DSX E1 interface SEFS
212. he telephone company This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details If this device causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required The telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment or for repair or warranty information please follow the applicable procedures explained in the Technical Support section of this manual Appendix A Canadian CS 03 Approval Information The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to your satisfaction Before installing this equipment you should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company You must also install the equipment
213. histicated traffic management system allows management of a mix of applications simultaneously with features such as deep buffers traffic shaping QoS Quality of Service and early packet discard to give you the most effective wide area ATM bandwidth use and ensure applications integrity Embedded management includes a full IP stack Telnet TFTP and SNMP and flash memory for sophisticated yet simple network management Comprehensive feature support including resiliency of nxT1 E1 IMA S330 only and redundant power for protection against power failure ensures maximum application and network uptime 3Com SuperStack IlI compliance provides common look and feel hardware and integrated network management solutions 3Com SuperStack Il Redundant Power Supply RPS eere e e e Secor gt INSTALLATION This chapter tells you how to mechanically and electrically install SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder 330 S310 switch in your network and describes the PathBuilder 330 S310 ports and modules It contains the following sections a Receiving and Inspecting the PathBuilder S330 S310 Switch a Installation Overview a Installation Procedures Before using this chapter for an actual installation read through it at least once to familiarize yourself with the overall process Receiving and Inspecting the PathBuilder S330 S310 Switch When you receive the
214. hown in Figure 177 works as follows a The application on the frame DTE passes its data through Q 922 core service with the assumption that there is an end to end pipe to carry its data from its end to the other DTE at the far end The Q 922 core only sees a point to point link to the next connection point it has no knowledge about the type of network behind the current link a On the other end the application residing in ATM DTE passes its data through a NULL SSCS that sits on top of AAL5 What this ATM DTE sees is the ATM network to which it is connected a The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch sitting in the middle performs all the required translation and management functions between these two networks implementing the stacks as indicated in Figure 177 and performing the following key functions a Translating from Q 922 Frame to ATM AAL5 PDU and from ATM AAL5 PDU to Q 922 a Performing Frame PVC management a Managing traffic a Handling congestion Network Interw orking Function Figure 178 shows a PathBuilder S330 S310 switch providing Network Interworking function between Frame Relay and ATM services Figure 178 Frame Relay ATM Network Interworking Connection FRF 5 Frame Frame Frame Relay Relay lt a Relay DTE Network DTE Frame Frame Frame PathBuilder ATM PathBuilder R
215. ia 1 800 678 515 P R of China 10800 61 00137 or Hong Kong 800 933 486 021 6350 1590 India 61 2 9937 5085 Singapore 800 6161 463 Indonesia 001 800 61 009 S Korea Japan 0031 61 6439 From anywhere in S Korea 00798 611 2230 Malaysia 1800 801 777 From Seoul 0 2 3455 6455 New Zealand 0800 446 398 Taiwan R O C 0080 611 261 Pakistan 61 2 9937 5085 Thailand 001 800 611 2000 Philippines 1235 61 266 2602 Europe From anywhere in Europe call 31 0 30 6029900 phone 31 0 30 6029999 fax Europe South Africa and Middle East From the following countries you may use the toll free numbers Austria 0800 297468 Netherlands 0800 0227788 Belgium 0800 71429 Norway 800 11376 Denmark 800 17309 Poland 00800 3111206 Finland 0800 113153 Portugal 0800 831416 France 0800 917959 South Africa 0800 995014 Germany 0800 1821502 Spain 900 983125 Hungary 00800 12813 Sweden 020 795482 Ireland 1800 553117 Switzerland 0800 55 3072 Israel 1800 9453794 U K 0800 966197 Italy 1678 79489 Latin America Argentina AT amp T 800 666 5065 M exico 01 800 CARE 01 800 2273 Brazil 0800 13 3266 Peru AT amp T 800 666 5065 Chile 1230 020 0645 Puerto Rico 800 666 5065 Colombia 98012 2127 Venezuela AT amp T 800 666 5065 North America 1 800 NET 3Com 1 800 638 3266 Enterprise Customers 1 800 876 3266 280 APPENDIX D TECHNICAL SUPPORT Returning Products for Repair Before you send a product directly to 3Com for repair you must first obtain a
216. icates that packets with that protocol will be transmitted across the bridge Change the filter settings as desired by entering the number corresponding to the filter you want to set and responding to the prompt that appears at the bottom of the screen The list at the top of the menu is updated to reflect your change For example if you want to configure an IP filter select 1 Set Filter IP The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Filter IP 1 No 2 Yes Enter 2 to configure an IP filter the bridge will reject packets with IP Internet Protocol Select 3 Previous Menu to return to the Bridge menu Select 1 Setup to open the Bridge Setup menu shown in Figure 96 This menu allows you to enable or disable the filters you have configured Figure 96 Bridge Setup Menu Select 1 Set Source Protocol Filter The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Source Protocol Filter 1 Disable 2 Enable Enter 2 to enable the source protocol filter Configuring Source Address Filtering Source address filtering allows the bridge to prevent packets containing a specific source address from traversing the bridge You can use source address filtering to prevent some stations from transmitting on the ATM WAN link This type of filtering is useful for preventing specific stations in a common protocol group on the Ethernet LAN from transmitting bursty and useless network data across the
217. ics Received Frames The total number of frames received over the virtual circuit Transmitted Frames The total number of frames transmitted over the virtual circuit AALS Errors The total number of invalid frames received with good FCS but could not be processed due to wrong content received over the virtual circuit Discarded Congested Frames The total number of frames received over the virtual circuit that were discarded due to congestion not transmitted due to link congestion Voice Compression Module Port Activity Statistics The VCM Port Activity Statistics screen displays the following statistics for each channel Ch DSO channel number Tx packets The number of transmitted packets Rx packets The number of received packets Tx bytes The number of transmitted bytes Rx bytes The number of received bytes View ing Virtual Circuit Statistics Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Circuit gt 1 The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch provides you with circuit parameters and cell counts broken down in various ways a by circuit a by port group a by shaper a by buffer queue These statistics enable you to look at the cell loss at various points in the data flow and adjust parameters such as shaper values accordingly To display virtual circuit statistics by circuit From the Configuration Management menu select 2 Manage Circuits to open the Virtual Circuit menu From the
218. iewing IMA Group To view IMA status for a selected group Status 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card 2 From the List Card menu select the number corresponding to the slot in which the T1 UNI or E1 UNI card is installed to open the Group Menu 3 Select 4 IMA Group Status to open the Group Status Selection menu shown in Figure 80 Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 89 Figure 80 Group Status Selection Menu J Taar 198 9464 100 Patikaildsr 0430 alwa MENE Sete PrI WHI Geese States Telertipa 1 Grep Z 2 Previa Hee Plitis taber celectioan 1 te 3 2 f 4 Enter the number corresponding to the group for which you want to view IMA status The IMA Group Status screen for that group appears as shown in Figure 81 Figure 81 IMA Group Status Screen Fathieilaer 530 flares PRPS ble freee Fi IHA ep Dates persion Fertosd Ex Framer Leagth 7 128 cells HE State met coeFigered Lect ielag Limi 2 FE State gt eet comFigered Oper Link prelep asec 0 Failere States meee Tx eabl Gell kate teen FE Tz Clatking 7 maHa Ex eki Dell Este fcops3 i N Tx Tinisg bf Lime 2 E Tz CeaFigered Limes i Ex Tinis Erf Link Z E Er ConFigered Liaky 0 ix IMs l E Tz ctivr Liaks i HE Stabe Leet Pg ASSO E Er amp rtive Lisks A fe izt Press ang keg te previces mai The IMA Group Status screen lists the following information pertaining to the IMA status of the g
219. ify will be listed in the Age column on the List Forwarding Table The system deletes station address entries when they have had no traffic for the specified period of time To keep addresses in the List Forwarding table permanently set the Aging Timer to Permanent For further details about the List Forwarding Table see Viewing the List Forwarding Table later in this chapter 102 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS To configure the bridge 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 3 Manage Bridge to open the Manage Bridge menu shown in Figure 91 Figure 91 Manage Bridge Menu Fiathiellasr DFO Manage Bridge Meme 1 Bridge Getir rim 2 EVRERHET ciet 3 Previews Has Fleet cater elertia 1 te F F 2 From the Manage Bridge menu select 1 Bridge Configuration to open the Bridge Configuration menu shown in Figure 92 The current aging timer setting is displayed below the menu title 3 minutes in the sample menu shown in the figure Figure 92 Bridge Configuration Menu Fathbellaer 140 fridge CeeFiperstise Sgieg Viner misgte F 1 Set Sgieg Tiner njemte 2 Arewiee Howe Flaca taber a selection 1 te 2 2 f 3 Select 1 Set Aging Timer The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Aging Timer minute 4 Enter the desired timer interval in minutes 5 Select 2 Previous Menu to return to the Manage Bridge menu 6 Fro
220. ignals to follow the DTR and DSC signals Admin Status Administrative status In Service or Out of Service Configuring the CBR The only type of configuration you can perform on the CBR card is to put it in Card service or out of service To put the CBR card in service or out of service 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card 2 From the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 select 7 CBR The CBR T1 DSX or CBR E1 Configuration Selection menu appears as shown earlier in Figure 109 Select 5 Card Configuration to open the CBR Card Configuration menu Figure 114 shows the CBR E1 Card Configuration menu The CBR t1 DSX Card Configuration menu is the same Figure 114 CBR Card Configuration Menu J Taasi 158 93 64 100 Gerrari Edt urena Hala mrm Fathieilder 530 bles CER E Cees BY Eee aa Serial Haar BECO Get kinin Foebers le ere ce Getraties States la tareice i Det fie States E Foeviees Meee Flerse tater lertis 1 te Z F i Select 1 Set Admin Status and enter 2 to put the CBR card in service or 1 to take it out of service Configuring the Voice Compression Module The optional Voice Compression module VCM consists of one T1 E1 interface which you connect to a PBX trunk The T1 E1 interface s 24 30 DSO channels can carry individual voice fax modem or data connections or you can bundle multiple DSOs to provide connections for high rate applica
221. ild out CBR parameter 119 DS3 E3 parameter 94 T1 El parameter 79 voice compression parameter 130 LCV line coding violations CBR statistic 202 DS3 statistic 193 E3 statistic 194 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 205 least delay link IM A group parameter 91 LEDs CBR module 34 38 common 27 28 DS3 E3 module 37 Ethernet 10 100 PCI module 36 Ethernet port 31 36 IMA expansion module four port 38 management CPU M CPU 68 normal startup sequence 27 OC3 STM 1 port 33 serial port 30 T1 E1 UNI interface 29 voice compression module VCM 35 LES line errored seconds CBR statistic 202 DS3 statistic 193 E3 statistic 194 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 line code CBR parameter 119 voice compression parameter 130 link failure status conditions IMA 89 link states IMA 88 link type serial port parameter 97 List Card menu 69 70 List Forwarding Table 110 List Virtual Circuit Detail screen 157 158 List Virtual Circuit Summary screen 157 LIV full status timeouts LM I statistic 197 LM I local management interface 98 configuring 98 LM Configuration menu 100 LM parameters network PV timer T392 101 procedure 100 user error threshold N392 user ME count N393 101 user FS polling counter N391 101 user LIV polling timer T391 100 LM statistics 197 local card loopback 179 CBR 182 DS3 181 E3 181 VCM 183 local host IP address configuring 49 Local Host IP Configuration menu 50 local management interface
222. ine Payload For the voice compression module you can set card line and channel loopbacks and you can set tone injection When you set a VCM loopback the MCPU sends a message to the VCM card to perform a maintenance function and the VCM replies with an acknowledgment When the VCM enters maintenance mode it generates an alarm to the MCPU Only one maintenance function per port or per channel is allowed The starting point for configuring voice compression module loopbacks is the VCM Loopback menu shown in Figure 158 To open the VCM Loopback menu From the Loopback Menu shown earlier in Figure 151 enter the number corresponding to the slot number in which the Voice Compression module is installed 7 or 8 Figure 158 shows the VCM T1 DSX menu The VCM E1 menu is the same Figure 158 VCM Loopback Menu Connect d orina bala Fathiei leer 430 alma PRR Sleth MH BSE Lespheck Hay Re Fert Leper Det Chae Leng het T ejection Rees Hha dro hp Pitkot eater a selection i te amp 4 Setting VCM Port Loopbacks To set VCM port card line loopbacks From the VCM Loopback menu shown earlier in Figure 158 select 1 Set Port Loopback to open the VCM Card Line Loopback menu This menu is similar to the OC3 STM 1 Loopback menu shown earlier in Figure 154 Select the option corresponding to the type of loopback you want to perform and set the loopback to On Local Card Loopsthe transmit
223. ine rate Internal Configures the port interface to use the internal clock as the timing source SCR Clock Source The type of output clock service configured for the port interface Internal Configures the port interface to use the internal clock as the timing source Adaptive A non required network wide synchronization technique used to regenerate the input service clock Adaptive timing uses a buffer depth indicator at the receiver to adjust the line rate the fuller the buffer the faster the line rate the emptier the buffer the slower the line rate SCTE Clock Source The Rx timing source for the serial interface Echo Clock from DTE or DCE Transmit Clock 122 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS SCTE Clock Phase Control Receive timing phase control This parameter applies only when the attached cable is DCE type cable Depending on the speed of the device application and the clock phases particularly those of the return clock you may have to set SCTE Clock Phase Control to Inverted invert the clock to ensure correct clock and data phase Normal The receive timing from the remote endpoint node is normal clocking Inverted The receive timing from the remote endpoint node is inverted clocking 56K 64K Mode The T1 DSU CSU mode to be emulated 56k Mode n x 56 or 64k Mode n x 64 Dial Timer The amount of time in seconds after which dialing is a
224. ing cd f ileDev standby Change to directory flashDev main by entering cd flashDev standby Get the file image by entering get image lt image filename gt where lt image filename gt is the filename of the code image Exit FTP by entering bye Restoring the Code Image To restore the code image 1 From the DOS prompt change to the directory that contains the code image file 2 FIP to the node rrp lt node IP address gt a FTP login is the node name upper left hand corner of user interface m FTP password is the node password password used to access user interface Switch to binary mode by entering binary 4 Verify that the current directory is flashDev standby Put the code image file by entering put lt image filename gt image where lt image filename gt is the filename of the code image Exit FTP by entering bye The flash file system contains system configuration information which is automatically saved in flash memory at a predetermined interval To update the flash file system immediately rather than at the next scheduled interval From the System Administration menu select 7 Update Flash File System The following prompt appears Do you want to update the flash file system Y N N Enter y to update the flash file system CAUTION The user configuration data is automatically saved into flash memory every minute If there is a system failure for example a power failure any change
225. inst a network wide synchronization signal SRTS measures input frequency against the master network clock source and adjusts the line rate by sending residual time stamps in the AAL1 header to the remote end Adaptive unstructured ports only A non required network wide synchronization technique used to regenerate the input service clock Adaptive timing uses a buffer depth indicator at the receiver to adjust the line rate the fuller the buffer the faster the line rate the emptier the buffer the slower the line rate Figure 112 illustrates the SRTS and Adaptive timing options Figure 112 CBRT1 DSX Timing Options Send Difference 5 Hz Reference 5 Hz ps1 gt gt AAL Header gt gt 5 Hz Reference Check Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS DS1 gt gt gt AALI M Clock Buffer gt lt Depends Adaptive on Buffer Idle Timer This parameter applies to the video dial feature Use it to set the length of time in seconds 6 60 after which the CBR software shuts off cell transmission and puts the virtual circuit into a listening mode if no cells have been received on a T1 DSX E1 port connected to an MCU device If a T1 DSX E1 port is connected to an MCU device the bandwidth allocated to the virtual circuits must be saved when a video conference is not in progress To accomplish this the CBR software starts an internal timer whe
226. ion certain parameters may be displayed for information only you cannot change these read only values 6 Select the slot number corresponding to the module by which you are connected to the network for side B of the circuit 7 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for side B of the circuit After you enter the last parameter for side B the following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Is the above information correct y n 8 Enter y to confirm your configuration Figure 126 shows a completed data port VCC circuit As shown in the figure the following message appears at the bottom of the screen VC has been added Press any key to continue Configuring Virtual Circuits 135 Figure 126 Completed Data Port VCC Virtual Circuit Fathibellaer 0530 Sai Firtesl Circeit Girit Type Bedicert Poe Bevriptiss CHET inte States ie sereice fla Sletiher Citar TAGE ee fete stard BAe BHI ay OM beFFer Fire 1 af Emei FFL OF Cell Lest latig Parisi 2500 Ar Iranit E oe Felen Sires tgp a ges eeice Friemitpi 0 Dhiki betectioa 1 ital Early Patiet birtad 1 me figesliog Tepes TCE Tel Chaaarlc i Frieity U Early Paiet Biscard dikt Eater Side E Prierity ihi hj Jile 0 It abert iafermatisn cerrectt gfe F E 9 Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu Configuring CBR Circuits for DBA This section provides guidelines for configuring CBR circuits for various types of dynamic bandwidth allocation
227. ion up or down Unavailable Seconds The count of unavailable seconds at the near end interworking group state machine NE Number of Failures The number of times a near end group failure has been reported since powerup or reboot FE Number of Failures The number of times a far end group failure has been reported since powerup or reboot Viewing OC3 STM 1 Card Statistics T1 E1 Group ATM Statistics The T1 E1 Group ATM Statistics screen lists the following statistics Tx Cells The number of cells transmitted in a group since the counter was cleared Rx Cells The number of cells received in a group since the counter was cleared Rx ICP Cell Error The number of cells received in a port group since the counter was cleared Tx Cell Rate The current transmitted data cells rate Rx Cell Rate The current received data cells rate Rx ICP Cell Error Rate The current ICP received cell error rate Avg Tx Cell Rate The average transmitted data cells rate calculated over the last 8 seconds Avg Rx Cell Rate The average received data cells rate calculated over the last 8 seconds Avg ICP Cell Error Rate The average received errored ICP cells rate calculated over the last 8 seconds You can view both performance statistics and ATM statistics for the OC3 STM 1 port Viewing OC3 STM 1 Performance Statistics To view OC3 STM 1 performance statistics From the Card Statistics menu select 4 OC3 STM
228. ircuit you make a connection from the selected port to for traffic to flow through the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch and across the ATM WAN service Typically the VPI and VCI numbers for one side of the circuit are assigned by the network service provider or local IS administrator depending on whether your network is a public or private ATM network The port VPI VCI ATM circuit designators must match the application being supported For example if an OC3 STM 1 multi mode fiber module is installed in the Side B slot of the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch and is connected to a LAN ATM switch device then the Rx VPI VCI for the ATM LAN interface must match the Tx VPI VCI for the OC3 STM 1 UNI module and vice versa This ensures the first step in making the connection into the PathBuilder S330 switch The PathBuilder 330 S310 switch supports four classes of virtual circuits PVC Standard VP VCC permanent virtual circuits connecting various type of data ports For details about setting up PVC virtual circuits see Adding PVC Virtual Circuits later in this chapter RS 366 Template Video associated virtual circuit templates When the circuit defined by an RS 366 template is activated it supports dialed video conferencing over an ATM network For details setting up RS 366 virtual circuit templates see Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates later in this section VCM VCC Voice Compression module VCC virtual circuit
229. is configured on the port Loopbacks are for troubleshooting only and should not be present under normal operating conditions Summary informational alarm to indicate one or more alarms on this link are active Summary informational alarm to indicate all alarms on the physical link are cleared A loopback is configured on the port Loopbacks are for troubleshooting only and should not be present under normal operating conditions Loss of cell delineation possibly a framing or timing problem Cannot detect a signal at a configured port This alarm is applicable to DS3 UNI E3 UNI OC3 STM 1 UNI T1 IMA UNI and E1 IMA UNI ports A loopback is configured on the port Loopbacks are for troubleshooting only and should not be present under normal operating conditions Check with your service provider to determine the reason for the loopback Check the configuration of the terminal equipment or have your service provider check their equipment and make sure it is provisioned for service If you are not troubleshooting the port turn off the loopback Information only Information only If you are not troubleshooting the port turn off the loopback Check the reference clock source Compare parameters between local and service provider end Check the physical layer Check the cable between the interface port and the service provider s equipment terminal equipment Check cable connections Check transmit a
230. is directory should contain only the database files FTP to the node FTP lt node IP address gt a FTP login is the node name upper left corner of user interface a FTP password is the node password password used to access user interface Switch to binary mode by entering binary Change directory to fileDev disk by entering cd f ileDev disk Restore all files by entering mput Exit FTP by entering bye 7 Telnet to the node 10 11 12 13 14 Select 1 System Administration to open the System Administration menu Select 7 Update Flash File System Enter y at the confirmation prompt to update the flash file system Wait for the Update Completed message before continuing to Step 11 Select 8 Reset Interface Card to open the Reset Port Card screen Enter 1 for the MCPU Enter y at the confirmation prompt to reset the MCPU Repeat steps 11 13 for each slot in the shelf Backing up the Code Image To back up the code image From the DOS prompt change to the directory in which you want to store the backup code image file FTP to the node FTP lt node IP address gt a FTP login is the node name upper left hand corner of user interface a FTP password is the node password password used to access user interface 66 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Updating the Flash File System Switch to binary mode binary Change to directory fileDev main by enter
231. it faulures IMA link statistic 189 Tx FC FE far end transmit failures IMA link statistic 189 Tx UUS IMA near end transmit unusable seconds IMA link statistic 188 Tx UUS IMA FE far end transmit unusable seconds IMA link statistic 188 U UAS unavailable seconds CBR statistic 202 DS3 statistic 193 OC3 STM 1 far line statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 far path statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 UAS IM A near end unavailable seconds IMA link statistic 188 UAS IM A FE far end unavailable seconds IMA link statistic 188 UEQ unequipped condition OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 unavailable seconds T1 E1 statistic 189 UNI groups adding 80 configuring 80 deleting 85 modifying 85 unstructured mode 121 258 264 as opposed to structured 264 effects on transit DS1 265 unstructured tunneling 264 upgrades from PathBuilder S310 to PathBuilder S330 8 URL 277 user error threshold N392 user ME count N393 LMI parameter 101 user FS polling counter N391 LMI parameter 101 user LIV polling timer T391 LM parameter 100 V VC and VP address translation 156 VCCs virtual channel connections defining 132 VCI virtual channel identifier 132 VCI ranges 238 VCM Card Statistics menu 204 VCM Channel Loopback menu 184 VCM Configuration menu 127 VCM Loopback menu 183 VCM Port Configuration menu 129 version number firmware 61 video CBR module
232. ite Circuits for DSX 1 E1 CBR Ports 143 Adding Voice Compression Module VCC Circuits 143 Adding VCM Subchannel Circuits 146 VCM Subchannel Virtual Circuit Example 148 Virtual Circuit Parameters 150 Common Virtual Circuit Parameters 150 MCPU Virtual Circuit Parameters 150 T1 E1 UNI Port Virtual Circuit Parameters 151 OC3 STM 1 Port Virtual Circuit Parameters 151 Serial Port Virtual Circuit Parameters 151 Ethernet Port Virtual Circuit Parameters 154 CBR Module Virtual Circuit Parameters 154 Voice Compression Module Virtual Circuit Parameters 156 VC and VP Address Translation 156 Viewing Existing Virtual Circuits 157 Viewing Virtual Circuits for the Entire Chassis 157 Viewing Virtual Circuits by Port or Group 158 Modifying Existing Virtual Circuits 159 Deleting Virtual Circuits 160 Managing the Video Dial Feature 160 Managing Video Dial up Sessions 161 Starting Video Dial up Sessions 161 Ending Video Dial up Sessions 162 Viewing the Video Call Routing Table 163 PATHBUILDER 330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Managing System Alarms 165 Viewing and Clearing Current Alarms 165 PathBuilder S330 S310 Alarm Messages 166 MCPU and CTX Module System Alarms 167 Alarms Common to Several Interfaces 168 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Module Alarms 170 DSX 1 E1 CBR Module Alarms 175 SIM Alarms 176 Voice Compression Module Alarms 176 Working with History Alarms 177 Viewing and Printing History Alarms 177 Clearing History Alarms 177 Using Loopbacks
233. ivilege menu shown Figure 52 Figure 52 Super User Privilege Menu Fathiellesr Dio teper Beer FPrivileype Det pprten Legin Ferd Takt brir htri Wrile See Erge Tprben Bat eee Preriea Hie Flaca aber a aelection 1 te amp 4 E 2 Select 1 Set System Login Password to open the System Login Password menu shown in Figure 53 Figure 53 System Login Password M enu Fathielleer DFO terben Legis Ferrum Seb Ieper Ever Feed Det iea lrite Premieri het Bes fely Frrr Rees Hee Flea aber a selection 1 te amp a E 56 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED 3 Select 1 Set Super User Password 2 Set Read Write Password or 3 Set Read Only Password to set the desired password The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter New Password Enter the new password The password appears as asterisks on the screen as you enter it CAUTION Be sure to record your new password and keep the record in a safe place If you forget your password and have no record of it you can contact 3Com for assistance but we may need to delete your database in order to solve the problem The following prompt appears Re enter New Password Re enter the password you entered in step 4 A message appears indicating that the password has been saved Select 4 Previous Menu to return to the Super User Privilege menu Performing Additional Super User Functions Taking overa Read Write Session b
234. ization configured for the T1 DSX or E1 port interface D4 or ESF for VCM T1 DSX No Multiframe or Multiframe for VCM E1 Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection framing The Framing must match at local and remote ports CAUTION A framing mismatch can cause LOF OOF alarm conditions and result in traffic loss Signaling The signaling type configured for the VCM T1 E1 port CAS channel associated signaling or CCS common channel signaling The TC Signaling Type TC1 Signaling Bits and TC2 Signaling Bits parameters are applicable only when Signaling is set to CAS TC Signaling Type The trunk condition signaling type PLAR E amp M PLAR FXO Loop Start FXS Loop Start FXKO Ground Start FXS Ground Start or R2 E1 This is the type of signaling done between PBXs This also sets the signaling type used for each of the virtual circuits across this port TC1 Signaling Bits TC2 Signaling Bits Trunk condition 1 and trunk condition 2 signaling bits onhook or offhook The default for TC1 Signaling Bits is onhook while the default for TC2 Signaling is offhook The default values are usually suitable for PBX applications but for channel bank applications you should set TC2 Signaling Bits to onhook For further details about trunk conditioning see DSO Trunk Conditioning earlier in this chapter Timing The type of input clock service configured for the port interface The default is System
235. l Circuit Enter the desired description for the circuit and press Enter Enter 1 to set the VC Class as PVC Enter 1 to set the VC Type as VCC Set the administrative status of the circuit Build a PVC on the near end PathBuilder S330 S310 switch using the M CPU as side A of the virtual circuit To do this you need to set the following side A parameters on the Add Virtual Circuit screen as shown in Figure 54 e ao laa Ft a Shaper Number Choose the number corresponding to the desired shaper value You assign the shaper number from the MCPU Shapers screen See Configuring MCPU Shapers in Chapter 4 for details IP Address This address must be different than the local host IP address and should be on a different subnet a Subnet Mask Specify a valid subnet mask for the IP address for example 255 255 255 0 a IP Encapsulation Specify the encapsulation type used for sending IP packets over the ATM link You must set the near and far ends to the same IP Encapsulation type 58 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Figure 54 Add Virtual Circuit Menu Fathiei leer 0530 alma ERPS Ski Firtesl Circeit Girit Type Redcat Por Bercriptiss ished inka States ie sereice ELE tlet Pertftard 1 HtPE Slet Pertftard kbit FHI Seger Heber 15 1 HHH a Emei FFL L IF S rts VE ee Iranit BLE oe heer Mask 255 255 7255 0 Frisvityi IF Eetagpcelatien t iridged FM 06 Earls Pocket Bincard tie Frie i
236. larm Indicator The auto logout feature automatically logs you out and returns you to the title screen if you do not press a key for a specified time You can set the auto logout time for 0 to 99 minutes If you set the auto logout to 0 the system will never log you out automatically To set the autolog timeout select 1 System Administration from the main menu then select 1 General System Information then select 6 Set Auto Logout Time Always return to the Main Menu to log out or let the auto logout time expire Exiting the program in any other way such as turning power off to the network management station may cause unpredictable results The PathBuilder 330 S310 menu hierarchy includes several layers of menus Each submenu has a name that is the same or similar to the name of the option that opens it For example selecting 2 Configuration Management on the main menu opens a submenu titled Configuration Management and selecting 4 Manage System Clock from the System Administration menu opens a submenu titled System Clock Configuration You can then select options on the submenus to open additional submenus or prompts that allow you to set various parameters Settings are displayed in prompts at the bottom of the menus For example if you select 2 Configuration Management 1 Manage Card 4 OC3 STM 1 UNI 3 Set ATM Payload Scramble The following prompt appears at the bottom of the SONET STM 1 UNI Configuration me
237. le 116 IMA expansion module four port 77 IMA groups 80 in band management 57 initial 45 local host IP address 49 management CPU M CPU 59 menu 68 OC3 STM 1 port 93 RS 232 port 61 serial card 101 serial port 96 97 shapers CTX 73 shapers MCPU 71 SIM local management interface LMI 98 system clock 45 system information 59 60 T1 El card 92 T1 E1 ports 77 78 T1 E1 UNI interface 77 time and date 54 trap clients 52 UNI groups 80 VCM card 131 VCM channels 127 viaVT100 41 viewing RS 232 port settings 61 viewing shelf information 69 virtual circuits 132 voice compression module VCM 126 Configuration Management main menu option 43 Configuration Management menu 68 69 congestion thresholds 75 76 connections AC DC power 26 CBR module 34 DS3 E3 module 37 Ethernet 10 100 module 36 Ethernet port 31 I O cabling 27 IMA expansion module fourport 38 management terminal 39 42 OC3 STM 1 port 32 serial port 30 T1 E1 UNI interface 29 voice compression module VCM 35 connectivity LAN 257 conventions notice icons About This Guide 1 text About This Guide 1 CRC 123 CRC errored frames Ethernet statistic 199 CRC voice compression parameter 131 CRC 4 CBR parameter 123 CSES C bit severely errored seconds DS3 statistic 194 CSS controlled slip seconds CBR statistic 202 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 CTS amp DCD option CBR parameter 125 CTX 235 configuring 72 configuring buffe
238. le T1 DSX or E1 ports only 1 port for PathBuilder S310 CBR V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 m VOM T1 DSX or E1 port serial port Optional DS3 or E3 module installed in expansion slot 9 Optional CBR module PathBuilder 330 only installed in expansion slot 7 DS3 or E3 port 20000 RS 232 console port T1 n x T1 or E1 nx E1 interface one T1 or E1 for PathBuilder S310 Ethernet port OC3 STM 1 port PathBuilder S330 only Serial V 35 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 port The following sections tell you how to make connections to the ports of the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch i gt For pinout tables see Connector Pinouts in Appendix A Vy Installation Procedures 29 Connecting to the T1 E1 UNI Interface As shown above in Figure 23 the PathBuilder S330 T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface provides four T1 E1 ports You can connect a single T1 E1 line to this interface or connect up to four T1 E1 lines eight if you have installed the optional four port IMA expansion module and combine them to form a logical inverse multiplexed high speed link See Configuring UNI and IMA Groups in Chapter 4 for details about setting up IMA groups For connector pinouts see T1 E1 UNI with IMA Interface Connector Pinouts in Appendix A If you are using a G703 coax physical connection to connect the E1 line to the interface you must use the E1 Balun
239. links you configured Continue passing data Correct faulty links or adjust IMA group configuration The same group IMA ID has been received on links belonging to different IMA groups in the same card Correct link or group configuration The far end rejects the symmetry sent by the near end Check and correct near end symmetry Only symmetric operation is supported in PathBuilder switches The far end reports it is not passing data Check and repair link facilities Verify configuration The far end rejects the M value used by the near end Configure both ends to the same M value NOTE This alarm should not occur if both ends are PathBuilder 310 330 S600 or S700 switches The far end is coming up Information about far end state starting IMA The far end node is reporting an insufficient number of links Check and repair link facilities Verify configuration 173 Managing System Alarms Table 11 T1 E1 UNI with IMA Module Alarms continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps Group n Insufficient Links ATM Forum R 130 Group n Lack of Link Group n Link Down Group n Link Up Group n N lt P Group n No Link Group n Multi IMA ID Group n M ulti Test ATM Forum R 138 Group n Multiple M Group n Multiple Symmetry Group n Time Sync Fail IMA Protocol Mismatch IMA Remote Loopback continued The near end finds not enough av
240. ll connections and performing maintenance Installation Procedures 15 Installation Procedures Step 1 Optional Install the Optional Modules in the Unit i gt This section provides detailed instructions for completing the steps in the installation procedure illustrated earlier in Figure 3 This section tells you how to install the optional modules in the PathBuilder 330 S310 chassis In order to execute the release 2 04 software with the new Ethernet 10 100 and four port IMA modules the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch must be equippped witha specific motherboard revision For a list of the required part revision number combinations and instructions for how to check the motherboard part and revision numbers see Verifying Hardware Requirements in Chapter 4 The PathBuilder 330 S310 swtich supports five optional modules CBR module A board consisting of one V 35 RS 366 RS 449 RS 530 X 21 interface and three T1 DSX or E1 interfaces one T1 DSX or E1 interface for the PathBuilder S310 switch It services traffic generated by your existing PBXs channels T1 E1 multiplexers CSU DSUs and video conferencing devices Install the CBR module in slot 7 Figure 6 shows the CBR module connections Figure 6 CBR Module Connections Video Audio Codec PBX Pi m V 35 RS 449 RS 366 RS 530 X 21 T1 DSX E1 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Voice compression module A
241. llow the instructions under Adding VCM Subchannel Circuits To configure a VPC VCC virtual circuit to connect data ports When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit type as shown earlier in Figure 121 enter 1 to create a PVC circuit As shown in Figure 122 you are prompted to select a virtual circuit type 132 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 122 Selecting the PVC Virtual Clrcuit Type VCC or VPC Pathibeileer IHi Sai Firtesl Circwit Girit Type Bedicert Por Bercriptiss Cte Eater Bt Tepe Ci Dt 2 lt 6Ft i E Class POPON 2 Enter the number corresponding to the type of virtual circuit you want to configure VCC virtual channel connection You can use this connection type for circuit between non UNI and UNI cards and between UNI and UNI cards both the VPIs and the VCls will be translated VPC virtual path connection You can use this connection type only for circuits between UNI and UNI cards only the VPIs will be translated i gt To operate a circuit as a VP set the connection type to VPC A screen appears prompting you to set the administrative service of the circuit as shown in Figure 123 Figure 123 Setting the Administrative Status of the Virtual Circuit Fathbai leer 1330 Ir MENT Ski Firtesl Circeit irit Type Bedcest EE Pemripisa Cheer EEE in service Eater ria Ttates leet af careied t da caredee 2 E eet
242. llowing sections describe the statistics provided in each of these categories For performance monitoring statistics only you must select the type of performance statistics you want to view current interval or total For details about these types of performance statistic see Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics earlier in this chapter 188 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS T1 E1 Port Link Statistics This section describes the T1 E1 port link statistics T1 E1 Port Link Physical Performance Statistics The T1 DS1 E1 UNI Physical Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics i gt You can view the statistics as current interval or total data ES The number of errored seconds ESs encountered by the T1 E1 interface SES The number of severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the T1 E1 interface SEFS The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs encountered by the T1 E1 interface UAS The number of unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the T1 E1 interface CSS The number of controlled slip seconds CSSs encountered by the T1 E1 interface PCV The number of path coding violations PCVs encountered by the T1 E1 interface LES The number of line errored seconds LESs encountered by the T1 E1 interface BES The number of bursty errored seconds BESs encountered by the T1 E1 interface DM The number of degraded
243. ls are sent to the CTX where ATM switching and queueing is performed Bridge Operation Ethernet Interface LOBASE T or 10 100BASE T 249 The SAR contains 15 traffic shapers each of which can be programmed for sustained cell rate of transmission SCR peak cell rate PCR and maximum burst size M BS The traffic shapers work as follows The packet is segmented using a dual leaky buffer algorithm whereby the cells are transmitted from each connection in the shaper at an average rate until the bucket of token fills up a token is given to the connection at an average rate if it has no cells to transmit at that moment The shaper then turns the burst mode on and transmits at the peak rate for a burst length Note that the shaper serves every connection independently Cells received from the ATM WAN are switched via the CTX chip to the SAR queues You can enable shaping on the SAR queues to slow down the incoming traffic on the SAR The SAR will then assemble the cells belonging to the connections specified for it When the cells are assembled the CPU is given confirmation and the bridge function of the CPU examines the packet header removes the encapsulation and after learning the address and updating the bridge table forwards the packet to the proper destination The pointer of the packet to be forwarded is placed in the transmit queue of the Ethernet port The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch supports ATM permanent virt
244. ly The setting for the receive signal level 26 or 36 dB AFA Enables yes or disables no Automatic Frequency Adjustment AFA monitors the error rate detected by the CRC cyclic redundancy check error checking scheme of each of the T1 E1 links ports It automatically disables and re enables a port when the error rate on that port is at a set level for a set time Activation Rate The CRC cyclic redundancy check BER bit error rate at which AFA takes a link out of service based on the Activation Min 10 4 10 10 6 10 7 For further details about setting this parameter see Activation Deactivation Bit Error Rates below This parameter appears only when AFA is enabled Activation Min The period during which AFA monitors the link condition prior to taking it out of service in minutes 15 to 30 This parameter appears only when AFA is enabled Deactivation Rate The CRC cyclic redundancy check BER bit error rate at which AFA puts a link in service based on the Deactivation Min 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 For further details about setting this parameter see Activation Deactivation Bit Error Rates below This parameter appears only when AFA is enabled Deactivation Min The period during which AFA monitors the link condition prior to putting it in service in minutes 1 to 15 This parameter appears only when AFA is enabled Admin Status Administrative status Out of Service or In Service I
245. m the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 From the List Card menu select 3 DS1 UNI to open the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 67 From the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu select 3 Group Configuration to open the Group menu shown in Figure 73 Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 83 Figure 73 Group Menu A Taa 198 97 64 100 Pathiellaer IHi Sete PrI WHI Erer Hren 1 Ly Erer or Place taber a aelection 1 te amp a E 4 Select 2 Add Group to open the Add Group menu shown in Figure 74 Figure 74 Add Group Menu Selecting Group Type Fathiei leer 530 alwa Pa Siete respit FS WHI bh ire 1 HI Ia F Previews Heg Fiery aber a lectis 1 te 3 3 f 5 Select 2 IMA The Add Group menu appears as shown in Figure 75 If an expansion module DS3 E3 or four port IM A is installed in slot 9 it occupies the shaper from T1 E1 group 1 you must start with group 2 when configuring groups CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 75 Add Group Menu Adding IMA Group Tajai 198 97 6d 1 Fathiei leer 0530 alma MEN CistEF Geese FFI FHI Shi eee kinjn F tt IHA Ig The bpratisa Partis Test Link ket celeb Frame Leegth 174 fells Test Fathers eet selecbhed Haz Lied beliy amet 35 Test Prebha biribiri His Tree tetp Fety Z kinim f
246. m the Manage Bridge menu enter the number corresponding to the Ethernet port for which you want to configure bridging to open the Bridge Menu for the selected Ethernet port as shown in Figure 93 Figure 93 Bridge Menu Edi urina Halo Patikaildsr 30 alma MRN ETEEEMET sirt amp Gridge Hus Tae pishik Irit Conf igeration Iemce Fretecel Filteriog Temi iMacs Fil beriag Bestisetios Stress Filberiog Ferdardiag Tame 1 Static Tale Freeviast Hee Bh a ih rib Flac tater a selection 1 te amp f From the Bridge menu you can a Configure spanning tree Configure source protocol filtering source address filtering and destination address filtering a Display the forwarding table for the bridge Construct a static table a table of source destination pairs which you do not want to be aged out of the forwarding table for the bridge The following subsections tell you how to perform these operations Configuring the Spanning Tree Spanning tree IEEE 802 1d is a technique that detects loops in a network and logically blocks the redundant paths ensuring that only one route exists between any two LANs It eliminates the duplication of packets and provides fault tolerance for resilient networks You can configure spanning tree for both the standard 10BASE T Ethernet interface and the optional 10 100 BASE_T PCI Ethernet interface To configure the spanning tree From the Bridge menu select
247. mes that are received with good FCS but that cannot be processed due to wrong content Discarded Congested Frames The total number of frames discarded at this port because they were congested Congested frames are frames that were not transmitted due to link congestion Received Bytes The total number of bytes received at this port Transmitted Bytes The total number of bytes transmitted at this port Received CLP The number of Cell Loss Priority frames received for a specific virtual circuit SIM ATM VC Statistics per VCI When you select ATM VC Statistics from the SIM Statistics menu an ATM VC Statistics table appears listing configured virtual circuits Enter a number corresponding to one of the listed virtual circuits to display a list of ATM VC Statistics for that virtual circuit Viewing Ethernet Card Statistics Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 197 The ATM VC Statistics screen lists the following statistics per VCI Port transmit VPI The transmit VPI for the port side the side toward the connector rather than toward the bus of the circuit Port transmit VCI The transmit VCI for the port side of the circuit Port receive VPI The receive VPI for the port side of the circuit Port receive VCI The receive VCI for the port side of the circuit Received Frames The total number of received frames with good FCS at this port Transmitted Frames The total number of successfully tra
248. ministrative status Out of Service or In Service Local Management Interface LM I configuration relates to the periodic polling that is performed between pairs of Frame Relay devices to determine the status of PVC connections and to verify the link integrity This polling is done through a procedure known as Status Enquiry Two types are polling are performed full status FS and link integrity verification LIV Full status polling also includes link integrity verification You can set the LM protocol only if the Link Type is set to Frame Relay on the SIM Port Configuration menu If the Link Type is set to DXI or SDLC the LMI Configuration option does not appear on the SIM Port Configuration Port LM selection menu shown earlier in Figure 86 98 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS To configure the SIM Local Management Interface LM 1 LM I configuration applies only to Frame Relay ports The LM I Configuration menu is not available if the SIM port is configured as a DXI or HDLC port 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 2 From the List Card menu select 5 SIM to open the SIM Configuration Port Card Selection menu shown earlier in Figure 85 3 Select 1 Port 1 to open the SIM Port Configuration Port LM I selection menu shown earlier in Figure 86 4 Select 2 LM Configuration to open the SIM LMI C
249. minutes DM encountered by the T1 E1 interface LCV The number of line coding violations LCVs encountered by the T1 E1 interface T1 E1 Port Link IMA Link Performance Statistics The T1 E1 Link Performance Monitoring screen lists the following statistics IV IMA IMA violations the number of errored invalid or missing ICP cells SES IMA Near end severely errored seconds the number of seconds with IMA violation LOS AIS OOF LCD LIF LODS at the near end SES IMA FE Far end severely errored seconds the number of seconds with IMA violation LOS AIS OOF LCD LIF LODS at the far end UAS IMA Near end unavailable seconds the number of unavailable seconds at the near end UAS IMA FE Far end unavailable seconds the number of unavailable seconds at the far end Tx UUS IMA Near end transmit unusable seconds the number of unusable seconds at the near end interworking Tx link state machine Rx UUS IMA Near end receive unusable seconds the number of unusable seconds at the near end interworking Rx link state machine Tx UUS IMA FE Far end transmit unusable seconds the number of unusable seconds at the far end interworking Tx link state machine Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 189 Rx UUS IMA FE Far end receive unusable seconds the number of unusable seconds at the far end interworking Rx link state machine Tx FC The number of near end transmit failures Rx FC The number of near e
250. mit VPI VCI of cells transmitted by the OC3 STM 1 port Serial Port Virtual Circuit Parameters You build connections from the local Ethernet port to a remote Ethernet port by adding permanent virtual circuits PVCs These connections allow the packets to be transmitted through the ATM network to the destination port The parameters that appear on the Add Virtual Circuit screen vary depending on the configuration of the serial port that is being connected Frame Relay DXI or SDLC The configuration of the card you select on the List Card menu sets the attribute selection for the virtual circuit configuration parameters If you configure a virtual circuit and then change serial port attributes from DXI to Frame Relay or vice versa the circuit will be deleted Frame Relay Virtual Circuit Parameters If the serial port is configured as a Frame Relay port you must set the following virtual circuit parameters in addition to the common Shaper Number Priority and Early Packet Discard parameters Interworking Mode The Frame Relay ATM interworking mode Network or Service Start End Frame Relay DLCI The starting and ending Frame Relay data link connection identifiers 16 991 These DLCls are used to identify a Frame Relay local connection This parameter applies only if the Interworking Mode is set to Network Encapsulation Mode The encapsulation data goes around the data packet and is used to identify the packet enter 1
251. mon channel signaling applications A structured DS1 channel will not pass the original DS1 frame to the remote end For instance ESF network management will terminate at the PathBuilder 330 S310 on a structured DS1 so CSU to CSU Facility Data Link FDL communication will not be possible FDL communication is possible with unstructured DS1 Unstructured DS1 CBRModule 263 Implement unstructured DS1 service when you want DS1 tunneling through an ATM system DS1 tunneling allows an entire DS1 frame including framing bits to travel across an ATM network See Figure 192 Figure 192 DS1 Unstructured Tunneling T1 Unstructured Data ea Service Unit ATM Network Unit Ch Channel n Servie Unit Unit DS1 Signal Tunneled Through a PVC Use unstructured services when DS0 midspan access is not required and end to end DS1 service is required for example to provide CSU or DSU end to end connectivity The encapsulation of unstructured DS1 occupies DS1 bandwidth on the VCC and uses AAL 1 SAR Structured versus Unstructured Summary Use Table 36 to determine whether to use structured or unstructured DS1 CBR Table 36 When to use Structured Versus Unstructured Service Structured Unstructured DSO midspan drop and insert X DSO access grooming X DS1 network management end to end X DS1 end to end no DSO access X X DS1 CBR 1 536 M bps of bandwidth X X X DS1 C
252. munity Name Enter private The community name applies to the SNMP SET operation Figure 47 shows a sample PathBuilder S330 S310 IP host setup Figure 47 Sample PathBuilder S330 S310 IP Host Setup er 330 S310 192 73 30 99 192 73 30 100 3Com Community 4 Return to the Local Host IP Configuration menu 5 Select 2 Apply IP Configuration Changes 3 Apply IP Configuration Changes if you have installed the Ethernet 10 100 module to activate the IP address The IP settings do not take effect until you apply your changes by selecting 2 Apply IP Configuration Changes 3 Apply IP Configuration Changes if you have installed the Ethernet 10 100 module from the Local Host IP Configuration menu step 5 above When you apply a change from the Local Host IP Configuration menu you might get logged out if you are using a Telnet session The default VT100 configuration is Baud rate 9600 Parity none Data Bits 8 StopBits 1 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Configuring Trap Clients Trap clients are the network management stations to which you want the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to send traps You can specify up to four trap clients To configure trap clients From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu select 2 Trap Client Configuration to open the Trap Client Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 Figure 48 Trap Client Configuration Menu Eer E E Palhtatleer 130 flurn tema f Trap Climat Canfigurat ies
253. n authorization number Products sent to 3Com without authorization numbers will be returned to the sender unopened at the sender s expense To obtain an authorization number call or fax Country Telephone Number Fax Number Asia Pacific Rim Europe South Africa and Middle East Latin America 65 543 6500 31 30 6029900 65 543 6348 31 30 6029999 1 408 326 2927 1 408 326 3355 From the following countries you may call the toll free numbers select option 2 and then option 2 Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Hungary Ireland Israel Italy Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland U K U S A and Canada 0800 297468 0800 71429 800 17309 0800 113153 0800 917959 0800 1821502 00800 12813 1800 553117 1800 9453794 1678 79489 0800 0227788 800 11376 00800 3111206 0800 831416 0800 995014 900 983125 020 795482 0800 55 3072 0800 966197 1 800 NET 3Com 1 800 638 3266 Enterprise Customers 1 800 876 3266 1 408 326 7120 not toll free INDEX Numbers 3Com bulletin board service 3Com BBS 278 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 277 3Com URL 277 3ComFacts 278 56K 64K mode CBR parameter 125 A AALS errors serial port ATM VC statistic 197 VCM VC statistic 205 AAL5 pad 254 AC or DC power connecting 25 activation min T1 E1 parameter 79 activation rate T1 El parameter 79 Add Virtual Circuit screen 135 Add Virtual Ci
254. n Figure 151 Figure 151 Loopback Menu Fathibellder 1 130 Ltk Hag HEFE ETE 51 HI Ce FHI FIH ETSERHET CRE E1 F183 tH 651 EHeHCER Sa ade dal a HEHE Proviea Hee a Pitre eater a selection 1 te i 10 E 3 Select the card type for which you want to conduct the loopback to open the Loopback menu for the selected port Figure 152 shows the Loopback menu for the OC3 STM 1 port If you select a card type for which the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch does not support loopbacks a message appears informing you that no loopback feature is available for that card type If you select a multiple port card you must also select the port for which you want to configure the loopback Figure 152 OC3 STM 1 Loopback Menu Pathielleer IHi lets HF HI Leeper Meee Lepik He LHH 1 het Lee 2 Pre ita Hie Plitis taber a selection 1 te 2 2 f 4 Select 1 Set Loopback A prompt listing the loopback choices for the selected port appears at the bottom of the screen 5 Enter the number corresponding to the type of loopback you want to configure The following subsections describe the available loopbacks for each of the PathBuilder S330 interfaces T1 E1 UNI with IMA The following loopbacks are available for the T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface Loopbacks Network Line Loops the T1 E1 received data back on the output side after the digital data has been recovered Local Card Loops the transmit T1 E1 o
255. n M enu m Fathieilaer TFIO Hepe IF ever ATH Hena 1 ENRERHET tit 2 Freviees Hee Flere ater celectioan 1 te 3 2 i c Enter the number corresponding to the Ethernet port for which you want to configure IP over ATM The IP over ATM menu for the selected port appears as shown in Figure 102 Figure 102 P over ATM Menu Fathibeileer IHi ETHEEHET siet IF prer ATH Hemy Firu ete Ekablit bicabls IF eeer TH Eales vice bridging phia Firteal Circeit Coerigere LEH Epler Configers ATH Bester Froeviees Hrag Flerse tater lertis 1 te 7 T i 2 If desired view the current IP over ATM configuration a Select 1 View Setup to open the IP over ATM Configuration screen Figure 103 shows a representative IP over ATM Configuration screen Figure 103 IP over ATM Configuration Screen Fathbei leer 1330 Son ENRERMET lst IF ewer AIH CeePigeretiee He cerecet P LH fester IF iirtit LEH Bester IF feet Hsk 0 0 0 ATH Bester IF bret AIH Eegter IF feet Hesk O0 Da IF r lh Ficti Poet it Labs ita Fress p beg te retere be perims ETE b Press any key to return to the IP over ATM menu 3 View the virtual circuit that is currently specified to pass the IP traffic over the ATM network a Select 4 Specify Virtual Circuit to open the Specify Virtual Circuit menu shown in Figure 104 This menu lists the virtual circuit that is currently selected to pass the IP t
256. n no cell is being received If the amount of time you specify as the Idle Timer expires before another cell is received the software shuts off cell transmission and puts the virtual circuit into a listening mode DBA Bits Mask Structured Data ports only Dynamic bandwidth allocation bits mask a numeric code in the range 1 255 representing a mask that masks off bits that are not a portion of the idle code When a DSX 1 E 1 CBR port is configured as structured data all virtual circuits in the port use a preselected DBA Bits M ask The decimal number that represents the DBA Bits M ask corresponds to an internal 8 bit value The default DBA Bits M ask is 127 gt Configuring the CBR Serial Port The DBA Bits M ask parameter is designed to accommodate situations in which the PathBuilder 330 S310 must communicate with equipment that uses non standard signaling patterns In most cases you should leave this parameter set to its default value If you are experiencing problems with a CCS circuit however you may need to set the DBA Bits Mask to a different value The PathBuilder 330 S310 performance monitoring feature reports the data bytes to the cell bus on the CBR port You can check this statistic to determine if you need to set a non default DBA Bits Mask For details see CBR ATM Statistics in Chapter 5 CRC 4 E1 only Enables yes or disables no Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 CRC 4 information CRC 4 is a framing option t
257. n the CIM are facing the front of the card c Repeat steps a and b as necessary to install additional CIMs The T1 voice compression module supports up to three DSP CIMs while the E1 voice compression module supports up to four DSP CIMs Replace the RAM module in the front socket using the same procedure that you did to install the DSP CIMs The RAM module is common to all the DSP CIMs In order for the DSP CIMs to Operate you must re install the RAM module a Insert the RAM module into the front socket angled toward the front of the card and with the large components facing the front of the card b Carefully move the RAM module into the vertical position to engage the socket Clips Installation Procedures 23 9 Insert the optional module into the appropriate slot a 7 forthe CBR module a 7or8 for the voice compression module 7or8 for the Ethernet 10 100 module 8or9 for the DS3 E3 module 9 forthe 4 port IMA expansion card Figure 17 shows the CBR module being installed into slot 7 Installation for the other modules is the same Figure 17 Inserting an Optional Module CBR Module into Slot 7 a Slide the faceplate into position arrow 1 b Line up the pins carefully and press down from above the pin connector arrow 2 By aligning the screw hole with the standoff you will also line up the pins c Install the screw supplied with the o
258. nagement CPU M CPU parameters 150 modifying 159 OC3 STM 1 parameters 151 overview 238 PVC 151 PVC definition 132 PVC vs RS 366 video 132 134 RS 366 video 132 scheme 252 SDLC parameters 154 serial port parameters 151 statistics 206 statistics by circuit 206 statistics by port group 208 statistics by shaper 208 statistics by buffer queue 209 T1 El parameters 151 typesof 134 VCC defining 132 VCM parameters 156 viewing existing 157 viewing for entire chassis 157 VPC defining 132 virtual path connections VPCs 135 defining 132 virtual path identifier VPI 132 voice activity detection 269 voice coding voice compression parameter 128 voice compression module VCM 4 6 alarms 176 configuring 126 configuring channels 127 configuring the card 131 LEDs 35 performance monitoring 204 pinouts 232 principles of operation 268 selecting compression algorithm 128 setting channel loopbacks 184 setting loopbacks 182 setting port loopbacks 183 specifications 217 221 statistics 203 supported features 269 virtual circuit parameters 156 virtual circuit statistics 205 voice compression parameters admin status 131 CRC 131 DTMF relay 128 echo cancellation 128 encoding 128 FAX support 128 framing 130 LBO line build out 130 line code 130 signaling 130 silence compression 128 TC signaling type 130 TC1 signaling bits 130 TC2 signaling bits 130 voice coding 128 VPCs virtual path connections 135 defining 132 VP
259. nband Lpbk T1 only Enables or disables inband loopback detection Activation Deactivation Bit Error Rates Table 5 translates bit errors rates into the total number of errors for various time periods Use this table as a reference when you are selecting activation and deactivation bit error rates for the AFA feature 80 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Configuring UNI and IMA Groups gt b gt Table 5 Bit Error Rates Translated into Total Number of Errors Bit Error Rate TotalErrorsin TotalErrorsin TotalErrorsin TotalErrorsin Total Errorsin BER 1 second 1 Minute 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 15 Minutes 104 15 900 1800 4500 13500 10 5 1 5 90 180 450 1350 10 6 0 15 9 18 45 135 107 0 015 1 2 5 13 The T1 DS1 E1 UNI Configuration menu lists the following additional read only parameters Group The number of the group to which the ports belong Tx LID Transmit link identification This should match the Rx LID of the remote end IMA device Tx LID is displayed only if the port is part of an IMA group Rx LID Receive link identification This should match the Tx LID of the remote end IMA device Rx LID is displayed only if the port is part of an IMA group Operation Link Delay Operation link delay synchronized in msec This is the actual link delay used to synchronize the IMA links Operations LDS is displayed only if the port is part of an IMA group Select 9
260. nd receive pairs for proper connection Check terminating equipment Call your service provider If you are not troubleshooting the port turn off the loopback 170 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Table 10 Alarms Common to Several M odules continued Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps Network Line Loopback Out of Frame OOF A loopback is configured on the port Loopbacks are for troubleshooting only and should not be present under normal operating conditions The configuration settings on the port are not correct for the line or the port configuration is correct but the line is experiencing errors that result in an alarm T1 E1 UNI with IMA Module Alarms Table 11 describes the alarms specific to the T1 UNI and E1 UNI modules Table 11 1T1 E1 UNI with IMA Module Alarms Alarm AFA Link Removal Bad IMA ID Bad Link ID continued Meaning Automatic Frequency Adjustment Link removed from physical line group due to error rate in CRC check of T1 E1 exceeding user specified rate for a given period of time A link within the group has received an IMA ID from the far end that is different than when the group was initialized and from the other links in the group The link with the bad IMA ID is probably misconnected Each IMA group assigns a unique Transmit link ID to each link in the group This link ID should match the Receive link ID of the remote
261. nd receive failures Tx FC FE The number of far end transmit failures Rx FC FE The number of far end receive failures T1 E1 Port Link UNI IMA Link ATM Statistics The T1 E1 Link ATM Statistics screen lists the following statistics Tx Cells The number of cells transmitted in a port group since the counter was cleared Rx Cells The number of cells received in a port group since the counter was cleared Rx ICP Cell Error The number of ICP cells received in a port group since the counter was cleared Tx Cell Rate The current transmitted data cells rate Rx Cell Rate The current received data cells rate Rx ICP Cell Error Rate The current ICP received cell error rate Avg Tx Cell Rate The average received data cells rate calculated over the last 8 seconds Avg Rx Cell Rate The average transmitted data cells rate calculated over the last 8 seconds Avg Rx ICP Cell Error Rate The average received errored ICP cells rate calculated over the last 8 seconds T1 E1 Group Statistics This section describes the T1 E1 group statistics T1 E1 Group Performance Statistics The T1 E1 Group Performance screen lists the following statistics If an expansion module is installed in slot 9 group 1 is not available for configuration In this case the T1 E1 group performance statistics will be listed beginning with group 2 Running Seconds The amount of time in seconds since the IMA group has been in operat
262. ne Coding LBO Serial Clock Front panel LEDs 1 3 Data rates ATM support Timing Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Class of Service T1 DSX Elconnector type Connector type at end of V 35 RS 366 cable continued 1 HD 60 pin DCE or DTE female V 35 RS 449 EIA530 through cable converters Transparent HDLC SDLC Frame Relay ATM DXI AAL5 DCE or DTE Internal or external smooth clock VC level dual leaky bucket 56 Kbps to 6 Mbps 56 Kbps 6 Mbps 50 ft 8 Mbps Smooth clocks on transmit and receive lines to DTE MOLEX 60 pin female 35 pin Winchester female for DCE male for DTE DB 37 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE DB 25 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE DB 15 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE 2 1direct T1 DSX E1 1 DSU CSU RJ48 100 Ohms D4 or ESF AMI or B8ZS 0 to 655 ft HD pin V 35 RS 449 EIA530 X 21 DCE Internal ALARM Inservice n x 56 Kbps or n x 64 Kbps structured n 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 24 or 1 544 Mbps unstructured CAS CCS support with dynamic bandwidth allocation AAL1 ATM CES 2 0 Looped system adaptive SRTS 24 ms T1 DSX 32 ms E1 CBR RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter DB 25 subminiature female for DCE male for DTE PathBuilder S310 Specifications 221 Table 16 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications continued VOICE COMPRESSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports 1 Interface type s 1direct T1 DSX E1 T1 DS
263. nel Signaling earlier in this chapter You can also set the Payload Size Type to Data to configure CCS common channel signaling but this is not the preferred method The recommended method for configuring CCS is to set the CBR Port Mode to Structured Data For details see Setting up a PRI PBX Tie Line earlier in this chapter Onhook Detection Enables or disables onhook detection When you enable onhook detection bandwidth is automatically reallocated based on the detection of an on hook condition as specified by the signaling type Signaling Type The signaling application type No Signaling E amp M PLAR FXO LoopStart FXS LoopStart or FXO GroundStart for CBR T1 DSX R2 for CBR E1 You can only modify this field in structured voice mode In this mode you can select any signaling application type except No Signaling If you try to set the Signaling Type to No Signaling in structured voice mode you will get an error In structured unstructured data modes the Signaling Type defaults to No Signaling and cannot be modified V 35 Bandwidth serial port only Speed derived as n x 56 64K VC and VP Address Translation Configuring Virtual Circuits 151 Phone RS 366 templates only The destination phone number for the video associated virtual circuit You are prompted for this parameter only if you have set M ode to Dial When you enter this number the system runs a duplication check against the destination
264. networks To configure the default gateway 1 From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu select 3 Default Gateway Configuration to open the Default Gateway Configuration menu shown in Figure 50 Figure 50 Default Gateway Configuration Menu Fathieileer O50 Befeeht Esteu CoePigerstiss IF biers 152 87 Ee 1 het IF Shirer 2 Preeiees Hie Flaca taber a selection 1 te 2 2 E 2 Select 1 Set IP Address The system prompts you to enter an IP address 3 Enter the IP address of the router which you want to configure as the default gateway 4 Select 2 Previous Menu to return to the Manage IP Network Configuration menu 5 Select 4 Previous Menu to return to the System Administration menu 54 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Setting the Time and Date gt Setting up Passwords 1 To set the time and date It is important to set the time and date accurately because these settings provide the timestamp for alarms From the System Administration menu shown earlier in Figure 40 select 2 Manage Time and Date to open the Time and Date Configuration menu shown in Figure 51 Figure 51 Time and Date Configuration Menu EBET PalhBaddeer 1I10 Tim al bate Contigeration Hene bale ayes pi iint mses 54 1 Set Date Set Time a Previous Menu Please enter a selection 1 te 3 aj E Select 1 Set Date The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Date mm dd yy Enter the da
265. ning Tree Protocol information learned from the network on any port before it is discarded 6 to 40 seconds For further information on spanning tree and how it operates see Spanning Tree in Appendix B Configuring Source Protocol Filtering Source protocol filtering allows the bridge to filter out packets with certain protocols You can use this type of filtering to prevent certain type of protocol traffic from being bridged across the ATM network Protocols such as IPX and AppleTalk for example can be filtered on the sending end This is useful in restricting your local Novell network or AppleTalk data traffic from being transmitted on long distance ATM links thereby saving bandwidth and providing security To configure source protocol filtering From the Bridge menu select 3 Source Protocol Filtering to open the Source Protocol Filter menu shown in Figure 95 Figure 95 Source Protocol Filter Menu Atelest 162672 PEE Connect d uina jap Ei testa Fathibellaer itti lim MN ETHEEEHET flet Bridge Tretep ieee Prebecel Filter Pimler ieerce ddrecs Filter Biradis Bertisstioa birer Filter Fitlt a Tet Demet Fretecel Filter Set ibai fires Filter 2 het Bestiesties berets Filter Preia Hee re Flac ater a selection 1 te amp t f The current statuses of the source protocol filters are listed at the top of the menu Yes indicates that packets with that protocol will be rejected No ind
266. nn innnan 1 000 Eyr BEEFY begs te eerigete EHTEE te cat EX te ge beck f te seer chee 2 To enter a new shaper value use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move to the cell in the shaper table that you want to change The range for the shapers is 56 Kbps to 16 66 Mbps To set anew Sustainable Cell Rate or Peak Cell Rate shaper enter the new value in the bits second bps column The system automatically calculates the cells second cps based on the value you enter To set anew Maximum Burst Size shaper enter the new value in the cells column The system automatically calculates the bits based on the value you enter Configuring the CTX CTX configuration involves managing buffers and managing shapers To open the CTX Menu 1 From the Configuration Management menu in Figure 59 select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 2 Select 2 CTX to open the CTX menu shown in Figure 63 Configuring CTX Shapers Figure 63 CTX Menu Pathiellaer IHi CIL Meow Happ IAHT Habit Barres opp CIL effer Cees Tiaa BE Statistics by Ihip Sew BE Poetastics Ep errr rerit Hees Flece weber a telection 1 te amp E From the CTX menu you access the submenus and screens from which you perform buffer and shaper configuration as described in the following subsections The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch supports 10 peak rate shapers The shapers are separated into ten vir
267. nsmitted frames at this port AALS Errors ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 Error counter Discarded Congested Frames The total number of congested frames discarded at this port Congested frames are frames that were not transmitted due to link congestion SIM LMI Statistics The LMI Statistics screen lists the following statistics Received LMI Frames Total number of frames received at this port Discarded LMI Frames Total number of frames discarded at this port LIV Full Status Timeouts Number of Link Integrity Verification LIV timeouts for the User Side Transmit LIV Requests Number of Link Integrity Verification LIV Requests transmitted for the User Side Receive LIV Responses Number of Link Integrity Verification LIV Responses received for the User Side Transmit Full Status Requests Number of Full Status Requests transmitted for the User Side Receive Full Status Responses Number of Full Status Responses received for the User Side Loss of Seq Num Sync Number of Sequence Number Synchronized Losses for the User Side The number of alarm events generated when the sequence numbers between polling and polled units are not matched Receive Unconfigured PVCs Number of unconfigured PVCs received for the User Side Last statistics reset date The date on which LM I statistics were last reset Last statistics reset time The time at which LM I statistics were last reset Etherne
268. nto operation Configure the system clock s Set up communication parameters Set the time and date Set up passwords The following subsections provide instructions for performing the four initial configuration steps See Chapter 4 for instructions on configuring specific PathBuilder S330 S310 ports and modules By default the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch uses the internal clock as its reference clock You can manage the system clock in the following ways m Specify the clock sources to be used for system timing You can specify up to eight prioritized clock sources including multiple ports of the same interface a Specify the clock mode revertive or non revertive a revertive mode only Set the revertive time the length of time the system monitors the highest priority system clock source before either reverting to it if is has become operative or continuing to use a lower priority clock source 46 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED To manage the system clock 1 From the main menu select 1 System Administration to open the System Administration menu shown in Figure 40 Figure 40 System Administration M enu J Taa W67 67 200 35d Fathiellaer 0530 prin Bed trace 1 Geeerel prtom efermastios 2 Haag Tie aa Bate F Happ Spsten Clack 4 ES 2t Fert Caafigeration Eepert Fires Persie nemo Firmat Ta Epirte Flash File fyrion brist laterfoce Card Tep Egipat Last 10 taper Bier Privilege 11 Freripe
269. nu Enter ATM Payload Scramble 1 No 2 Yes When you type a selection number and press Enter payload scrambling is disabled or enabled and the prompt is cleared If the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch detects an alarm condition an alarm indicator the highlighted word Alarm appears to the left of the access status on every menu and display as shown in Figure 39 Performing Initial System Configuration 45 Figure 39 Alarm Indicator Fatheileer 430 aed ir E t Heise Hrag 2 Tpsten Siete CeeFigeration Hamaqemrat Falt Hesegenest herhertaett Haag Exit iA dir di hh Fiesp eater a selectiss 1 te 5 f reverse video indicates that an alarm condition has been detected After you acknowledge the alarm the alarm indicator is no longer highlighted but the word Alarm remains in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate that an alarm has been acknowledged When the alarm is acknowledged and the condition that caused the alarm is cleared the indicator disappears entirely If a menu indicates that an alarm has been acknowledged and a new alarm occurs the Alarm indicator is highlighted again See Managing System Alarms in Chapter 5 for instructions on acknowledging alarms Performing Initial System Configuration Configuring the System Clock mh WN Pe After you install the PathBuilder 330 S310 hardware you must complete the following four steps in order to put the unit i
270. nu 69 Figure 59 Configuration Management M enu A Telent 152 67 2H1 305 Coraci Ect arna bein Eai Eea Fathbeileer 530 Gfirst Hasageneet Has Harp CE Homage Circeit Hap Fiep Haag IP eer TH Hamege Fides Fisl Habt LF Hetwerk CeaFigeratien Perio Hee MO de hht Flerse tater lectis 1 te 7 T i Using the List Card The List Card menu shown in Figure 60 lists the shelf and all installed interfaces Menu To open the List Card menu 1 From the main menu select 2 Configuration Management 2 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card Select 0 Shelf from the List Card menu to view configuration information for the shelf The Shelf Configuration screen is a read only screen that displays the Hardware Revision and Serial Number The remaining options 1 and above on the List Card menu open menus that allow you to configure specific modules and ports The following sections tell you how to perform the specific configurations available from the List Card menu If you install the optional four port IMA expansion card in slot 9 the software i gt shows an eight port T1 E1 UNI IMA card in slot 3 For slot 3 on the List Card menu both columns Actual Card Type and Configured Card Type list eight port IMA For slot 9 the Actual Card Type column lists four port IMA and the Configured Card Type column is blank 70 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORT
271. nu appears as shown in above in Figure 109 Select 4 Port 4 V 35 to open the CBR T1 DSX E1 V35 Configuration menu Figure 113 shows the CBR E1 V35 Configuration menu The CBR T1 DSX V 35 Configuration menu is the same gt Fathiei leer 0530 alma MEN bletey FertEl CHE ET TE Geer igre HT plek fmger letereel Cele IF Hear EE Cik isari latermal RTS CTS WES BGR OFF GFF OFF BFF elecbed FIU Charly Meee Mi tptiea Farce fe CPR fptiees Faeroe i iia States Get ef dereice Seeratios States fet f Service Set SET Cih feerce 6 tet Mal Tim het HE Clak beer T Bet HE pete Set STE Citi itait Set Cid bptien het SEE Clak Face Contre Det Sinin Feat Set E H Heie 10 Frerisar Haa Fleawe tabir a selection 1 te i io E The Selected DSO Channels listed at the top of the CBR Serial Port Configuration menu initially lists None After you build a virtual circuit on the CBR serial port this listing updates automatically to reflect the DSO channels selected for the circuit 4 Set the following port configuration parameters as desired SCT Clock Source The type of input clock service configured for the port interface Recovered A non required network wide synchronization technique used to regenerate the input service clock Adaptive timing uses a buffer depth indicator at the receiver to adjust the line rate the fuller the buffer the faster the line rate the emptier the buffer the slower the l
272. o dial These interfaces are broken out from a 50 pin connector on the S330 S310 switch via a Y cable Use the V 35 RS 366 serial CBR connector to connect directly to H 320 video codec devices such as PictureTel Vtel and CLI CBR Module LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the CBR module See Figure 30 a Inservice green Powers up in the off state and illuminates when you set the administrative status of the T1 DSX E1 or serial port to In Service See Configuring the CBR Module in Chapter 4 for details about how to set the administrative status of the ports on the CBR module ALARM red Powers up in the off state and illuminates when an alarm condition is detected on the corresponding T1 DSX E1 or V 35 line Figure 30 CBR Module LEDs Alarm Installation Procedures 35 Connecting to the Voice Compression Module The voice compression module provides an RJ 48 DSX interface for T1 DSX E1 traffic Line Build Outs LBOs to DSX of up to 655 feet are supported You must configure the LBOs in the VCM Port Configuration Menu See Configuring the Voice Compression Module in Chapter 4 for details You can typically make local connections to DTE equipment without DSU CSUs as long as the equipment supports a direct T1 DSX E1 interface and can recover a T1 DSX E1 signal If you are using a G70
273. o perform the test procedure Test Pattern The pattern to be looped back in the test procedure 0 254 Test Procedure Enables or disables the test procedure When the test procedure is enabled the test pattern is sent out on the designated test link and then looped back on the other links in the group Admin Status The administrative status of the group In Service or Out of Service 9 Select 11 Previous Menu 10 If desired repeat steps 5 8 to set up another IMA group Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 85 Viewing and Modifying IMA and UNI Groups Once you have added a group you use the List M odify Group menu to view and modify group configuration parameters To view and or modify an existing group From the Group menu shown in Figure 70 select 1 List M odify Group to open the List M odify Group Selection menu Enter the number corresponding to the group you want to view or modify to open the List M odify Group menu for that group Figure 76 shows the List M odify Group menu for an IMA group The List M odify Group menu for a UNI group is similar but it lists only the parameters you can set for UNI groups Admin Ports and Admin Status Figure 76 Modifying an Existing IMA Group Fathiei leer 30 flares ERP biel Greepe PI FHI steer eee binja Fert s i ts iHa id PEE pratista fertis Test Link ket celeb Frame Leegth 17 fells Test Fathers eet selecbhed Haz Lied bilip AOH 35 Itet Prebha biribiri
274. o view more detailed information about a specific virtual circuit enter the VC of the circuit you want to view from the List Virtual Circuit Summary screen to open the List Virtual Circuit Detail screen This screen displays the complete list of parameters for both sides of the selected circuit Figure 141 shows a representative List Virtual Circuit detail screen Figure 141 List Virtual Circuit Detail Screen Sea aT ee Fathellder 5530 Glas OENE Last Firtesl Circeits Ciremit Type Redcat Por Bescriptiss terteirceits iia States ie sereice DletiPertitard SATIH DletGresp Card pi BH 4 leberwerkiog Hee He Beceier FFL Oe bape StartEed Frant tlag HCl 1816 Iranit RCE oe Emcaprelstipa Mee Hie Frisrite 3 CLF ELF 1 Birect 2 hirect Early Ptit Bitcard dikk thertyEed FE MLCT 18M8 FECH te EFCI Happisg Ha fhaper Heber 10a TERE Frieritg 4 Early Farket Biscard 1055 Frets aay keg te coatioer i Viewing Virtual Circuits by Port or Group To view a summary of existing virtual circuits for a selected port or group From the Configuration Management menu select 2 Manage Circuit to open the Virtual Circuit menu shown earlier in Figure 119 From the Virtual Circuit menu select 6 Access Virtual Circuits by Port Group to open the Access VCs by Port Group Selection menu shown in Figure 142 This menu lists the ports and groups on the chassis for which virtual circuits have been defined and the number of VC sides a
275. oad new firmware a Update the flash file system a Reset the interface card a View an equipment list 60 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS The following subsections describe these System Administration menu options See Chapter 3 for information about the options related to initial configuration configuring the system clock setting communication parameters setting the time and date and changing the default password Figure 55 System Administration M enu Pathieilaer IHi eben Bed tree Sere Pesce beret Haag Tle b Bate Happ estes Cleck ES e Pert Ceafigeration Beet Fimme Fersiee hele Firmat prte Flach File fester bet latifa Card Seow Egipat List taper er Prieilege erie Hrag 1 4 4 5 T 1 i 1 Fler tater p letis 1 t 11 11 Specifying General General system information includes the following System Information Shelf name m Customer name m Phone number a Maintenance contact a Location m Auto logout time To specify or change general system information 1 From the System Administration menu select 1 General System Information to open the General System Information menu shown in Figure 56 This menu displays the current system information and provides options that allow you to change the current settings 2 Select the option corresponding to the setting you want to change A prompt appears at the bottom
276. oftware button names Examples From the Help menu select Contents Click OK Product name Throughout this guide the SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and 310 WAN access switches are referred to as the PathBuilder 330 S310 switches Related Documentation In addition to this guide the following documents may help you use the PathBuilder 330 S310 WAN access switch a PathBuilder S330 S310 Release Notes These notes provide information about the system software release including new features and any known limitations and issues found in the release They also provide information about any changes in the PathBuilder S330 S310 documentation a PathBuilder Switch M anager User Guide This guide describes how to use PathBuilder Switch M anager to configure and manage PathBuilder WAN access switches Using PathBuilder Switch M anager you can configure shelf device and circuit information use a loopback panel to diagnose port cards view line and interface statistics and perform administrative functions such as configuring trap destinations and setting SNMP community strings eee lt e e t SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This chapter describes the SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder S330 S310 switch and lists PathBuilder S330 and PathBuilder S310 system specifications It contains the following sections a PathBuilder S330 S310 Overview a A
277. ollowing sections describe the card statistics provided for each type of card Viewing MCPU Card Statistics Viewing T1 E1 UNI with IMA Card Statistics Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 187 To view MCPU statistics From the Card Statistics menu shown earlier in Figure 161 select the option corresponding to the MCPU to open the MCPU Performance menu Select 1 MCPU Performance to view M CPU performance statistics or 2 ATM Inband to view in band statistics You can view T1 E1 UNI with IMA statistics for ports or for groups To view T1 E1 statistics From the Card Statistics menu shown earlier in Figure 161 select the option corresponding to the T1 E1 UNI with IMA module to open the T1 E1 UNI Performance menu Select 1 Port Link Performance Management to view port statistics or 2 Group Performance Management to view group statistics Enter the number corresponding to the port or group for which you want to view statistics Select the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view a Port statistics PHY Physical Performance Monitoring a UNI Link ATM Statistics available only when port is not part of an IMA group a IMA Link Performance Monitoring available only when port is part of an IMA group a IMA Link ATM Statistics available only when port is part of an IMA group Group statistics a Group Performance Monitoring available only for IMA groups Group ATM Statistics The fo
278. oming off the ATM network Spanning Tree Filtering The first bridging operation determines if the packet is to be processed and transmitted across the bridge or filtered out based on the list of protocols and addresses input as part of the PathBuilder 330 S310 configuration Filtering gives you control over who communicates with whom in the network The CPU reads the header of each packet to determine the protocol source address and destination address and then looks in the list to see if the packet should be passed through the bridge If it is to be filtered out it is cleared from memory Spanning tree IEEE 802 1d is a technique that detects loops in a network and logically blocks the redundant paths ensuring that only one route exists between any two LANs It eliminates the duplication of packets and provides fault tolerance for resilient networks As the spanning tree is being constructed bridges exchange information which is transmitted in packets called configuration bridge protocol data units C BPDUs During this process the Spanning Tree Algorithm and Protocol STAP elects a root bridge in order to establish a stable spanning tree topology The root bridge determines the spanning tree topology and controls which bridges block packets and which forward packets Once the topology is stable all STAP bridges listen for special Hello C BPDUs transmitted from the root bridge at regular intervals usually every two seconds
279. on 251 Spanning Tree Configuration menu 106 spanning tree frames Ethernet bridge statistic 198 spanning tree operation spanning tree parameter 106 specifications 9 14 213 AC DC power 25 CBRmodule 216 217 220 221 DS3 E3 module 217 Ethernet 10 100 module 217 221 Ethernet interface 215 219 management interface 214 219 motherboard 214 219 OC3 STM 1 interface 215 310 218 system S330 213 214 218 T1 E1 UNI interface 215 219 voice compression module VCM 217 221 Specify Virtual Circuit menu 113 114 speed video dial parameter 163 statistics ATM VC 196 ATM VC serial port 196 bridge filtering 199 CBR 201 Ethernet 198 199 Ethernet ATM 201 IP over ATM 200 LMI 197 management CPU MCPU 187 OC3 ATM 1 path 192 OC3 STM 1 ATM 193 OC3 STM 1 far line 191 OC3 STM 1 far path 192 OC3 STM 1 line 191 OC3 STM 1 section 191 performance 185 serial port 195 serial port DXI 196 serial port Frame Relay 196 serial port HDLC 195 spanning tree 200 T1 E1 UNI Interface 187 VCM 203 VCM port activity 206 viewing Ethernet card 197 virtual circuit 206 virtual circuit by buffer 209 virtual circuit by circuit 206 virtual circuit by port group 208 virtual circuit by shaper 208 status video dial parameter 163 structured dataDBA 262 structured mode 121 258 259 as opposed to unstructured 264 effects on transit DS1 265 structured voice DBA 262 subnet mask IP over ATM parameter 115 MCPU virtual circuit parameter 150 set
280. on either manually or automatically via the RS 366 interface For details see Starting Video Dial up Sessions later in this section 3 End the session either manually or automatically via the V 35 interface For details see Ending Video Dial up Sessions later in this section Starting Video Dial up Sessions A video dial up session starts connects automatically when someone dials a number matching one of the numbers in the call routing table one of the numbers associated with an RS 366 virtual circuit template on a video keypad You create the call routing table by building virtual circuits between PathBuilder 330 310 CBR modules For details about building video virtual circuits see Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates earlier in this chapter For details about viewing the call routing table see Viewing the Video Call Routing Table later in this section You can also start connect a video dial up session manually To do this 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 5 Manage Video Dial to open the Manage Video Dial menu shown earlier in Figure 144 2 From the Manage Video Dial menu select 2 Manually Connect Dial A Site to open the Manually Connect A Site menu shown in Figure 145 The current connection status is displayed at the top of the menu Figure 145 Manually Connect A Site Menu of Telsat 195 97 64 10 CITI Connect Ect enna bain ran Fathbel lier TFIO len EEE Mase
281. on to earth The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch will auto configure for 115 VAC or 220 240 VAC North American Applications Use a UL Listed and CSA Certified Cord Set rated 6 amps consisting of a minimum 18 AWG Type SVT or SJT three conductor cord maximum of 15 feet in length with a NEMA 5 15P plug a International Applications The power supply cords used with this equipment should be harmonized with all local standards applicable in the country in which it is installed Safety agency compliance requires this unit to be connected to branch circuits with overcurrent protection lt 20A for North American applications and lt 10A for international applications The power supply cord must be disconnected when servicing all components or subsystems EMI a FCC This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant with Part 15 of the FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference These tests were conducted
282. onding to the slot in which the Voice Compression module is installed 7 or 8 to assign the VCM to side A of the circuit The Add Virtual Circuit screen displays the selected slot number and port type lists the parameters you will enter for side A of the circuit and prompts you to set the first parameter as shown in Figure 131 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen pressing Enter after each entry Default values are listed in square brackets at the end of each prompt Your settings are added to list of parameters at the top of the screen as you enter them You must enter a setting for all the parameters for which you are prompted in order to add a circuit Press Delete to back up to a previous selection CAUTION For voice compression circuits select the Shaper Number corresponding to the maximum shaper value typically Shaper Number 15 Figure 131 Configuring Side A of A VCM VCC Virtual Circuit Fathiellaer 0530 Oe Firtesl Circeit Cirit Typer MH WE Percriptiss terbcirceits SIPE Shetihert tard 4 H BLE EHBAHCE 10STE Frierity Early Pecket Piprandi Eater Shag Heer 19588 ee ods ee oe ae eee Re he ee eed PSH a PSH Pd Se ee 1S a ed PIH nd 1 et st H die Pub OSES DEA AP SEE ed A de 1 9 lll When you have entered a setting for each parameter the Add Virtual Screen again displays the list of PathBuilder S 330 S310 modules and ports by slot number and prompts you to enter a slo
283. onfiguration menu shown in Figure 88 This menu displays the LM I configuration and provides options that allow you to change certain parameters Figure 88 SIM LMI Configuration Menu Fathiei leer 0530 flares ERPS FlstES Fert TIH LHI Grafipm rtis Pretecel gF Prete kidirertisrl iar LIF Felliag Tire Ti 10 Hite FO Timer TF2 ta Boer Ff Fellieg Cometer HF tek Errer Threshold HFFE F Gar Errer Taratheld HPT Hiei HE Coat HP amp Erer HE Geet HFPE End te codl LHI Fiseled Set Frell Set Freebie t fet Beer LIV Peleg Timer TH Set fear Fi Pelliag Cemater HF Bet Beer Erre Threthi CHER Set Goer HE Camat HE het Hoek FF Timer TF Set Hie Errer Threcheld HRT E Htwk HE feet HERE Ei ti LHI 11 Previa Hee Ja 2 F 4 Fa Fa Fa 10 Flee eater s selecties 1 te 41 11 ff 5 Change the following parameters as desired Protocol The protocol specified for the Status Enquiry procedure none q 933a or t1 617d Procedure Specifies whether the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch will be designated as the user side the network side or bidirectional in the periodic polling performed between Frame Relay devices User LIV Polling Timer T391 The time interval in seconds at which Status Enquiry occurs for link integrity verification LIV polling 5 180 This parameter applies only when the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is designated as the user side unit Set the Us
284. onfiguring UNI and IMA Groups 80 Adding UNI Groups 80 Adding IMA Groups 82 Viewing and Modifying IMA and UNIGroups 85 Deleting IMA and UNI Groups 85 Viewing IMA Link Status 86 Viewing IMA Group Status 89 Configuring the T1 E1 Card 92 Configuring the OC3 STM 1 Port 93 Configuring the DS3 E3 UNIModule 94 Configuring the Serial Interface 96 Configuring the Serial Port 96 Configuring the SIM Local Management Interface 98 Configuring the Serial Card 101 Configuring the Ethernet Interface 102 Configuring the Ethernet Interface 102 Configuring the Bridge 103 Configuring the Spanning Tree 105 Configuring Source Protocol Filtering 106 Configuring Source Address Filtering 108 Configuring Destination Address Filtering 109 Viewing the List Forwarding Table 110 Constructing the Bridge Static Table 111 Configuring IP over ATM 112 Configuring the Ethernet 10 100 Module 116 Configuring the CBR Module 117 Configuring the CBR T1 DSX E1 Port s 118 DSO Trunk Conditioning 123 Configuring the CBR Serial Port 123 Configuring the CBR Card 126 Configuring the Voice Compression Module 126 Configuring VCM DSO Channels 127 Delay and Echo Cancellation 129 Configuring the VCM T1 E1 Port 129 Configuring the VCM Card 131 Configuring Virtual Circuits 132 Supported Classes of Virtual Circuits 132 Adding Virtual Circuits 133 Adding PVC Virtual Circuits 134 Configuring CBR Circuits for DBA 138 Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates 140 Defining RS 366 L
285. onnector Pinouts in Appendix A In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this chapter the following LEDs indicate the status of the four port IMA module s T1 E1 ports See Figure 34 ALRT Indicates that an alarm is present on the port a ACT Indicates that the port is active Figure 34 Four Port IMA Module LEDs LINE 5678 OOOO ALRT OOOOACT Expansion slot 9 shares the same queue queue 1 as the group 1 IMA UNI therefore if an expansion module DS3 E3 UNI or four port IMA is installed in slot 9 the system deletes group 1 and all corresponding virtual circuits on startup and generates an information only alarm Furthermore you cannot add group 1 if an expansion module is installed in slot 9 either in the chassis or in the database If you enter a card type for slot 9 via the List Card menu group 1 and the corresponding virtual circuits are not deleted until the system is restarted Step 5 Connect the Management Terminal Installation Procedures 39 In order to configure application connections and an IP address for SNM P support you must connect a management terminal to the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch as follows Connect a VT 100 terminal to the RS 232 console port on the front of the PathBuilder S330 S310 Use the VT100 terminal to input an IP address for the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch See Setting up Communication Parameters in Ch
286. options Figure 155 DS3 UNI Loopback Options DS3 Interface Network Side Bus Side lt lt Network Card gt Network Line Local Card The E3 module supports the following loopbacks Local Card Loops the transmit E3output on the receive side All cells coming from the E3 port card are looped through the backplane and back to the E3 port card The transmitted data will continue to go on the output Network Line Loops the E3 received data back on the output side after the digital data has been recovered Netw ork Card Loops the E3 received cell payload back toward the line output Figure 156 illustrates the loopbacks for the E3 module 182 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS CBR Loopbacks Setting VCM Loopbacks Figure 156 E3 Loopback Options E3 Interface Network Side Network Card Local Line Payload The following loopbacks are available for the CBR module Network Line Loops the T1 DSX received data back on the output side after the digital data has been recovered Local Card Loops the transmit T1 DSX output on the receive side the transmitted data will continue to go on the output Network Card Loops the T1 DSX received payload back toward the line output Figure 157 illustrates the CBR T1 DSX loopbacks Figure 157 CBR Loopback CBR Interface Network Side Network Card Local L
287. or configure for autosensing The DS3 E3 module provides a DS3 or E3 interface typically used for terminating accessing the public or private ATM WAN services However depending on your local applications you can also use these modules for taking local DS3 or E3 ATM traffic across the WAN The four port IMA expansion card adds four ports to the T1 E1 UNI with IMA interface thereby providing the PathBuilder S330 with 8 port IMA functionality Figure 1 shows the PathBuilder S330 switch with the optional CBR module installed in expansion slot 7 VCM in slot 8 and DS3 E3 UNI module in slot 9 Figure 1 PathBuilder S330 WAN Access Switch Video Audio Codec PBX PBX paa Pi mx T V 35 E1 T1 DSX E1 RS 449 RS 366 T1 DSX SX RS 530 X 21 Network 10BASE T nxT1 E1 IMA NMS Console Gee OC3 STM 1 o A PathBuilder S310 The PathBuilder S310 switch is a feature restricted version of the PathBuilder 330 Features switch useful for providing remote site CPE access Its physical appearance is the same as that of the PathBuilder S330 switch but its software does not enable all the ports You can upgrade from the PathBuilder S310 switch to the PathBuilder 330 switch multi mode fiber model simply by purchasing software The PathBuilder S310 base platform offers the following features a Single T1 E1 UNI
288. or the PathBuilder 330 S310 on the VT100 terminal you can continue configuring the device on the local console or you can use a Telnet session to configure the device on a TCP IP workstation To configure local host IP parameters From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu select 1 Local Host IP Configuration to open the Local Host IP Configuration menu shown in Figure 45 lOption 2 PCI Ethernet Port IP Configuration appears on the Local Host IP Configuration menu only if you have installed an optional Ethernet 10 100 module 50 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Figure 45 Local Host IP Configuration Menu Fathiei leer 0 30 flares Eee Lerel Best IF ConFigerstiss 1 Etkerert Fert IF Cyafigrm ete 2 PEI Etheeract Fert IF CenfFigeration 3 Spey IF ComFiger ation Chumpe h Presis Hee Flaca taber a selection 1 te amp a E MARHIHG Chae A Letal Bek s IP aires cel feet mach taie eFFect salp Fier item F eer is pelecbe aed taberei 2 Select either 1 Ethernet Port IP Configuration or 2 PCI Ethernet Port IP Configuration available only if you have installed the optional Ethernet 10 100 module depending on whether you want to configure the Ethernet 1OBASE T or 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet interface a f you are configuring the 1OBASE T Ethernet interface select 1 Ethernet Port IP Configuration to open the Ethernet Port IP Configuration menu shown in Figure 46 a f you have installed the optional Ethernet 10 10
289. or type Data support ATM support Shaping Forwarding rate T1 UNI Interface Number of ports Type of interface Connector type Line Framing Line Coding ATM framing ATM support LBO Electrical interface Attenuation Payload scrambling continued RISC 360 MHz Flash EPROM 8 MB DRAM 16 MB Power Status Alert Tx Rx Link TD RD Alert Active RS 232C Female DB 9 1 VC level dual leaky bucket 56 Kbps to 16 6 Mbps RJ45 10BASE T IEEE 802 3 Bridging with filtering spanning tree RFC 1483 LLC_SNAP RFC 1577 2225 IP over ATM AAL5 peak rate Greater than 7000 pps 1 T1 or E1 UNI with integral CSU and DSX RJ48C or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter ESF SF D4 or No Framing for T1 G 703 704 for E1 B8ZS for T1 AMI for special applications HDB3 for E1 HEC ITU T G 804 1 432 T1 E1 UNI 0 7 5 15 0 22 5 dB CSU 0 to 655 ft DSX CSU DSX 0 7 5 15 dB Yes Table 16 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications continued Serial Interface Number of ports Interface type Data support ATM support Clock Shaping Data rates Minimum Maximum Maximum cable length Clock outputs Connector type on unit Connector type on V 35 cable converter Connector type on RS 422 cable converter Connector type on EIA530 cable converter Connector type on X 21 cable converter CBR MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports Interface type s T1 DSX E1 physical Impedance Framing Li
290. ority 2 clock becomes operative If the priority 2 clock fails the priority 3 clock becomes operative and so on Select 1 Set Clock Mode and set the clock mode to one of the following In general it is good practice to set the clock mode to Revertive particularly if you have designated only one network clock as clock sources If you have designated two or more network clocks as clock sources you may want to consider setting the clock mode to Non Revertive Revertive If the priority 1 clock fails and the priority 2 or higher clock becomes Operative the system reverts to the priority 1 clock if this clock source becomes valid again within the specified Revertive Time For details about setting the Revertive Time see step 5 Non Revertive If the priority 1 clock fails and the priority 2 clock or higher becomes operative the system does not revert to the priority 1 clock if this clock source becomes valid again In Non Revertive mode only you can switch manually to the priority 1 clock source or the highest valid clock source To do this select 11 Set SysClk to Highest Priority from the System Clock Configuration menu Revertive mode only Select 2 Set Revertive Time and specify the length of time 10 900 seconds the system will monitor the priority 1 clock source before either reverting to it if the clock source becomes valid again or continuing to use a lower priority clock source For the PathBuilder 330 S
291. ou are not troubleshooting the channel turn off the loopback Working with History Alarms Managing System Alarms 177 All alarms and information events are captured and kept in an alarm history file in the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch This file can hold up to 300 events it fills on a first in first out basis We recommend that you routinely view the alarm history file before events are lost We also recommend that you print the file for comparison with previous history files and entry into your maintenance log Viewing and Printing History Alarms To view and print an alarm history From the main menu select 3 Fault Management to open the Fault Management menu shown in Figure 148 Select 3 Display History Alarms to view the alarm history Figure 150 shows a sample alarm history Figure 150 Sample Alarm History Display Fathiei leer 30 alma Eee Ripley Bistery AeA ad twa Set Fart berere Elre ed lefa CRE T HEPA OD D1381 Hee Oo DI tard betel ipari lara BEHE fe Pe DN mats HEPA AAG tard betel ipari HEF ERO Wels Here oo CREE Cellist Farity Failed lefe FH HEFERF OR Hitl Hey Go Card bres figersd lefe EHET HEF PAO Mlit Gee oo Card braaf ipari HEHE HeFPR OA Beds Hee BA l Pres hitan Errer lefe TIH 5 HEF PRO Mets Heo D Card bees Figen Press Est Fer previews meme oor H For eert page ff If the history file cannot be displayed on one page the Display History Alarm screen will include a prompt to
292. ou want to view statistics Voice Compression Module Performance Monitoring Statistics The VCM Performance Monitoring screens display the following statistics ES The number of errored seconds ESs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface SES The number of severely errored seconds SESs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface SEFS The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface UAS The number of unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface CSS The number of controlled slip seconds CSSs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface PCV The number of path coding violations PCVs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface LES The number of line errored seconds LESs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface BES The number of bursty errored seconds BESs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface DM The number of degraded minutes DMs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface LCV The number of line coding violations LCVs encountered by the VCM T1 DSX E1 interface Voice Compression Module VC Statistics Voice compression module VC statistics are frame and byte counts since the last counter reset On the VCM VC Statistics window you can reset the counter by entering c VC statistics are displayed as a list rather than a table The VCM T1 DSX and VCM E1 VC Statistics screens display the following statist
293. parameters for the LAN and ATM routers that will pass the IP traffic across the ATM network a Select 5 Configure LAN Router to open the IP over ATM LAN Router Configuration menu shown in Figure 106 Figure 106 P over ATM LAN Router Configuration M enu ofl Taas 157 67 ZHL Conai Edi omna Help i Fathiei leer 30 flares FPS ENRERMET ist IF peer AIH LEH Eoeter Ceri IF b res 152 6725020 Depart Masks 157 67 S08 i Sat IF Biret E Tet Thart Mask 3 Prewiens Haa Flere weber celection 1 te 4 3 f b Set the following parameters The IP address of the LAN router should be on the same subnet as the IP addresses of the ATM router and the local host IP Address The IP address of the LAN router that will pass the IP traffic across the ATM network Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the LAN router that will pass the IP traffic across the ATM network c Select 3 Previous Menu to return to the IP over ATM menu d Select 6 Configure ATM Router to open the IP over ATM ATM Router Configuration menu This menu is the same as the IP over ATM LAN Router Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 106 except that it displays and allows you to set parameters for the ATM router rather than the LAN router e Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the ATM router f Select 3 Previous Menu to return to the IP over ATM menu 6 Enable or disable IP over ATM a Select 2 Enable Disable IP over ATM to open the
294. phone numbers that have already been entered No calling plan is enforced and the length of the destination phone numbers you enter for different virtual circuits can vary When the destination phone number is dialed either automatically through the RS 366 interface or manually through the terminal or SNMP interface the virtual circuit is activated Tel Channels T1 DSX E1 ports only Telco channels the associated DSOs which have been assigned to the specified ATM VC connection All available DSO channels are automatically allocated in unstructured mode In structured mode the DSO channels are bit coded with each bit representing one DSO channel You can assign DSO channels in structured mode only Channel conflicts within a T1 E1 port interface will result in an error If you are using CAS channel associated signaling you must build a virtual circuit for each DSO you will use Mode T1 DSX E1 ports only The mode for the DSX 1 E1 CBR structured data circuit Normal The circuit is configured as a standard PVC circuit and does not listen to video signals RS366 The circuit is put into an active listener mode it listens for video signals from premises devices DBA The circuit is configured to dynamically reassign the timeslot The Mode parameter appears only when you are configuring a virtual circuit on a DSX 1 E1 CBR port configured for Structured Data Voice Compression Module Virtual Circuit Parameters
295. ple This protocol mode converts the frame relay DLCI to a VP VC ATM connection A PathBuilder S330 S310 switch provides two interworking features to interconnect a Frame relay network with an ATM network m Service Interworking Network Interworking These interworking features are described in FRF 8 and FRF 5 respectively The major difference between these two features is that there is no FR SSCS function required for Service Interworking The following sections describe the details of these two interworking functions as well as the features provided by the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch Service Interw orking Function Figure 177 shows a PathBuilder S330 S310 switch providing Service Interworking function between Frame Relay and ATM services In this setup a Frame Relay DTE communicates with an ATM DTE regardless of the fact that there is a different type of DTE at each end of the connection Figure 177 Frame Relay ATM Service Interworking Connection FRF 8 Frame lq LAPD Frames Relay DTE ATM Pe Cells _p_ 330 S310 Network DTE Frame Aan Relay DTE bid Recon Ww Application Q 922 DL Core Application PHY Application Null SSCS Null SSCS Q 922 Q 922 AAL 5 AAL 5 DL Core DL Core SAR SAR ATM ATM PHY PHY PHY PHY 247 Serial Interface The interworking scheme s
296. pplication Support a Key Benefits PathBuilder S330 S310 Overview PathBuilder S330 Features gt The PathBuilder S330 WAN access switch provides cost effective T1 nxT1 or E1 nxEl1 connections between local campus and enterprise networks via private leased line or public carrier ATM services so you can extend high speed Internet access Frame Relay and ATM network service as well as voice and video out to your branch offices Using the built in ATM Forum standard based inverse multiplexing capabilities you can integrate voice video and high speed data services over the same WAN link The PathBuilder S330 and S310 switches use the same hardware but the PathBuilder S330 software allows more interfaces to be used The following subsections describe the features of each unit in greater detail The PathBuilder S330 base platform offers the following features T1 nxT1 ATM UNI or E1 nxE1 ATM UNI with up to four interfaces for aggregated high speed of 6M bps WAN access Each user to network interface UNI can be used alone or bundled into a group using the Inverse M ultiplexing for ATM IMA standard accommodating branch office growth from a single T1 E1 1 5 2 Mbps bandwidth to four T1s E1s 6 8 M bps With the optional 4 port IMA expansion card installed the PathBuilder 330 switch provides up to eight ports of T1 E1 UNI with IMA a The PathBuilder S330 switch allows up to 70 msec of differential delay between T1s E1s in
297. press n for the next page or press p for the previous page Use the print screen or other printing feature of your NMS station to print out each page of the history file Compare the printouts to your most previous records to see if there are any obvious trends such as more frequent alarms of a certain type which might require troubleshooting Clearing History Alarms After you have printed the alarm history you should clear the alarms so that they will no longer take up space in the alarm history file To clear history alarms 1 Return to the Fault Management menu 2 Select 4 Clear History Alarms 3 Enter y in response to the confirmation prompt to clear the history alarms 178 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Using Loopbacks gt gt Loopbacks allow you to check circuit continuity between one point and another You should use the PathBuilder S330 S310 loopback feature to check continuity to the nearest point first and if the circuit is valid to that point then loop to the next point If a circuit has been compromised isolating the problem between two points should help you identify and resolve the problem To access the loopback modes supported by the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch From the main menu select 3 Fault Management to open the Fault Management menu shown earlier in Figure 148 Select 5 Loopback from the Fault Management menu to open the Loopback menu shown i
298. ptional module through the card into the stand off post item 3 d Install the two screws in the optional module s faceplate item 4 24 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 10 Replace the unit s cover Step 2 Install the Unit in the Rack a Slide the cover back into place so that the five tabs go under the lip of the front panel arrow 1 and push it down at the rear arrow 2 as shown in Figure 18 Figure 18 Replacing the PathBuilder S330 S310 Cover b Secure the cover with the eight assembly screws you removed in step 1a In anormal rack mount configuration the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is 3 5 x 17 x 15 5 including cables Since the equipment is cooled with two internal fans clearance at the top is not needed however convection cooled equipment must not be mounted directly under the shelf Allow at least one rack unit clearance below the unit See Figure 19 for details If the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch is mounted in an enclosure plan on enough clearance at the front for cable and wiring service loops To mount the shelf Attach the rack mount ears to the unit following the instructions supplied with the ears CAUTION When attaching the rack mount ears you must use the factory supplied screws Using screws other than those supplied with the rack mount ears voids your warranty and could damage the PCB Adjust the rack mount ears if necessary for 19 installation See Figure 19 CAUTION Do not block the ventilation op
299. r Netw ork Supplier If you require additional assistance contact your network supplier M any suppliers are authorized 3Com service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of services including network planning installation hardware maintenance application training and support services When you contact your network supplier for assistance have the following information ready m Product model name part number and serial number a A list of system hardware and software including revision levels a Diagnostic error messages a Details about recent configuration changes if applicable If you are unable to contact your network supplier see the following section on how to contact 3Com Support from 3Com If you are unable to obtain assistance from the 3Com online technical resources or from your network supplier 3Com offers technical telephone support services To find out more about your support options please the 3Com technical telephone support phone number at the location nearest you When you contact 3Com for assistance have the following information ready a Product model name part number and serial number a A list of system hardware and software including revision levels a Diagnostic error messages a Details about recent configuration changes if applicable Here is a list of worldwide technical telephone support numbers Country Telephone Number Country Telephone Number Asia Pacific Rim Austral
300. r S330 base module thereby providing 8 port IMA support Install the four port IMA module in slot 9 Figure 10 shows the IMA expansion module connections Figure 10 Four port IMA Expansion Card Connections nx T1 E1 IMA ESD Precautions When installing plug in modules take the following precautions to prevent ESD electrostatic discharge from damaging the internal components of the PathBuilder S330 310 Always wear a properly grounded anti static wrist strap Transport static sensitive components in anti static packaging Keep static sensitive components in their anti static packaging until you are ready to install them Just before removing components from their anti static packaging discharge static electricity from your body by touching an unpainted metal surface When you remove modules from the shelf place them printed circuit side down on anonconducting static free flat surface Installation Procedures 19 Installing the Optional Modules in the Unit To install an optional module in the unit 1 Turn off the power and unplug the unit 2 Open the unit a Remove the eight screws three on each side and two in the rear as shown in Figure 11 Figure 11 Removing the Eight Screws from the PathBuilder 330 S310 Unit b Push the cover back arrow 1 and lift it up from the rear arrow 2 as shown in Figure 12 Figure 12 Removing the PathBuilder 330 S310 Cover 2
301. r with an ATM OC3 STM 1 UNI is connected to the WAN network typically the router OC3 STM 1 UNI does not support NLPID and requires mode 2 mapping so that the packet can be encapsulated to LLC SNAP Start End FR SSCS DLCI The starting and ending Frame Relay data link connection identifiers of the remote ATM Frame Relay host 16 991 FECN to EFC Mapping Defines the mapping of FECN incoming on Frame Relay to the outgoing ATM cell PTI congestion indicator Direct Mode 1 mapping matches FECN to the PTI CN bit When the serial port is in this mode it does not translate between Frame Relay NLPID encapsulation rather it sends it straight through the ATM network possibly onto a Frame Relay network or device Always 0 Mode 2 mapping This option sets the EFCI field to congestion not experienced Mode 2 is an operational method for indicating data congestion to either the ATM or Frame Relay network Mode 2 allows for translation between NLPID and LLC SNAP encapsulation It is used when connecting a Frame Relay device or network to a non Frame Relay device or network For example if the PathBuilder 330 switch is connecting a router FRAD over an ATM network public or private and at the other site a router with an ATM OC3 STM 1 UNI is connected to the WAN network typically the router OC3 STM 1 UNI does not support NLPID and requires mode 2 mapping so that the packet can be encapsulated to LLC SNAP DXI Virtual Circuit
302. ract 241 enforcing 71 traffic policing 71 translation encapsulation mode FRF 5 152 transmit full status requests LM I statistic 197 transmit LIV requests LM I statistic 197 transmit VCI OC3 STM 1 virtual circuit parameter 151 T1 E1 virtual circuit parameter 151 transmit VPI OC3 STM 1 virtual circuit parameter 151 T1 E1 virtual circuit parameter 151 transmitted bytes DXI statistic 196 Ethernet statistic 199 HDLC statistic 195 transmitted frames DXI statistic 196 Ethernet statistic 199 Frame Relay statistic 196 HDLC statistic 195 serial port ATM VC statistic 197 VCM VC statistic 205 transparent encapsulation mode FRF 8 152 Trap Client 1 Configuration menu 52 Trap Client Configuration menu 52 trap client parameters IP address 53 port number 53 subnet mask 53 trap clients configuring 52 trunk conditioning 119 123 tunneling unstructured 264 tx side A Ethernet ATM statistic 201 tx side B Ethernet ATM statistic 201 Tx active links IMA group parameter 92 Tx avable cell rate cps IMA group parameter 91 Tx bytes VCM port activity statistic 206 Tx cell rate IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group statistic 190 Tx cells IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group statistic 190 Tx configured links IMA group parameter 92 Tx UD IMA link parameter 89 T1 El parameter 80 Tx packets VCM port activity statistic 206 Tx timing ref link IMA group parameter 91 Tx vpi vci video dial parameter 163 Tx FC near end transm
303. raffic over the ATM network 112 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 104 Specify Virtual Circuit Menu Pathielleer 0530 ETHEEHET siet Specify Pirtesl Circeit Gerreat Bl 1 ore es ta oe Ester d te elete the cereet PE te atu FE ag ether keg te retere te the president mene b Accept or delete the current virtual circuit the one displayed on the Specify Virtual Circuit menu a f you want to use the current virtual circuit press any key other than s or a to return to the previous menu and skip to step 5 a f you want to specify a new virtual circuit press a to delete the current virtual circuit and continue to step 4 4 Specify a new virtual circuit to pass the IP traffic over the ATM network if desired a From the Specify Virtual Circuit menu shown earlier in Figure 104 press s to display a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 105 This screen lists the existing virtual circuits connected to the selected Ethernet port Figure 105 Specify Virtual Circuit Selection Screen Fathbei leer 1330 So ETHEEHET siet Specify Pirtesl Circeit tidt amp Tir E E card ijp FE tE tard ifp FI bti oa on Eater itest 41 4 Et fer previeat nema b Enter the number corresponding to the virtual circuit you want to use to pass the IP traffic over the ATM network The circuit you select will now be listed on the Specify Virtual Circuit menu 5 Configure the
304. rcuit screen initial 133 address translation VC and VP 156 admin port s IMA group parameter 84 admin status affect of setting on operational status 76 CBR parameter 123 125 DS3 E3 parameter 94 Ethernet 10 100 PCI parameter 117 IMA group parameter 84 OC3 STM 1 parameter 93 port 76 serial port parameter 98 T1 El parameter 79 voice compression parameter 131 AFA automatic frequency adjustment 79 AFA T1 El parameter 79 age bridge parameter 111 AIS alarm indicator signal OC3 STM 1 line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 Alarm History display 177 alarm indicator 44 45 alarms CBR module 175 clearing history 177 common 168 managing 165 SIM 176 system MCPU STX 167 T1 E1 UNI interface 170 VCM 176 viewing current 165 viewing history 177 alignment errors Ethernet statistic 199 application T1 E1 parameter 78 applications 255 CBR 257 DXI 244 Ethernet voice 254 HDLC SDLC 245 310 S330 integrated 260 video dial 265 ATM cell mapping DS3 E3 parameter 95 ATM DXI mode 241 243 ATM payload scramble DS3 E3 parameter 95 OC3 STM 1 parameter 93 ATM router configuring for IP over ATM 115 IP over ATM statistic 200 ATM statistics CBR 202 DS3 194 E3 195 Ethernet 201 OC3 STM 1 191 193 T1 El group 190 T1 E1 port link 189 ATM VC statistics 196 auto logout 44 automatic frequency adjustment AFA 79 avg ICP cell error rate T1 E1 group statistic 190 avg Rx cell rate IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group s
305. rd in service or out of service gt The maximum frame size is fixed at 8 KB Configuring the Configuring the standard 10BASE 10 Ethernet interface involves the following Ethernet Interface tasks Configuring the Ethernet interface a Configuring the bridge including the spanning tree a Configuring IP over ATM Configuring the The only type of configuration you can perform on the Ethernet interface is to put Ethernet Interface the port and card In Service or Out of Service To set the administrative status of the Ethernet interface 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 2 From the List Card menu select 6 ETHERNET to open the Ethernet Configuration menu shown in Figure 90 Pathieilaer 0530 EVREEMET siet Etherect Draf ipm rhi Seis Stetess Is Serer Setratiea States la tareice Etherett birer HE 00 0 Soe HW ie here Hees EST OOF 1 Set See Fates 2 Freeviee Hie Flac ater a selection 1 te amp t f 3 Select 1 Set Admin Status to put the Ethernet interface In Service or Out of Service Configuring the Bridge All of the virtual channels assigned to a particular slot and port form a network bridge In order to enable the Ethernet port standard 10BASE T or optional 10 100BASE T to operate you must configure the bridge with the required user filtering options and an aging timer value The aging timer value you spec
306. rect y n Enter y to confirm your configuration The following message appears at the bottom of the screen Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu VC has been added Press any key to continue Figure 129 shows a completed video virtual circuit template When the phone number 555 2345 is dialed the circuit that this template defines will be activated Figure 129 Completed RS 366 video Virtual Circuit Template Fathibeilaer IHi Sai Firtesl Circeit Circeit Type EGA Tenplrte Bescriptios vider cat SIRE HI TIRE SletPertftard 7k C8E E1 21S let fGreepitard 20 041 EHI 4 cet Eeffer Size 1 ar Receive WIEC Dri tell Lect latig Periti 2500 me Traacadt WIE Oh Felesi Size Tepes AT bptesfeete Frieritg 0 babik betection 1 bicabled Early Packet biceord 1 m0 figesliog Typer He Figesliag T H Bandwidth i z bet FeparE 535 2365 Prierity Early Farket Biscard 1005 TE has bem aided Press ang keg te caties ff Defining RS 366 Lite Circuits for DSX 1 E1 CBR Ports The DSX 1 E1 CBR ports support a lite RS 366 template This feature is useful if you want to set up multi point video conferencing both between remote PathBuilder S 330 S310 switches and a central PathBuilder 330 S310 switch In such applications you configure an RS 366 Lite circuit on a DSX 1 E 1 CBR port of the central unit To configure an RS 366 Lite circuit 1 From the CBR DSX E1 Port Configuration menu
307. rface Structured Voice Structured service provides N x 64 kbit second capability where N ranges between 1 and the maximum number of available DSO channels Structured voice service passes traffic with signaling information enabled it provides for DSO midspan carrier access with A amp B signaling bits terminating DS1 or E1 framing at the CBR T1 DSX or CBR E1 interface In structured voice mode you can build either structured voice or structured data virtual circuits Unstructured Unstructured service provides T1 DSX or E1 frame tunneling it allows the application to utilize the entire available bandwidth at a bit rate of 1 544 T1 or 2 E1 Mbps T1 DSX framing is optional in this service mode Framing The type of frame organization configured for the T1 DSX or E1 port interface D4 or ESF for the CBR T1 DSX module G 704 for the CBR E1 module Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection framing The Framing must match at local and remote ports CAUTION A framing mismatch can cause LOF OOF alarm conditions and result in traffic loss TC Signaling Type Structured Voice mode only The trunk condition signaling type PLAR E amp M PLAR FXS FXO FXS GroundStart or FXO GroundsStart This is the type of signaling done between PBXs This also sets the signaling type used for each of the virtual circuits across this port For PRI signaling you must set the TC Signaling Type to PLAR when
308. rlier in Figure 165 except that it lists information only for circuits on the selected buffer rather than for all circuits You can also view the number of cells received dropped and sent on each side of a particular circuit on the selected buffer by entering the desired virtual circuit number 6 To view virtual circuit statistics by port group for the selected buffer enter p from the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer Detail screen The screen that appears displays the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics by Port Group Summary screen except that it lists information by port group only for circuits on the selected buffer rather than for all circuits You can also view the number of cells received dropped and sent from and to a particular port group on the selected buffer by entering the desired port group number SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS t e This appendix provides system specifications and part numbers for the SuperStack Il PathBuilder S330 S310 WAN access switches It contains the following sections a PathBuilder S330 Specifications a PathBuilder 310 Specifications Connector Pinouts a Options and Parts List i gt Specifications are subject to change without notice PathBuilder S330 Table 15 lists complete specifications for the PathBuilder S330 WAN access switch Specifications ee Table 15 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Ethernet LOB
309. rnet interface For information about configuring the bridge and configuring IP over ATM see Configuring the Bridge and Configuring IP over ATM earlier in this chapter i gt To configure the Ethernet 10 100 interface 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card 2 From the list Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 enter the number corresponding to the slot in which the Ethernet 10 100 module is installed 7 or 8 to open the PCI Ethernet Configuration menu shown in Figure 108 Figure 108 PCI Ethernet Configuration M enu ERBER Pim E Cpnract Ec Jonna Hain Erit Fathiei leer i0 flares ERPS PCI_EVREEMET fiet FC Ethereet CoeFi ger sti Etherett Sires NOSSO pup tz tala Statens le Sereice Speeraties States ie bereice Hia Tipper dota Talect Seer Haie Tepe Me Hib Tp Ei brr bii here Heer TE Depp 1 Set binin Fetes 2 iet hiia Tft F Freri Heg Fier eater a elertia 1 te F 2 f Set the following parameters Admin Status The administrative status of the PCI Ethernet interface In Service or Out of Service Media Type The port speed 10M pbs half duplex 100 M bps half duplex 10M bps full duplex 100 M bps half duplex or autosensing The actual line speed Operational M edia Type is displayed under Oper M edia Type in the information at the top of the PCI Ethernet Configuration menu If you set the M edia Type to autosensing the port automatically detects the port
310. roup as a whole Operation Port s The port numbers of the active links in the group NE State The near end state FE State The far end state 90 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Failure Failure status Near End Asymmetric Near end rejected asymmetrical configuration or operation chosen by the far end Far End Invalid M Far end rejected the M value chosen by the user on the near end Other Failures The near end group detected multiple IMA ID multiple M or multiple symmetry or the group has duplicated IMA ID or the far end reported configuration abort without any reason Near End Insufficient Links This is a normal transitional state when the near end group is coming up If it persists it indicates that the group indeed does not have enough links to come up and pass data Far End Insufficient Links This is a normal transitional state when the far end group is coming up If it persists it indicates that the group indeed does not have enough links to come up and pass data Near End Blocked The near end group cannot pass data due to LODS Far End Blocked The far end group has enough links but cannot pass data for some other reason Near End Startup This is a normal transitional state when the near end group is coming up Far End Startup This is a normal transitional state when the far end group is coming up No Failure The group ha
311. rs 74 configuring shapers 73 CTX Buffersmenu 75 236 CTX menu 73 CTX Queue Buffer Configuration menu 75 CTX Shapers menu 74 Current Alarm display 166 current cell status CBR ATM statistic 203 CVS coding violations OC3 STM 1 far line statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 far path statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 section statistic 191 D data bytes to CBR ATM statistic 203 checking to determine DBA Bits mask setting 138 data flow CBR module 258 OC3 STM 1 port 239 T1 E1 UNI interface 238 data rate serial port parameter 98 database 64 backing up 64 backing up and restoring 64 erasing 56 DBA 138 DBA dynamic bandwidth allocation 8 138 139 261 structured data 139 262 structured voice 262 DBA dynamica bandwidth allocation structured voice 139 DBA bits mask CBR parameter 122 203 DE to CLP mapping serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameter 152 deactivation min T1 E1 parameter 79 deactivation rate T1 E1 parameter 79 Default Gateway Configuration menu 53 default gateway configuring 53 deferred transmits Ethernet statistic 199 desc description Ethernet ATM statistic 201 designated bridge ID spanning tree statistic 200 designated port ID spanning tree statistic 200 dest phone video dial parameter 163 Destination Address Filter menu 109 destination address filtered bridge filtering statistic 199 destination address filtering 109 DFA VCI range serial por
312. ructured data circuits with DBA for CCS common channel signaling applications To configure a CBR virtual circuit for structured data DBA follow these basic steps 1 Configure the CBR port as follows m Set the Port Mode to Structured Data m Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application 2 Configure the CBR circuit as follows m Set the Mode to DBA m Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application The Payload Size Type Onhook Detection and Signaling Type parameters are set automatically when you set the circuit Mode to DBA Defining RS 366 Video Virtual Circuit Templates Configuring Virtual Circuits 137 Setting up a PRI PBX Tie Line PRI signaling is a type of CCS in which one channel 24 is used to signal for the other channels 1 23 This is in contrast to CAS in which signaling is done on all channels To set up a PRI PBX tie line follow these basic steps Configure the CBR port as follows Set the Port Mode to Structured Data a Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application Configure the CBR circuits as follows For channel 24 set the Mode to Normal For channels 1 23 set the Mode to DBA a Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application The RS 366 video dial feature uses CBR virtual circuits to support dialed video conferencing over an ATM network The feature works as follows a To set up RS 366 virtual circuit t
313. s From the Card Statistics menu select 9 E3 UNI to open the E3 UNI Performance Management menu This menu is similar to the OC3 STM 1 Performance Management menu shown earlier in Figure 162 Select 1 E3 UNI Performance M onitoring to open the E3 Performance Management menu The E3 Performance Management menu provides the following information SEFS The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs encountered by the E3 interface LCV The number of line coding violations LCVs encountered by the E3 interface LES The number of line errored seconds LESs encountered by the E3 interface Viewing SIM Card Statistics Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 195 Viewing E3 UNI ATM Statistics To view E3 ATM statistics From the Card Statistics menu select 9 E3 UNI to open the E3 Performance Management menu From the E3 Performance Management menu select 2 ATM Statistics ATM cell statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset On the E3 ATM Statistics screen you can reset the counter by entering c The E3 ATM Statistics menu provides the following information Cells received The number of ATM cells received on the E3 since the last user reset of this counter Cells transmitted The number of ATM cells transmitted on the E3 since the last user reset of this counter Cells dropped The number of idle unassigned cells encountered and dropped on the interface Cells with HCS errors
314. s VCM VCC circuits carry individual voice fax modem or data connections For details about setting up VCM VCC circuits see Adding Voice Compression M odule VCC Circuits later in this chapter VCM Subchannel Voice Compression module subchannel circuits VCM subchannel circuits carry multiple voice samples from a single DSO For details about setting up subchannel circuits see Adding VCM Subchannel Circuits later in this chapter 130 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Adding Virtual Circuits To define a virtual circuit 1 From the Configuration Management menu select 2 Manage Circuit to open the Virtual Circuit Menu shown in Figure 119 Figure 119 Virtual Circuit Menu Fathibelleer IHi firtesl Circeit Hee 1 Last artes Circeits 2 i Virtaal Circeit F Hifp Firtes Circeit A ielete Firteal Circeit S een firtesl fircet Fhaetistics b Bott Firteal Circaits By Pertstresp Ta Sheu Firtesl Circeit Ftatistics Ep Perlis Frewiest Heese Flac ater a selection 1 te amp f 2 Select 2 Add Virtual Circuit The Add Virtual Circuit screen appears as shown in Figure 120 Figure 120 Initial Add Virtual Circuit Screen Tela FOL Fathieilaer 0530 Sii Firtesl Circeit Eater eccriptiea 12 characters Aaris fj 3 Enter a description for the virtual circuit you are defining We recommend that you do not use the description lt 366 ca11 gt This is
315. s 1 te F F f Check that a destination phone number and a current connection status of active are listed at the top of the M anually Disconnect A Site menu If there is no active connection your disconnect request will be rejected by the system Select 1 Set Disconnect to end the dial up session You build the video call routing table as you create video associated virtual circuits between PathBuilder S330 S310 CBR modules When you enter a number either from a video keypad or from the Manually Connect A Site menu to start a video dial up session the system checks the number you enter against the call routing table and makes a connection if it finds a match To view the video call routing table From the Configuration Management menu select 5 Manage Video Dial to open the Manage Video Dial menu shown earlier in Figure 144 From the Manage Video Dial menu select 1 Display Video Call Routing Table to display the Video Call Routing Table shown in Figure 147 Each row in the video call routing table corresponds to a video associated virtual circuit call between PathBuilder S330 S310 CBR modules The table provides the following information for each entry Index A unique number identifying this entry in the call routing table Dest Phone The destination phone number associated with this call Tx VPI VCI The trunk transmission VPI VCI associated with this call Rx VPI VCI The trunk receiving VPI VCI asso
316. s Heese Fler enter a selecties 1 te 11 11 f 2 From the System Administration menu select 3 Manage System Clock to open the System Clock Configuration menu shown in Figure 41 Figure 41 System Clock Configuration Menu Fathbellaer iF lmm Eee oerbem Fleck Ceefigerstiss fesbes Check Debereel aefeelted Cletk Hee Hee beser iiw bewertiew Tine IIE 15 ihi Priaritptileck 1 He Clack Priaritptleck 5 He Clack Frim itptlmk Z He fleck Frisvitptleck He Clk Prisritgtieck 3 He Clack Prisritgtieck 7 He Clack Frise iptleck bi He Cleck Friscitptleck He Fleck 1 Set Fleck Hebe Ta Set Friaritgtleck 2 tet hesertice Timin amp tet Prieritptieck F det Frieritptlek 1 Fa tet Frieritpriek T A Set Priaritptlerk 2 10 Set Priaritetleck Ta bet Frisritetilek F 11 Tet Sel te Nigri Frieity b Set Priaritptleck 4 13 Previess Haws Fleaie eater a selection 1 te 1 12 E 3 Specify the clock source s to be used for system timing a From the System Clock Configuration menu select 3 Set PriorityClock 1 to open the Priority Clock Configuration menu shown in Figure 42 Performing Initial System Configuration 47 Figure 42 Priority Clock Configuration Menu Fathiei leer 0 30 alma FPS Frisritetleck H Ceefigerstiss He Cimi lsteregl Iha GE TEH a Fit Preis Hee Flac aber a selection 1 te 7 7 E b Enter the option number corresponding to the clock source you want to designate as the priori
317. s MAC address and that of workstation 2 Switch A groups the packets into cells and since it does not know where workstation 2 is broadcasts the cells on all VPI VCls Switch B learns that workstation 1 transmits to its T1 E1 UNI port over VPI VCI 1 33 and VPI VCI 2 35 This information is then stored in forwarding tables in Switch B When workstation 2 responds it includes its MAC address and that of workstation 1 in the packets Switch B looks in the appropriate forwarding table and finds that it can reach workstation 1 on VPI VCI 2 5 When the first response cell on 2 35 is formatted back into packets at Switch A then Switch B learns how to reach workstation 2 without broadcasting Figure 180 Virtual Circuits in a Simple Network Workstation 1 VPI VCI 1 33 LAN LAN nxT1or AA nxE1 SS N PathBuilder PathBuilder EA 8330 8310 330 S310 B LAN A VPI VCI LAN AB 2 35 BB PathBuilder S330 S310 Workstation 2 Ethernet Interface LOBASE T or 10 100BASE T 253 The aggregate of VPls VCls assigned to the Ethernet connection of the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch is referred to as a bridge Since the switch reads and stores MAC addresses and associated VPls VCls as described above the bridge is called a learning bridge Each learning bridge of the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch has a separate forwarding table containing the MAC address to VPI VCI associations When a learned entry is stored in a forwarding table
318. s is set to Out of Service whether or not the port is actually operational or not Once you set the administrative status to In Service online the operational status will indicate the true port status Out of Service if there is a port failure or In Service if not The following sections tell you how to configure specific ports on the PathBuilder 330 S310 switch Configuring the T1 E1 Interface 77 Configuring the T1 E1 Interface i gt Configuring the T1 E1 Ports gt 1 Configuring the T1 E1 interface involves the following tasks a Configuring the individual T1 E1 ports a Setting up and configuring UNI and or IMA groups if desired a Viewing IMA link and group status Configuring the T1 E1 card The PathBuilder S310 switch has only one T1 E1 port and does not support IMA groups To configure the individual T1 E1 ports From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 63 From the List Card menu select 3 DS1 UNI to open the T1 DS1 UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu Figure 67 shows the T1 DS1 UNI Configuration menu The E1 UNI Configuration menu is the same Figure 67 T1 DS1 UNI Configuration M enu AW Tedeet 15 BF ZTM Gd mm E Fathbai leer 1330 So betes Pr WHI CraFigpm rtis Fet Gafigm rtis Nd Li ttatas rep CeePigerstise Na Gre States Ce Cee Pig sien Previa Hea Ce hh Plitis weber a telection 1 t
319. s no failure FE Tx Clocking Far end transmit clocking mode common or independent Tx Timing Ref Link The near end transmitting timing reference port for cell clock recovery Rx Timing Ref Link The near end received timing reference port for cell clock recovery Rx IMA ID The IMA receive group ID This number reflects the remote IMA ID NE State Last Changed The date and time at which the near end state last changed Rx Framer Length Receive M value The frame length of the first link that can communicate with the far end is chosen as the frame length of the far end group Least Delay Link The port number of the fasted link in the group Oper LInk Delay Operational link delay the actual value of the link differential delay Tx Available Cell Rate cps The available cell rate for active Tx links in this group 0 28 728 cps for T1 M 128 0 35 920 cps for E1 M 128 The available cell rate indicates how much bandwidth can be carried across the group It varies depending on how many links in the group are actually working Rx Available Cell Rate cps The available cell rate for active Rx links in this group 0 28 728 cps for T1 M 128 0 35 920 cps for E1 M 128 The available cell rate indicates how much bandwidth can be carried across the group It varies depending on how many links in the group are actually working Tx Configured Links The number of configured transmit links
320. s that you make during the auto saving interval will be lost Thus we recommend that you use the 7 Update Flash File System option as described above immediately after you make major configuration changes Viewing and Configuring System Information 67 Resetting the Interface The PathBuilder S330 S310 software allows you to reset only the M CPU interface Card card and the Voice Compression module VCM card Resetting the M CPU reboots the system To reset the MCPU interface card or the VCM card i gt If you reset the M CPU interface card you will terminate your Telnet session 1 From the System Administration menu select 8 Reset Interface Card You are prompted to select the card you want to reset 2 Enter the option corresponding to the card you want to reset M CPU or VCM The following prompt appears Are you sure you want to reset this card Y N 3 Enter y to reset the selected card N Viewing an Equipment To view information about the modules currently installed in your shelf List Figure 58 Equipment List Fathieileer 14i Egipat List FaeTE idgeren 9 FEST E orm H30 1197 0 000 O30 1797 0 000 H20 1197 0 000 O30 1197 0 000 Han 1197 0 000 030 1197 0 000 H2N 1197 0 600 Cia 1 3 as o30 11755 0007 ITE Geer FH Press ang beg te previees oro 117 0 4177 0 1197 i 4177 0 1147 i 4177 0 11755 From the System Administration menu select 9 Show Equipment List Figure 5
321. s will not be purged when the List Forwarding Table is aged and the Age column on the List Forwarding Table will display Permanent for this entry Configuring IP over ATM 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as desired to add more addresses to the Bridge Static Table To view the current Bridge Static Table select 1 List Static Table from the Bridge Static Table menu a To delete an address from the table select 3 Delete MAC Address from Bridge Static Table menu and enter the number corresponding to the address you want to delete Then enter y at the confirmation prompt to delete the selected address from the Bridge Static Table In addition to the standard bridging configuration described in the previous section you can also configure IP over ATM for the Ethernet 10BASE T or 10 100BASE T PCI Ethernet port IP over ATM is a method to pass IP traffic across an ATM network it follows RFC 1577 RFC 2225 To configure IP over ATM for an Ethernet port Access the IP over ATM menu for the Ethernet port for which you want to configure IP over ATM a From the main menu select 2 Configuration Management b Select 4 Manage IP over ATM The Manage IP over ATM port selection menu appears as shown in Figure 101 If you have installed the Ethernet 10 100 module an additional option appears on the Manage IP over ATM menu allowing you to select the PCI Ethernet interface for IP over ATM configuration Figure 101 IP over ATM Port Selectio
322. ssociated with each port group Figure 142 Access VCs by Port Group Selection Menu S teleed ELEF Fathielleer 0530 bores BES Ep Partie Ester itea 1 5 te display pertgresp FCs Est fer prerie maa fj Modifying Existing Virtual Circuits 3 Enter the number corresponding to the port or group for which you want to view 1 virtual circuits to open the Access Virtual Circuits by Port Group screen shown in Figure 143 Figure 143 Access Virtual Circuits by Port Group Screen Ateeet MRNA E Cenract Ect orana Hal Fanm Fatikaildsr 30 alwa MRN Borers Firtesl Circeits Ey Fert irerp tet amp tie E ECE card ijp rz tE tard ifp Fz tE Brccriptitik 1 TH bri i 1 tebe 41 E DHE fyi te x hh i ME ire beri tE ed CHE 771 Tele Eii ei Ge ant Ca ete oF Ester ateml 1 7 Eit far prerie maa The Access Virtual Circuits by Port Group screen provides the same information as the List Virtual Circuit screen See Viewing Virtual Circuits for the Entire Chassis earlier in this section for details To view detailed information about one of the listed circuits enter the desired VC A prompt appears at the bottom of the screen This prompt lists the selected circuit and provides you a list of options m Enter 1 to open the Access Virtual Circuits by Port Group detail screen This screen provides the same information as the List Virtual Circuits Detail screen shown earlier in Figure 141 See Viewing Virtual
323. ssumed to be ended if no further digits have been received 6 60 This parameter applies to the video dial feature The RS 366 specification does not require all calls to be ended with the EON End of Number digit If no EON is available the CBR software uses the Dial Timer to determine when dialing is complete The CBR software resets the timer each time a digit is received When the timer expires the dialing is assumed to be completed and the RS 366 driver forwards the call to the call handling task for further processing When used alone the CBR V 35 interface is used in the lease line environment i gt and all of the interface signals are forced to on When used with RS 366 the CBR V 35 interface is used in a switched environment The DSR and CTS amp DCD options allow you to emulate the switched environment by specifying that certain interface signals should go off in alarm conditions DSR Option Specifies the behavior of the DSR interface signal Forced On Force the DSR signal to on in all conditions Follow DTR Direct the DSR signal to follow the DTR signal Toggle Toggle the DSR signal off for three seconds and then to on after the DSC goes off CTS amp DCD Option Specifies the behavior of the CTS and DCD interface signals Forced On Force the CTS and DCD signals to on in all conditions Follow DTR Direct the CTS and DCD signals to follow the DTR signal Follow DTR amp DSC Direct the CTS and DCD s
324. t On the T1 DSX E1 receive side the data flow is as follows a A line interface unit recovers the digital data a The data flows through a framer to extract the serial data stream m The data is fed to the AAL1 SAR device m The SAR converts the data into ATM cells and tags the cells with the internal VP VC number The cells are passed through a FIFO to the CTX module On the T1 DSX E1 transmit side the data flow is as follows a Cells received from the CTX module are buffered in a 32 cell FIFO to decouple the CTX cells from the SAR The depth of the FIFO is determined by the CDVT cell delay variation tolerance CDVT parameter that you set m The cells are fed in the SAR and the SAR terminates the AAL1 pointer overhead and places the payload in memory For unstructured data the clock is recovered using the adaptive or the SRTS technique or it can be loop timed If the SRTS technique is used the system clocks on both ends must be synchronized a The clock and data are sent out to a framer chip where the frame is added and the signal is converted into analog An 8 KHz clock is extracted from one of the T1 DSX E1 clocks and fed to the motherboard connector This clock is used as one of the options to derive the system clock The module also accepts an 8 Khz clock from the motherboard to provide the T1 DSX E1 and serial timing For the serial interface the data is clocked as a serial bit stream and transferred to the SAR
325. t DXI virtual circuit parameter 153 DFA VCI serial port DXI virtual circuit parameter 153 DFA VPI serial port DXI virtual circuit parameter 153 DFA mapping in the DXI frame 244 diagnostics 165 dial timer CBR parameter 125 dial up sessions video ending 162 starting 161 discarded congested frames DXI statistic 196 Frame Relay statistic 196 HDLC statistic 195 serial port ATM VC statistic 197 VCM VC statistic 205 discarded frames Ethernet bridge statistic 198 discarded invalid frames DXI statistic 196 Frame Relay statistic 196 HDLC statistic 195 Discarded IP Packets 201 discarded IP packets IP over ATM statistic 200 discarded LMI frames LM I statistic 197 disp disposition bridge parameter 110 displays Add Virtual Circuit 135 Add Virtual Circuit initial 133 Alarm History 177 Bridge Static Table 111 Current Alarm 166 IP over ATM Configuration 113 List Forwarding Table 110 List Virtual Circuit Detail 157 158 List Virtual Circuit Summary 157 MCPU Shapers 72 Report Firmware Version 61 title 42 Video Call Routing Table 164 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail 209 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Summary 208 Virtual Circuit Statistics Summary 207 DM degraded minutes CBR statistic 202 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 downloading firmware via FTP 63 via serial port 64 via TFTP 62 drop and insert 259 dropped VC statistic 208 DSO combining structured 260 DS3 framing mode DS3 E3 parame
326. t enforcing 71 service interworking 246 servicing xi SES severely errored seconds 192 CBR statistic 202 OC3 STM 1 far line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 section statistic 191 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 SES IM A near end severely errored seconds IMA link statistic 188 SES IM A FE far end severely errored seconds IMA link statistic 188 shaper number common virtual circuit parameter 150 shapers configuring CTX 73 configuring MCPU 71 tips on configuring MCPU 71 viewing VC statistics for 208 shelf viewing configuration information 69 viewing modules installed in 67 signaling voice compression parameter 130 silence compression voice compression parameter 128 SIM Configuration Port Card Selection menu 96 SIM local management interface LM I configuring 98 SIM Port Configuration Port LM Selection menu 97 single collisions Ethernet statistic 199 site requirements 14 slot 9 effects of populating on IMA group 1 38 80 slot equipment list parameter 67 slot port common virtual circuit parameter 150 Sonet interface mode OC3 STM 1 parameter 93 Source Address Filter menu 108 source address filtered bridge filtering statistic 199 source address filtering 108 configuring 108 Source Protocol Filter menu 107 source protocol filtering 106 107 Spanning 200 spanning tree 3 5 configuring 105 instances 251 operation 250 statistics 200 VC VC bridging operati
327. t 3Com and a copy will be provided to you UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND If you are a United States government agency then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com s standard commercial license for the Software Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 or FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 whichever is applicable You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in or delivered to you in conjunction with this User Guide 3Com the 3Com logo and SuperStack are registered trademarks and PathBuilder is a trademark of 3Com Corporation 3ComFacts is a service mark of 3Com Corporation All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated CONTENTS WARNING INFORMATION Servicing xi Rack Mounting xi Power and Power Cords xii EMI xii Safety Classification of Ports for Connection to Telecommunications Networks xii SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Part 68 Sta
328. t exceeded the maximum permitted frame size Alignment Errors The total number of alignment errors detected for the bridged physical port since the statistics were last cleared Spanning Tree Statistics The Spanning Tree Statistics screen displays the following statistics Bridge Identifier The bridge address of the Ethernet port Root Bridge The bridge root address of the Ethernet port Designated Bridge ID The designated Spanning Tree bridge ID of this port Hello Time The time interval between issuing STP Spanning Tree Protocol configuration messages Forward Delay The amount of time in the learning and listening states half the amount of time that must elapse between the time when it is decided that a port should become part of the Spanning Tree and the time when data traffic is allowed to be forwarded to and from that port Maximum Age The time at which a configuration message is discarded Port Identifier The bridge root port of the Ethernet port Root Path Cost The bridge root path cost of the Ethernet port Root Port The bridge root port of the Ethernet port Designated Port ID The designated Spanning Tree bridge port ID of this port Br Topology Changed The topology change state of Spanning Tree for this port Br Topology Changed Count The number of topology changes of Spanning Tree for this port Total Forward Transitions The total number of times this port has
329. t loopback Select 2 Apply Setting to Channel s The following prompt appears Enter Channel 1 8 Enter the number s of the channel s to which you want to apply the settings to set the specified loopback for those channels You can enter a single channel a range of channels for example 4 6 or a list of channels separated by commas for example 4 5 6 gt Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 185 Setting Tone Injection To set tone injection From the VCM Loopback menu shown earlier in Figure 158 select 3 Set Tone Injection You are prompted to enter a channel number Enter the number of the channel for which you want to set tone injection to open the VCM Tone Injection menu You must have a virtual circuit configured on the voice compression module in order to use the tone injection feature Select 1 Set Tone Injection and enter the appropriate number to set tone injection ON or OFF When you set Tone Injection to ON the system sends a 1000 Hz tone to the PCM interface T1 or E1 To turn the tone off set Tone Injection to OFF Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics This section tells you how to display the following types of PathBuilder S330 S310 statistics Card Statistics a Performance Monitoring screens list statistics that reflect the physical monitoring of the line These screens display one of the following types of data Current The statistics being collected for the curr
330. t number for side B of the circuit as shown in Figure 132 142 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Figure 132 VCM VCC Add Virtual Circuit Screen with Side A Completed EAE EEF Pathibeilaer 0530 Sai Firtesl Circeit Cirit Typer MH WE Bescripti ELE Set Pert tard MH PLL EHEAHCE Shaper Member 1 5807 Eke Frisrity 4 Early Fecket Piped fen Eater Sige amp tiet 2 E Early Facket PITE scoped 5 Select the slot number corresponding to the module by which you are connected to the network for side B of the circuit 6 Repeat steps 3and 4 for side B of the circuit The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Is the above information correct y n 7 Enter y to confirm your configuration Figure 133 shows a completed VCM VCC circuit As shown in the figure the following message appears at the bottom of the screen VC has been added Press any key to continue Figure 133 Completed VCM VCC Virtual Circuit J Taa 079 Fathielleer 140 Sii Firtesl Circeit Cirit Typer WH WE Bescriptiss terbcirceits fia fia Slat Part tard GRtH BGL EHESHEED Tlet tresetard E e 1 EHI Shaper Henber 1 34a EET Receive WFYI WS Priit 1 Tract FLL oS Early Feiert Piped 1057 Frieitp Early Pitiort birca ime Eater Side Early Fatket biccord d dh 2g 1 bat eee added Press ang beg te contigs 8 Press any key to return to the Virtual Cir
331. t statistics are available for both the standard 1OBASE T Ethernet port and for the optional 10 100BASE T Ethernet port These statistics are collected according to the Ethernet bridge MIB on the Ethernet port and on every ATM connection tied to this port You can view bridge filtering and Ethernet statistics and you can also view ATM VC statistics for either Ethernet port 198 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS To view Ethernet port statistics 1 From the Card Statistics menu shown earlier in Figure 161 enter the number corresponding to the Ethernet port for which you want to view statistics to open the Ethernet Statistics menu shown in Figure 163 Figure 163 Ethernet Statistics M enu A Mela Tie BF 20 id Corraci Et Jerina Hain Fati ail r 1Ft0 TLFtEp Forte bridge Hemy Etkerert FEFLLFLITF Etikett pataisas Iret Statistics IF prer AIH Statistics STH BE ttatistics Preview Heeg iA dir ti hh Flease reber a yelertisa 1 te S 5 f 2 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistic you want to view a Ethernet statistics a Ethernet Spanning Tree Statistics a P over ATM Statistics a ATM VC Statistics The following subsections describe these categories of statistics Ethernet Statistics The Ethernet Statistics screen for either the standard 10BASE T Ethernet port or the optional 10 100BASE T Ethernet port displays the following statistics Bridge Statistics
332. tatistic 190 avg Rx ICP cell error rate IMA link ATM statistic 189 avg Tx cell rate IMA link ATM statistic 189 T1 E1 group statistic 190 ATM 256 configuring 103 104 Ethernet statistics 199 filtering 250 IP over ATM 112 principles of operation 249 reassembly 254 segmentation 254 spanning tree 105 supported features 3 5 Bridge Configuration menu 104 bridge discards bridge filtering statistic 199 bridge identifier spanning tree statistic 200 Bridge menu 105 bridge parameters age 111 disp disposition 110 location 111 MAC address 110 bridge priority spanning tree parameter 106 Bridge Setup menu 107 Bridge Static Table 111 constructing 111 bridging 249 broadcast frames Ethernet bridge statistic 198 buffers 236 configuring CTX 74 congestion thresholds 75 viewing VC statistics for 209 bulletin board service 278 B BER bit error rate 79 80 BES bursty errored seconds CBR statistic 202 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 bit error rate BER 79 T1 El parameter 79 translated into total of errors 80 br topology changed count spanning tree statistic 200 br topology changed spanning tree statistic 200 bridge addressing 250 251 C call routing table video viewing 163 Canadian CS 03 Approval Information xiii card s p side A Ethernet ATM statistic 201 card s p side B Ethernet ATM statistic 201 Card Statistics menu 186 card type equipment list parameter 67 carrier sense errors Ethernet s
333. tatistic 199 CAS channel associated signaling 138 139 261 262 multiframe structure for 3x64kbit s DS1 261 CBR DSX 1 E1 ports configuring 118 CBR module 4 6 alarms 175 ATM statistics 202 configuring 117 configuring card 126 configuring circuits for clear channel signaling 139 configuring circuits for structured dataDBA 139 configuring circuits for structured voice DBA 139 dataflow 258 drop and insert 259 DSO combining 260 installed 16 LEDs 34 line build outs 34 35 loopbacks 182 performance monitoring 202 pinouts T1 DSX E1 port 230 pinouts V 35 RS 366 231 principles of operation 257 setting ports and circuits for CAS versus CCS 138 statistics 201 structured vs unstructured mode 264 T1 DSX E1 LEDs 34 38 types of interfaces 265 unstructured mode 264 unstructured tunneling 264 virtual circuit parameters 154 CBR parameters 56K 64K mode 125 admin status 123 125 CRC 4 123 CTS amp DCD option 125 DBA bits mask 122 203 dial timer 125 DSR option 125 framing 121 idle timer 122 LBO line build out 119 line code 119 port 154 port mode 120 SCR clock source 124 SCT clock source 124 SCTE clock phase control 125 SCTE clock source 124 TC signaling type 121 TC1 signaling bits 121 TC2 signaling bits 121 timing 121 CBR port modes structured 121 258 259 unstructured 121 258 CBR serial port configuring 123 124 CBR T1 DSX and V35 Configuration menu 118 CBR T1 DSX timing options 122 CBR traffic versus VBR 237 C
334. tched Network PathBuilder S330 S310 A VPI VCI 1 3 PathBuilder S330 S310 B ATM VPI VCI 2 6 Switch VPI VCI 3 23 PathBuilder S330 S310 C Typical Ethernet and Voice Application Configurations PAD Reserved Length Ethernet Packet 0 47 Bytes 2 Bytes 2 Bytes Segmentation Once it is determined that a packet should go across the bridge the packet is encapsulated per RFC 1483 and a pad and trailer conforming to AAL5 ATM Adaption Layer 5 is added at the end of the packet See Figure 182 The trailer is fixed at eight bytes and contains information such as the new length of the packet and cyclic redundancy check bytes CRC facilitates error checking at the receive end The pad is set to 0 to 47 bytes to make the full packet length including the trailer divisible by 48 bytes The packet with the RFC 1483 encapsulation is then segmented into 48 byte 384 bit cells by the SAR function Figure 182 AAL5 Pad and Trailer Trailer CRC 4 Bytes The cells are assigned to a virtual circuit defined between the incoming and outgoing ports based on the destination address of the original packet A 5 byte header containing the virtual circuit assignment along with other information is added to each cell The cells are queued in the output FIFO First In First Out memory of the Ethernet based on the bandwidth and quality of service requirements assigned to the virtual circuit at configuration The FIFO provid
335. te 4 Select 2 Set Time The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Time hh mm ss Enter the time Select 3 Previous Menu to return to the System Administration menu Select 11 Previous Menu to return to the main menu The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch supports a total of up to 10 logins at the following three access levels Read Only User Can view information and configuration settings in the PathBuilder S330 S310 interface but cannot set parameters or make any changes Read Write User Can view and set change configuration information Super User Can view and set change configuration information and can perform the following super user functions m Set passwords a Take over a read write session m Erase the system database Performing Initial System Configuration 55 This section tells you how to set passwords For details about how to take over read write sessions and how to erase the system database see Performing Additional Super User Functions later in this chapter The default passw ord for all three access levels is password This password logs you on initially as a super user For security reasons you should change the Super User Read Write and Read Only passwords as soon as possible To set the Super User Read Write or Read Only password 1 From the System Administration menu shown earlier in Figure 40 select 10 Super User Privilege to open the Super User Pr
336. te 71 PCV path coding violations CBR statistic 202 DS3 statistic 193 T1 E1 statistic 188 VCM statistic 204 peak cell rate PCR 71 Performance Management menu OC3 STM 1 190 Performance Management main menu option 43 performance monitoring CBR 202 DS3 193 E3 194 OC3 STM 1 190 T1 El group 189 T1 E1 IMA link 188 T1 E1 port link 188 VCM 204 PES P bit errored seconds DS3 statistic 193 pinouts 222 CBR V 35 RS 366 231 CBR module T1 DSX E1 port 230 Ethernet 10 100 module 222 Ethernet port 222 management interface 222 OC3 STM 1 interface 216 220 serial port EIA530 DCE cable 228 serial port EIA530 DTE cable 227 serial port RS 449 DCE cable 226 serial port RS 449 DTE cable 225 serial port V 35 DCE cable 224 serial port V 35 DTE cable 223 serial port X 21 DCE cable 230 serial port X 21 DTE cable 229 T1 E1 UNI module 223 voice compression module VCM 232 PLCP timing source DS3 E3 parameter 96 PLM path signal label mismatch OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 point to point video conferencing 140 265 266 policing 71 port configuration 28 port configuration for shelf 28 port identifier spanning tree statistic 200 port mode CBR parameter 120 port number trap client parameter 53 port receive VCI serial port ATM VC statistic 197 port receive VPI serial port ATM VC statistic 197 port state Ethernet bridge statistic 198 port transmit VCI serial port ATM VC statistic 197 port transmit VPI serial port
337. tement xiii Canadian CS 03 Approval Information xiii CE Notice xiv ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions 1 Related Documentation 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PathBuilder S330 S310 Overview 3 PathBuilder S330 Features 3 PathBuilder S310 Features 5 Application Support 7 Key Benefits 8 INSTALLATION Receiving and Inspecting the PathBuilder S330 S310 Switch 11 Installation Overview 12 Site Requirements 14 Installation Procedures 15 Step 1 Optional Install the Optional Modules in the Unit 15 ESD Precautions 18 Installing the Optional Modules in the Unit 19 Step 2 Install the Unit in the Rack 24 Step 3 Connect AC or DC Power and optionally the RPS System 25 Installing the Optional RPS System 26 Step 4 Connect I O Cabling 27 Connecting to the T1 E1 UNI Interface 29 Connecting to the Serial Port 30 Connecting to the Ethernet 1OBASE T Port 31 Connecting to the OC3 STM 1 Port 32 Connecting to the CBRModule 34 Connecting to the Voice Compression Module 35 Connecting to the Ethernet 10 100 Module 36 Connecting to the DS3 E3 Module 37 Connecting to the Four Port IMA Module 38 Step 5 Connect the Management Terminal 39 3 GETTING STARTED Logging On 41 Using the Menus 43 Navigating Through the Menus 43 Understanding the Menu Hierarchy 44 Using the Menus to Change Settings 44 Alarm Indicator 44 Performing Initial System Configuration 45 Configuring the System Clock 45 Setting up Communication Parameters 48 Configuring the Loc
338. ter 94 DS3 timing source DS3 E3 parameter 95 DS3 UNI Configuration menu 94 DS3 E3 module 4 configuring 94 LEDs 37 loopback options 181 loopbacks 181 performance monitoring 193 194 DS3 E3 parameters admin status 94 ATM cellmapping 95 ATM payload scramble 95 DS3 framing mode 94 DS3 timing source 95 E3 timing source 95 FEAC loopback 95 LBO line build out 94 PLCP timing source 96 DSR option CBR parameter 125 DTMF relay 269 voice compression parameter 128 DXI applications 244 DXI Format Mode 1A 243 DXI frame 244 DXI protocol 241 242 243 DXI virtual circuit parameters 153 dynamic bandwidth allocation DBA 8 138 139 261 E E3 timing source DS3 E3 parameter 95 E3 UNI module configuring 94 loopback options 182 loopbacks 181 performance monitoring 194 early packet discard 238 early packet discard common virtual circuit parameter 150 echo cancellation voice compression parameter 128 EMI xii encapsulation mode serial port Frame Relay virtual circuit parameter 151 translation FRE5 152 transparent FRF8 152 encoding voice compression parameter 128 equipment list 67 card type parameter 67 part idprom parameter 67 part oem parameter 68 rev parameter 68 serial parameter 68 slot parameter 67 ES errored seconds CBR statistic 202 OC3 STM 1 far line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 far path statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 line statistic 191 OC3 STM 1 path statistic 192 OC3 STM 1 section statistic 191 T1 E1
339. thBuilder switches and between a central PathBuilder S330 S310 switch and remote PathBuilder S330 S310 switches see Video Conferencing in Appendix B Since only one video virtual circuit is active at any given time you must build multiple video associated virtual circuits even though they use the same physical port and T1 E1 channels 138 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS To define an RS 366 video virtual circuit template 1 When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit type as shown earlier in Figure 121 select 2 RS366 Template As shown in Figure 127 the screen lists the slot in which the CBR module is installed and you are prompted to enter that slot number Figure 127 Selecting the Slot for Side A of a Video Virtual Circuit Template A Taa 152 LH AES Connect Edi arina ela Fatebeileer TEH i oa Sad Firtesl Circeit tirit Type ESA Templete Pemriptis vimi EE cass 7 OE Eater Side tiet 7 1 E Class POPUNI 2 Enter the appropriate slot number The screen lists the Slot Port Card you have selected and prompts you to set the administrative status of the circuit 3 Set the administrative status for the circuit The Add Virtual Circuit screen opens This screen lists the parameters you will enter for side A of the circuit template and prompts you to set the first parameter See CBR Module Virtual Circuit Parameters later in this chapter
340. that the power cord is disconnected before opening the fuse holder cover 2 Release the fuse holder by gently levering a small screwdriver under the fuse holder catch Use only 2A anti surge type fuses of the same type and manufacture as the original 3 Remove the old fuse and replace it with a new one 4 Close the fuse holder Step 4 Connect I O The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch ships with the standard interfaces installed Cabling Unless you have purchased optional modules you do not need to install any additional modules For details about how to install the optional CBR voice compression and DS3 E3 UNI modules see Step 1 Optional Install the Optional Modules in the Unit earlier in this chapter The following LEDs indicate the status of the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch as a whole See Figure 22 Power green Illuminates when the unit is turned on Status green Illuminates when the CPU completes downloading and flashes in normal state Alert red Illuminates when a major alarm is detected in the unit See Chapter 5 for information about managing system alarms 28 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Figure 22 PathBuilder S330 S310 Common LEDs Alert Status Power Figure 23 shows the port configuration of a PathBuilder S330 S310 switch Figure 23 PathBuilder 330 S310 Ports and CBR Module Optional voice compression module installed in expansion slot 8 CBR modu
341. that you set when you configure certain types of virtual circuits See Common Virtual Circuit Parameters later in this chapter for details How you configure the MCPU shapers depends on the type of service you have a f you have a peak rate service a Set the peak rate at the maximum allowable value a Set the sustained cell rate at the same rate as the peak rate a f you have a sustained rate service a Set the peak rate at the line rate for example 45M bps for a DS3 line a Set the sustained cell rate and maximum burst rate at the values given to you by your service provider CAUTION When assigning shapers for VCM circuits be sure that the shapers are wider than the bandwidth used for the voice traffic 72 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS To configure the MCPU shapers 1 From the MCPU Card menu shown in Figure 61 select 2 Shaper Configuration to open the MCPU Shaper screen shown in Figure 62 The MCPU Shaper screen consists of a table listing the current shaper values in bits second bits for the maximum burst size shaper and cells second cells for the maximum burst size shaper Initially the shapers are set to default values Figure 62 MCPU Shaper Screen PEeOOH bann SF 2000 1341000 ee H Oe isana VeEPOOO ADANG kanonan ELETTEL Eoonnnn inanan Thee O08 Fathiei leer 0530 alwa MRN FiktE HEFP Sheer bores FER isna VFEPOOO 264000 konnan ELTELT Eooon
342. the International Sale of Goods 3Com Corporation 5400 Bayfront Plaza Santa Clara CA 95054 408 326 5000
343. the OC3 STM 1 since the last user reset of this counter Cells transmitted The number of ATM cells transmitted on the OC3 STM 1 since the last user reset of this counter Cells with Correctable HCS Error The number of header check sequence HCS errored cells encountered on the ATM interface Cells with Uncorrectable HCS Error The number of idle unassigned cells encountered and dropped on the interface due to uncorrectable HCS errors You can view both performance statistics and ATM statistics for the DS3 UNI module Viewing DS3 UNI Performance Statistics To view DS3 UNI performance statistics From the Card Statistics menu select 9 DS3 UNI to open the DS3 UNI Performance Management menu This menu is similar to the OC3 STM 1 Performance Management menu shown earlier in Figure 162 Select 1 DS3 UNI Performance Monitoring to open the DS3 Performance Monitoring menu The DS3 Performance Monitoring menu provides the following information PES The number of P bit errored seconds PESs encountered by the DS3 interface PSES The number of P bit severely errored seconds PSESs encountered by the DS3 interface SEFS The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs encountered by the DS3 interface UAS The number of unavailable seconds UASs encountered by the DS3 interface LCV The number of line coding violations LCVs encountered by the DS3 interface PCV The number of path coding
344. the PathBuilder S330 S310 switch must be equipped with one of the motherboards listed in Table 4 To check the part and revision number of the motherboard view an equipment list as described earlier under Viewing an Equipment List and note the PART idprom and Rev for the MCPU Table 4 Hardware Requirements for Release 2 04 MCPU MCPU Product PART idprom Rev Date Revised PathBuilder S330 S310 030 11970 0001 CB 12 1 98 T1 multi mode fiber PathBuilder S330 S310 030 12009 0001 CB 12 1 98 T1 single mode fiber PathBuilder 330 S310 030 12010 0001 CC 12 1 98 E1 multi mode fiber PathBuilder S330 S310 030 12011 0001 CC 12 1 98 E1 single mode fiber Using the Configuration Management Menu Select 2 Configuration Management from the main menu to open the Configuration Management menu shown in Figure 59 Use this menu to access submenus and screens that allow you to Manage cards View shelf configuration information and configure the PathBuilder 330 S310 CPU CTX ports CBR module and Voice Compression module a Manage circuits List add modify and delete virtual circuits Manage the bridge Set the bridge aging timer and configure the bridge Manage IP over ATM Configure and enable disable IP over ATM for Ethernet ports LOBASE T or 10 100BASE T a Manage the video dial feature View the call routing table manually start and end video dial up sessions Using the List Card Me
345. the port is configured for structured voice TC1 Signaling Bits TC2 Signaling Bits Structured Voice mode only Trunk condition 1 and trunk condition 2 signaling bits onhook or offhook The default for TC1 Signaling Bits is onhook while the default for TC2 Signaling is offhook The default values are usually suitable for PBX applications but for channel bank applications you should set TC2 Signaling Bits to onhook For further details about trunk conditioning see DSO Trunk Conditioning later in this section Timing The type of input clock service configured for the port interface The default is System The SRTS and Adaptive options are normally used for voice applications SRTS for unstructured voice applications and Adaptive for structured voice applications System Configures the CBR port interface to use the system clock as defined in the System Clock Configuration menu as its timing source For details about designating the system clock see Configuring the System Clock in Chapter 3 Loop Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the timing source timing is received from the service loop Select Loop if the T1 DSX port is used for the network carrier service termination in which case the carrier the service loop typically provides the timing source SRTS unstructured ports only Synchronous Residual Time Stamp a means to measure the service clock frequency aga
346. ther three groups on the trunk are not used In this case all the cells coming from the high speed OC3 STM 1 are going to end up in the T1 E1 buffers You could partition the memory on the trunk side as follows with one block equalling 256 cells and the minimum queue size being 3 blocks a The T1 E1 buffer could be configured to 48K 192 blocks cells large a The high queue could be 768 cells or 3 blocks normally small a The medium queue could be up to 16 blocks large depending on the number of connections and the bursts tolerated The remaining 173 blocks could be divided evenly among the two low queues You could partition the remaining 16K cells 64 blocks as follows a 3 blocks for expansion slot 7 high a 3 blocks for expansion slot 7 low a 3 blocks for OC3 STM 1 2 high 26 blocks for OC3 STM 1 low a 3 blocks for SAR high a 26 blocks for SAR low This is just an example normally the lower the speed the more buffering is needed When the T1 E1 IMA is configured for more than one group then the first group gets four queues and the rest get two queues In most cases if the groups have the same speed then the cells reserved for the trunk can be divided equally Setting up a Virtual Circuit Early and Partial Packet Discard To configure a circuit in the PathBuilder 330 S310 you must set up a virtual circuit between any two ports through the CTX See Configuring Virtual Circuits in Chapter 4 for det
347. there is no auto switching for the voice compression mode For details about configuring VCM channels see The following subsections describe the VCM configuration tasks in greater detail For details about configuring virtual circuits for the VCM see Configuring Virtual Circuits later in this chapter in Chapter 4 Voice activity detection Voice packets are handled differently in the receive and transmit directions a From T1 E1 line to packet network the host CPU constantly polls the DSP packet buffers for voice data When it detects a voice packet it encapsulates the packet into an FRF 11 subframe and forwards it to an output interface From packet network to T1 E1 line FRF 11 packets are decoded demultiplexed and sent to the DSP as soon as they are received on the PCI interface Fax Modem detection Fax and modem signals are detected by the DSPs After a DSP informs the host CPU of the start of a fax or modem signal the host commands the DSP to switch to either 64kbps PCM or 40kbps ADPCM The DSP remains in this mode as long as the fax or modem call is still active The DSP informs the host of the end of the fax or modem call and the host then commands the DSP to switch back to regular voice mode with the configured Voice Coding scheme For details about configuring the voice coding scheme see Configuring VCM DSO Channels in Chapter 4 Fax Relay was supported in PathBuilder S330 S310 Release 2 03 but it
348. this product be referred to 3Com s service personnel The trim enclosure and other mechanically secured plates serve as protection barriers from potential hazardous internal areas No attempt should be made to troubleshoot internal components with these protective barriers removed without first disconnecting the equipment from main power Rack Mounting This equipment is for use only in complete equipment where the acceptability of the combination is determined by the applicable safety agency in the country in which it is installed This includes UL in the U S A CSA in Canada and TUV in Europe CAUTION Do not block the ventilation openings on the top and bottom of the unit during installation A minimum of 1 rack unit 1 75 space is required Rack configurations with certain combinations of 3Com equipment installed in racks with a height greater than 50 127 cm may require a counter balance weight a stabilizer bar or anti tip legs to ensure rack stability in accordance with safety agency regulations CAUTION When attaching the rack mount ears you must use the factory supplied screws Using screws other than those supplied with the rack mount ears voids your warranty and could damage the PCB CHAPTER WARNING INFORMATION Power and Power Cords This equipment is not intended for use with IT power distribution systems whose line to line voltage exceeds 250 VAC RMS defined by EN 60950 as having no direct connecti
349. tic Table or a specified number of seconds To specify the age change the Aging Timer setting on the Bridge Configuration menu See Configuring the Bridge earlier in this chapter for details The system uses the Age parameter to delete station address entries when they have had no traffic for the specified period of time Constructing the Bridge Static Table The Bridge Static Table is a list of destination MAC addresses that you want to maintain in the List Forwarding Table and do not want to be purged by the aging timer The Disp column for these addresses in the Forwarding Table reads L Static to indicate that they will remain in the Forwarding Table until they are manually deleted from the Static Table To construct the Bridge Static Table From the Bridge menu select 7 Static Table to open the Bridge Static Table menu shown inFigure 100 From this menu you can view the Static table and add and delete entries from it Figure 100 Bridge Static Table M enu A Taas 138 34 64 100 Correct Edi emina Hel Pathibelleer D530 ETHEEEHET flet Eripe Static Teele a Last Fete Tale 2 i Het biir F Belete Hi bres u Fresita Hee Flaca tabir a aelection 1 te amp 4 Select 2 Add MAC Address The Add MAC address screen appears This screen displays the following prompt Enter MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX or lt CR gt Enter the destination MAC address that you want to add to the Bridge Static Table This addres
350. ting for Ethernet port 51 setting for in band circuit 150 trap client parameter 53 Super User Privilege menu 55 sustained cell rate SCR 71 System 45 system description 3 resetting 56 67 specifications 213 viewing and configuring information 59 60 System Administration main menu option 43 System Administration menu 46 59 60 system clock configuring 45 setting priorities 47 System Clock Configuration menu 46 system configuration initial 45 T T1 DS1 Port Configuration menu 78 T1 DS1 UNI Configuration menu 77 T1 DS1 UNI Port Selection menu 78 T1 E1 parameters activation min 79 activation rate 79 admin status 79 AFA 79 application 78 bit error rate BER 79 deactivation min 79 deactivation rate 79 framing 79 gain limit 79 group 80 inband Ipbk 79 LBO line build out 79 num of IMA groups 92 operation group 92 operation link delay 80 Rx LID 80 timing 79 TxUD 80 T1 E1 ports configuring 77 78 virtual circuit parameters 151 T1 E1 UNI Configuration menu 77 T1 E1 UNI interface 3 alarms 170 configuring 77 configuring card 92 connecting 29 data flow 238 LEDs 29 loopbacks 179 overview 3 performance monitoring 188 189 principles of operation 238 specificatons 215 219 statistics 187 T1 E1 UNI module connector pinouts 223 T1 E1 virtual circuit parameters receive VCI 151 receive VPI 151 transmit VCI 151 transmit VPI 151 TC signaling type CBR parameter 121 voice compression parameter 130
351. tion 106 Specify Virtual Circuit 113 114 Super User Privilege 55 System Administration 46 59 60 System Clock Configuration 46 T1 DS1 Port Configuration 78 T1 DS1 UNI Configuration 77 T1 DS1 UNI Port Selection 78 T1 E1 Configuration 77 Time and Date Configuration 54 Trap Client 1 Configuration 52 Trap Client Configuration 52 VCM Card Statistics 204 VCM Channel Loopback 184 VCM Configuration 127 VCM Loopback 183 VCM Port Configuration 129 Virtual Circuit 133 MIBs 277 min oper ports IMA group parameter 84 min startup ports IMA group parameter 84 min flag bytes serial port parameter 98 mode CBR virtual circuit parameter 156 modes ATM DXI 241 243 frame protocol 240 Frame Relay 246 HDLC SDLC 245 protocol 240 module and application overview 235 modules viewing installed 67 multiple collisions Ethernet statistic 199 multi point video conferencing 140 267 N NE number of failures T1 E1 statistic 189 NE Rx failure IMA link parameter 88 NE Rx state IMA link parameter 87 NE state last changed IMA group parameter 91 NE state IMA group parameter 90 NE Tx state IMA link parameter 87 network card loopback 179 CBR 182 DS3 181 E3 181 VCM 183 network interworking 247 network line loopback 179 CBR 182 DS3 181 E3 181 VCM 183 network packet loopback for VCM 184 network PV timer T392 LMI parameter 101 network supplier support 278 no ATM VCs present bridge filtering statistic 199 num of IMA group s
352. tions such as video conference or multiple link PPP For CCS a DSO is used as an ISDN D channel for carrying signal messages Configuring the VCM involves the following tasks a Configuring the channels a Configuring the T1 E1 port Configuring the VCM card You access the submenus from which you perform these tasks from the VCM Configuration menu shown in Figure 115 To open the VCM Configuration menu 1 From the main menu select 2 Configuration Management to open the Configuration Management menu shown earlier in Figure 59 2 From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu shown earlier in Figure 60 3 From the List Card menu enter the number corresponding to the slot in which the VCM you want to configure is installed 7 or 8 to open the VCM Configuration menu Figure 115 shows the VCM T1 DSX Configuration menu The VCM E1 Configuration menu is the same Figure 115 VCM Configuration Menu Fathieileer 5 30 bletee WMH FPH Cees 1 hypar CeeFigereticn 2 Fert CemFigeration F Cord CemFigersticn k Presis Hie Flaca aber itlrttisa 1 te amp 8 E The following subsections describe the VCM configuration tasks in greater detail For details about configuring virtual circuits for the VCM see Configuring Virtual Circuits later in this chapter Configuring VCM DSO To configure VCM DSO channels Channels 1 From the VCM Configuration menu shown earlier in Figur
353. tp 1 Early Patket Bistard tigen bat bee riihi Press ang beg te contioes ff 3 Build a PVC on the far end PathBuilder S330 S310 switch using the M CPU as side A of the circuit Set the following parameters on the Add Virtual Circuit screen Shaper Number Choose the number corresponding to the desired shaper value You assign the shaper number from the MCPU Shapers screen See Configuring MCPU Shapers in Chapter 4 for details a IP Address You must use a the same subnet as the one you used for the near end PathBuilder 330 S310 switch Subnet Mask Specify a valid subnet mask for the IP address for example 255 255 255 0 a VPI VCI You must use the same values as you did for the near end PathBuilder S330 S310 switch a IP Encapsulation Specify the encapsulation type used for sending IP packets over the ATM link You must set the near and far ends to the same IP Encapsulation type 4 Open the Manage IP Network Configuration menu From the Configuration Management menu select 6 Manage IP Network Configuration 5 On the Manage IP Network Configuration menu select 3 Default Gateway Configuration and set the following a Set the default gateway on the far end PathBuilder S330 S310 switch to the PVC IP address you set for the near end PathBuilder 330 S310 switch in step 1 b Set the default gateway on the management station to the local host IP address of the near end PathBuilder 330 S3
354. tructured voice signaling bits of voice channels are carried along with their payload in AAL1 cells These signaling bits which are received from T1 E1 framers are stored in buffers provided in the SAR processor The CBR software periodically reads the stored signaling bits and checks for an idle condition of voice channels with on hook detection enabled m When an on hook idle signal is detected the CBR virtual circuit is deactivated and the bandwidth reserved for that channel is released for other uses such as VBR traffic a When an off hook signal is detected the CBR virtual circuit is activated Use structured voice circuits with DBA for CAS channel associated signaling applications Structured Data DBA When a CBR port is configured as structured data only DSO payload bytes are carried in AAL1 cells These data cells are stored in buffers provided in the SAR processor The CBR software periodically reads the stored data bits and checks for an idle code in the stored data bits of each DSO channel All virtual circuits in the port use a user selected DBA bit mask to mask off bits that are not a portion of the idle code a When an on hook condition idle code is detected the CBR virtual circuit is deactivated and the bandwidth reserved for that channel is released for other uses a When an off hook condition no idle code is detected the CBR virtual circuit is activated Use structured data circuits with DBA for CCS com
355. ttt feet F Terwice Hia Tzk Sper Ferte 1 bprratisa tatai Get f tereice B nia Fertis 7 Set Test Lisi Fret Lr gtk bet Test Fetters Mam Lie lag ee Det Tert Prebet t Him Tee fte tip Fety 10 Set Sinis Fetes Hias Tsjike bpr Farts 11 Prezir Ha t IHS Id Fler ater a selecties 1 te 11 11 f 6 Select 1 Set Admin Port s The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Enter Admin Port s 1 4 Enter the port numbers for the T1 E1 ports you want to include in the group You can use a hyphen to indicate a range of ports For example to include ports 1 3 in a group you could enter 1 3 Specify any of the following information by selecting the appropriate options and responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen to configure the IMA group Frame Length The frame length 32 64 128 256 Max Link Delay The maximum link differential delay allowed in the group 0 to 70 msec Min Tx Rx Startup Ports The minimum number of ports in the group that must be operational in order for the group to come up 1 to n where n is the number of ports in the group Min Tx Rx Oper Ports The minimum number of ports in the group that must be operational in order for the group to come up and be operational 1 to n where n is the number of ports in the group IMA ID A user selected number to identify the IMA group Test Link The port number of the link that is t
356. tual queue trunks a 4 forthe group 1 IMA WAN interface a Trunk bulk a Medium a Lowl a Low2 a 2 forthe AALS SAR Ethernet and V 35 RS 449 packet a SAR output SAR input CAUTION The default configuration is optimized for performance m 4for the OC3 STM 1 interface a OC3 STM 1 bulk the sum of the other three queues a OC3 STM 1 queue 1 a OC3 STM 1 queue 2 a OC3 STM 1 queue 3 You can assign shapers for these queue trunks based on peak rate or bulk shaping towards the WAN as follows From the Configuration Management menu select 1 Manage Card to open the List Card menu 2 Select 2 CTX to open the CTX menu shown in Figure 63 74 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS Configuring CTX Buffers 3 From the CTX menu select 1 Manage Shapers to open the CTX Shapers menu shown in Figure 64 Figure 64 CTX Shapers Menu Pathiellaer IHi CTE Shapers else Fri ba TEHET 1 Tr k elk Trk rp 1 i FPN Irk Grp 1 Hi iE Trk irp 1 390 8755 ee talpat TE 1E TAE lepat TE 15E ot kalk Fri iE 90 6335 tri iE FPO AIE Ester Shaper 1 10 ar 44 For previews pepe 11 F Select the number corresponding to the shaper you want to configure A prompt appears similar to the following Enter cells sec 150 195 312K Enter the desired shaper value The CTX is an output buffered switch with a 64K cell buffer capacity The software sets up a default configuration but
357. tus conditions Table 7 lists the possible IMA link failure status conditions 88 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS FE Rx Failure Far end Rx failure status in the interworking link state machine Table 7 lists the possible IMA link failure status conditions Table 7 Possible IMA Link Failure Status Conditions Failure Description link failure This is caused by LOS AIS OOF or LCD LIF failure This is caused by LIF LODS failure This is caused by LODS M isconnected This is caused by bad IMA ID bad link ID or bad SCCI blocked This is caused by AFA excessive delay or mismatched protocol fault This is caused by bad M value bad symmetry bad offset or far end Tx link unusable far end Rx link unusable no failure duplicate link ID This is caused by the far end reporting Tx unusable in the ICP cells This is caused by the far end reporting Rx unusable in the ICP cells The link has no failure Tx LID Transmit logical link ID 0 31 This number reflects the local IMA ID Rx LID Receive logical link ID 0 31 This number reflects the remote IMA ID Operation Link Delay The differential link delay referenced to the fastest link in the same group Rx Test Pattern The received test pattern received 0 254 255 indicates that no pattern has been received Test Procedure The status of the test procedure disabled operating or link failed V
358. ty 1 highest priority system reference clock to open the Reference Clock Selection menu for that interface Figure 43 shows the OC3 Reference Clock Selection menu The menus for the other interfaces are similar Figure 43 OC3 Reference Clock Selection M enu Fathibellaer D530 ECF EeFercece Clack belectciss i dat EF ilet Bh E Foeviees Heey Flere cater s selection 1 te Z z c If you selected a card that has multiple ports as the clock source in step b the Reference Clock Port Selection menu opens proceed to step d If you selected a card that does not have multiple ports as the clock source in step b skip to step e d From the Reference Clock Port Selection menu enter the option number corresponding to the port you want to designate as the clock source If you are configuring a PathBuilder S310 switch do not select unavailable ports ports 2 4 CBR ports 2 and 3 and OC3 STM 1 as system clocks even though the software lists these ports and allows you to select them 48 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Setting up Communication Parameters e Return to the System Clock Configuration menu shown earlier in Figure 41 f Repeat steps 3a 3e to designate up to seven additional clocks as the priority 2 through 8 clocks substituting the appropriate option 4 10 for 3 Set PriorityClock 1 in step 3a For example to designate the priority 2 clock select 4 Set PriorityClock 2 If the priority 1 clock fails the pri
359. u to change the buffer size and set congestion thresholds Figure 66 Configuring CTX Buffers and Congestion Thresholds J Taasi 1989F 64 101 Fatikaildsr 0430 alwa EN Eej CII prre Peffer GenFigerstiss IeterFace Flet F IHi Erp 1 barm 0 high Beffer Sire THF Ceagittioa ba 755 Comgerties BFF Sik het Beffer Sire Set Cote a bet fogpesttiee BFF Premism Flere aber a aelection 1 te amp a E MEEHIMG Chemepes te CTI beffer cpafiger piisa take effert salp atter ith 3 ef t r CTI Ha 2 back ic calected dbi tabiri 5 Select 1 Set Buffer Size The following prompt appears Enter Buffer Size 768 62580 cells 6 Enter the desired buffer size in cells 256 cells 1 block 7 Use the 2 Set Congestion On and or 3 Set Congestion Off options to change the default congestion thresholds When you select one of these options a prompt appears at the bottom of the screen allowing you to enter a new threshold in the range 0 to 100 When 76 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER 330 S310 MODULES PORTS AND APPLICATIONS the buffer reaches the Congestion On threshold the congestion filter is on When the buffer falls below the Congestion Off threshold the congestion filter is off For example if you set Congestion On to 75 and Congestion Off to 50 the congestion filter is on when the buffer is 75 full and is off when the buffer drops below 50 full See Setting Congestion Thresholds below for
360. ual circuits PVCs for access to the ATM network All the PVC s configured for a port will form a virtual Bridged Ethernet network to all other ports at the other end of the PVC The bridge operation is equivalent to a multiport bridge It works as follows The bridge learns and builds forwarding tables for every PVC that is tied to the Ethernet port When a packet is received on the port or any PVC tied to that port the source MAC address is learned and kept in the forwarding table until the aging timer expires You can use the Bridge Configuration menu to add static forwarding addresses that the bridge will not delete after the aging timer expires See Configuring the Bridge in Chapter 4 for details When the packet arrives the bridge looks up the destination MAC address to determine the destination of the packet from the forwarding tables If a destination is found the packet is forwarded to the correct destination If a destination is not found the bridge broadcasts or floods the packet on all PVC s that are tied to the Ethernet port Flooding is performed by forwarding the packet on all destinations tied to the port The PathBuilder S330 S310 switch performs LLC based multiplexing Ethernet frames are bridged as per RFC1483 Frames with NLPID of 0x00 are discarded as being invalid frames The switch does not support frames bigger than Ethernet maximum frame size 1518 or IEEE802 3 frame size 1492 bytes framing bytes c
361. uilder S330 S310 supports two modes of video conferencing point to point and multi point Point to Point Video Conferencing In point to point video conferencing two or more PathBuilder S330 S310 CBR modules are connected via their serial V 35 RS 366 ports To set up point to point conferencing you build virtual circuits defined by transmit and receive vpi vci combinations to connect the remote units To activate a point to point conference both ends must dial their respective destination phone numbers over the RS 366 interface Video data is then transmitted and received over the V 35 interface No bandwidth is allocated until the connection is made CBRModule 265 Figure 194 illustrates point to point video conferencing between three PathBuilder 330 switches 1111 2222 and 3333 Table 37 Table 38 and Table 39 list possible routing tables for the three units Figure 194 Point to Point Video Conferencing Video Audio Video Audio Video Audio Codec Codec Codec a _ _ ee re Hi i He m U hi i V 35 V 35 V 35 RS 449 RS 366 RS 449 RS 366 RS 449 RS 366 RS 530 RS 530 RS 530 X 21 X 21 X 21 _ PBS330 2222 Table 37 Point to point Video Conferencing Routing Table Remote Unit 1111 Destination Tx vpi vci Rx vpi vci Speed Status 2222 0 1 0 2 384k active 3333 0 1 0 3 384k idle Table 38 Point to point Video Conferencing Routing Table Remote Unit 2222
362. uperStack II PathBuilder S310E ATM WAN Access Switch Base System with DC Ethernet V 35 RS 449 data and one E1 UNI Optional Two Port CBR Module with one T1 DSX port and one V 35 RS 449 port Optional Two Port CBR Module with one E1 port and one V 35 RS 449 port Optional DS1 Voice Compression Module 1 SIMM Optional E1 Voice Compression Module 1 SIMM Voice Compression SIMM Optional Ethernet 10 100 Module Table 34 Ancillary Items Part Number 3C16071 3C16073 Description SuperStack Il Advanced RPS Chassis only eight slots SuperStack Il Advanced RPS 100 W Module Table 35 Cables and Connectors Part Number 3C16079 3C63319 3C63905 3C63906 3C63907 3C63908 3C63909 3C63910 3C63913 continued Description SuperStack Il Advanced RPS Y cable V 35 RS 366 CBR Y cable Fiber cable SC multi mode to SC 8 m 25 ft Fiber cable SC multi mode to FC 8 m 25 ft Fiber cable SC multi mode to ST 8 m 25 ft Fiber cable SC single mode to SC 8 m 25 ft Fiber cable SC single mode to FC 8 m 25 ft Fiber cable SC single mode to ST 8 m 25 ft V 35 cable HD 60 pin male to V 35 35 pin male 2m 6ft crossover DTE 234 APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND PART NUMBERS Table 35 Cables and Connectors continued Part Number 3C63914 continued 3C63920 3C63921 3C63922 3C63923 3C63924 3C 63925 3C63902 3C 63903 3C63904 AMP 87977 1 AMP 87756 7 Description V 35 cable HD 60 pin male str
363. utput on the receive side the transmitted data will continue to go on the output Network Card Loops the T1 E1 received payload back toward the line output 180 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Figure 153 illustrates the loopbacks for T1 E1 Figure 153 11 E1 Loopbacks T1 E1 Interface Network Side Network Card Local Line Payload OC3 STM 1 Loopbacks The following loopbacks are available for the OC3 STM 1 interface Network Line Loops the OC3 STM 1 received data back on the output side after the digital data has been recovered Local Card Loops the transmit OC3 STM 1 output on the receive side the transmitted data will continue to go on the output Figure 154 illustrates the loopbacks for OC3 STM 1 Figure 154 OC3 STM 1 Loopbacks OC3 Interface Network Side Local Card Network Line Payload DS3 Loopbacks E3 Loopbacks The DS3 module supports the following loopbacks Local Card Loops the transmit DS3output on the receive side All cells coming from the DS3 card are looped through the backplane and back to the DS3 card The transmitted data will continue to go on the output Network Line Loops the DS3 received data back on the output side after the digital data has been recovered Network Card Loops the DS3 received cell payload back toward the line output Figure 155 illustrates the DS3 loopback
364. violations PCVs encountered by the DS3 interface LES The number of line errored seconds LESs encountered by the DS3 interface CCV The number of C bit coding violations CCVs encountered by the DS3 interface Viewing E3 Card Statistics CES The number of C bit errored seconds CESs encountered by the DS3 interface CSES The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs encountered by the DS3 interface Viewing DS3 UNI ATM Statistics To view DS3 ATM statistics From the Card Statistics menu select 9 DS3 UNI to open the DS3 Performance Management menu From the DS3 Performance Management menu select 2 ATM Statistics ATM cell statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset On the DS3 ATM Statistics screen you can reset the counter by entering c The DS3 ATM Statistics menu provides the following information Cells received The number of ATM cells received on the DS3 since the last user reset of this counter Cells transmitted The number of ATM cells transmitted on the DS3 since the last user reset of this counter Cells dropped The number of idle unassigned cells encountered and dropped on the interface Cells with HCS errors The number of header check sequence HCS errored cells encountered on the ATM interface You can view both performance statistics and ATM statistics for the E3 UNI module Viewing E3 UNI Performance Statistics To view E3 UNI performance statistic
365. where it is converted into a structured path AAL1 stream On the receive from the ATM side the cells are passed from the CTX to the SAR and the original data is recovered A timing option allows end to end clock recovery The data is then sent serially over the connector A sensing option in the cable allows automatic detection of DCE and V 35 RS 449 options CBRModule 259 Structured DS1 Implement the structured service if you require DSO midspan drop and insert See Figure 186 Figure 186 CBR Structured DS1 Drop and Insert Pa S Paa DSO DS1 i a tf a DSO 5 VPO VC35 gt ATM Network q a wl i tL Structured CBR traffic DSO 5 PathBuilder S330 S310 Channel Bank Public Switched Telephone A Channel bank converts analog to T1 putting channel on DSO 5 Network PathBuilder S330 S310 puts DSO 5 on virtual circuit VPO VC35 and passes structured CBR traffic through to the ATM network ATM network continues to carry CBR traffic on to another ATM network or drops the traffic on DSO 5 toa public switched telephone network Midspan drop and insert allows services such as public switched telephone service to be inserted into the ATM link Combining this service with Ethernet bridge service will provide you with a complete integrated communications access solution as shown in Figure 187 Figure 187 Integrated PathBuilder S330 S310 Application PBX or
366. with E1 Balun Adapter ESF SF D4 or No Framing for T1 G 703 704 for E1 B8ZS for T1 AMI for special applications HDB3 for E1 HEC ITU T G 804 1 432 T1 E1 UNI with IMA 0 7 5 15 0 22 5dB CSU 0 to 655 ft DSX CSU DSX 0 7 5 15 dB Yes 1 SR or IR Duplex SC SONET scrambled NRZ M ulti mode or single mode 1300nm 30 0 dBm to 14 0 dBm for multi mode SR 31 0 dBm to 8 0 dBm for single mode IR 19 0 dBm 14 0 dBm for multi mode SR 15 0 dBm 8 0 dBm for single mode IR Internal or external VP or VC level UNI ATM UNI 3 x Table 15 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications continued Serial Interface Number of ports Interface type Data support ATM support Clock Shaping Data rates Minimum Maximum Maximum cable length Clock outputs Connector type on unit Connector type on V 35 cable converter Connector type on RS 422 cable converter Connector type on EIA530 cable converter Connector type on X 21 cable converter CBR MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Number of ports Interface type s T1 DSX E1 physical Impedance Framing Line Coding LBO Serial Clock Front panel LEDs 1 3 Data rates ATM support Timing Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Class of Service T1 DSX Elconnector type Connector type at end of V 35 RS 366 cable continued 1 HD 60 pin DCE or DTE female V 35 RS 449 EIA530 through cable converters Transparent HDLC SDLC Frame Relay ATM
367. with shielded communications cables with metal connector hoods the use of unshielded cables may void this compliance a Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications a Europe This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Safety Classification of Ports for Connection to Telecommunications Networks The following port types in the product range are classified according to the Harmonized Europeans Standard EN41003 subclause 4 1 3 as follows E1 E3 TNV normally operating within SELV limits TNV 1 1Telecommunications Network Voltage EN60950 subclause 1 2 8 8 2Safety Extra Low Voltage EN60950 subclause 1 2 8 5 FCC Part 68 Statement xiii SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATORY INFORMATION This section describes the compliance of the SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 and the SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 WAN access switches PathBuilder S330 S310 switches with FCC Industry Canada and CE regulations FCC Part 68 Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules On the product is a label that contains the FCC registration number for this device If requested you must provide this information to t
368. y counts of cells sent and cells dropped for each shaper as shown in Figure 166 Figure 166 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Summary Screen Fathiellaer O50 Re Stetishics Bp Shaper 1 Tr k belie 7 Trk Grp 1 OF n n He Sat tatpat b EC Belk D D ot i Eater iteki 1 5 Far d tailt te clear ML ttaticties EM Fer perir see 208 CHAPTER 5 PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer Queue 4 1 To view statistics for a single shaper enter the desired shaper number As shown in Figure 167 the Virtual Statistics by Shaper detail screen lists the number of cells received dropped and sent on the selected shaper Figure 167 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail Screen Fathiei leer 30 alwa MEN EE Ftetitticr Fer AE ete Cells a Shaper becelend Prepp U iat i Prats cote clear ML statistic te ibti FEC Bote oe ep pet ES fe perier me To view virtual circuit statistics by circuit for the selected shaper enter v from the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail screen The screen that appears displays the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics Summary screen shown earlier in Figure 165 except that it lists information only for circuits on the selected shaper rather than for all circuits You can view the number of cells received dropped and sent on each side of a particular circuit

3C63308 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents